7145 West Tidwell ~ Houston, Texas 77092
(888) 884-7695 www.tcpn.org
SUBMITTAL DEADLINE: Thursday, September 16, 2010 @ 10:00 AM CDT
Questions regarding this solicitation must be submitted to questions@tcpn.org
no later than September 16th.
All questions and answers will be posted to http://www.tcpn.org/default.aspx?name=QA_10-25
It is the intention of TCPN to establish a national contract that satisfies the needs of participating governmental entities in the purchase of Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Refrigeration, Installation, Service, & Related Products. This contract will enable agencies to purchase on an “as needed” basis from a competitively awarded contract.
Respondents are requested to submit their total line of available products and services. The initial period of this contract is to be one year with six annual renewal options.
While this solicitation specifically covers Maintenance Services, Equipment Upgrades, Repairs, and New
Installations, respondents are encouraged to submit an offering on any and all products or services available that they currently perform in their normal course of business.
Responses shall be received no later than the deadline in the offices of The Cooperative Purchasing Network (TCPN).
Immediately following the deadline, all responses will be publically opened and the respondents recorded. Any response received later than the specified deadline, whether delivered in person or mailed, will be disqualified. Faxed or electronically submitted responses cannot be accepted.
Responses must be sealed and plainly marked with the company name and the opening date and time. Two (2) bound and signed copies of the proposals and two electronic copies on CD, DVD or flash drives (i.e. pin or jump drives) shall be provided.
Jason Wickel
Director TCPN
Page 1 of 103

INTRODUCTION
The Cooperative Purchasing Network (TCPN)
TCPN is a governmental entity, established in 1997, tasked with assisting public entities to increase efficiency and economy when procuring goods and services. Our contracts are available for use, and benefit, all entities that must comply with state procurement laws and regulations (public and private schools, colleges and universities, cities, counties, non-profits, and all governmental entities).
TCPN is a national purchasing cooperative, leveraging one of the largest pools of purchasing potential. TCPN competitively bids and awards contracts for commonly purchased products and services. Our unique contracts cover Facilities, Furniture, Office Supplies & Equipment, Security Systems, and Technology to name a few.
Purpose of TCPN
•
Provide governmental agencies opportunities for greater efficiency and economy in procuring goods and services.
•
Take advantage of state-of-the-art purchasing procedures to insure the most competitive contracts.
•
Provide competitive price and bulk purchasing for multiple government agencies that yields economic benefits unobtainable by the individual entity.
•
Provide quick and efficient delivery of goods and services.
•
Equalize purchasing power for smaller agencies that are unable to command the best contracts for themselves.
•
Help in assisting with use of best business practices.
Customer Service
•
TCPN is dedicated to making our contracts successful for both our members and our awarded vendors.
•
TCPN is committed to providing our members and awarded vendors with high quality service.
•
TCPN has dedicated staff available to answer questions, offer guidance and help in any way possible.
Purchasing Procedures
•
Purchase orders are issued by participating governmental agencies to the awarded vendor indicating on the
PO “Per TCPN Contract”
•
Awarded vendor delivers goods/services directly to the participating agency.
•
Awarded vendor invoices the participating agency directly.
•
Awarded vendor receives payment directly from the participating agency.
•
Awarded vendor reports sales monthly/quarterly to TCPN.
Page 2 of 103

It is the intention of TCPN to establish a contract with qualified vendor(s) for HVAC Equipment, Refrigeration,
Installation, Service, & Related Products. Awarded vendor(s) shall perform covered services under the terms of this agreement.
Pricing shall be as outlines in the forms and examples set forth in the document. If published price lists are used for pricing, electronic catalogs and/or price lists must accompany the proposal. Multiple percentage discount structure is also acceptable. Please specify where different percentage discounts apply. Additional pricing and/or discounts may be included. If respondent has existing cooperative contracts in place, TCPN requests equal or better pricing to be submitted.
Contracts may be awarded to multiple vendors. Respondents may elect to limit their proposals to a single service within any category, or multiple services within any or all categories.
TCPN is seeking a service provider that has the depth, breadth and quality of resources necessary to complete all phases
Please note that TCPN has held contracts with Trane for most of these products and services in the past.
Because of this, many of the specifications are based on Trane products. This should not be construed as favoring Trane products, any comparable products and/or services will be considered for award.
Page 3 of 103

INSTRUCTIONS TO RESPONDENTS
Submission of Response
•
Only sealed responses will be accepted. Faxed or electronically transmitted responses will not be accepted.
•
Sealed responses may be submitted on any or all items, unless stated otherwise. TCPN reserves the right to reject or accept any response.
•
Deviations to any terms, conditions and/or specifications shall be conspicuously noted in writing by the respondent and shall be included with the response.
•
Withdrawal of response will not be allowed for a period of 120 days following the opening. Pricing will remain firm for 120 days from submittal.
•
Two (2) bound and signed copies of the response, and two (2) electronic copies on CD, DVD or flash drives
(i.e. pin or jump drives) shall be provided.
Proposal Format
•
Required: Responses shall be provide in a three-ring binder or report cover using
8.5 x 11 size paper clearly identified with the name of the Respondents Company and solicitation responding to on the outside front cover and vertical spine. All forms are to be completed electronically.
Include a copy of all solicitation pages before section needing tabulation in response. Tabs should be used to separate the proposal into sections, as identified below. Respondents failing to organize in the manner listed may be considered non-responsive and may not be evaluated.
Binder Tabs
Tab 1 - Vendor Contract and Signature Form
Tab 2 - Questionnaire
Tab 3 - Company Profile
Tab 4 - Product / Services
Tab 5 - References
Tab 6 - Pricing
Tab 7 - Miscellaneous
Shipping Label
The package must be clearly identified as listed below with the solicitation number and name of the company responding. All packages must be sealed and delivered to the TCPN office no later than the submittal deadline assigned for this solicitation.
From_________________________________________________
Company______________________________________________
Address_______________________________________________
City, State, Zip _________________________________________
Solicitation Name and Number _____________________________
Due Date and Time ______________________________________
Page 4 of 103

PROCESS
In accordance with applicable laws, rules, and regulations for public purchasing, award(s) will be made to the prospective vendor whose response is determined to be the most advantageous to TCPN and its participating agencies. TCPN reserves the right to use a “Market Basket Survey” method, based on randomly selected criteria to determine the most advantageous response. To qualify for evaluation, response must have been submitted on time, and satisfy all mandatory requirements identified in this document.
Competitive Range
It may be necessary for TCPN to establish a competitive range. Responses not in the competitive range are unacceptable and do not receive further award consideration.
Deviations and Exceptions
Deviations or exceptions stipulated in response may result in disqualification. It is the intent of TCPN to award a manufacturer’s complete line of products, when possible.
Estimated Quantities
TCPN estimates considerable activity resulting from this solicitation. TCPN makes no guarantee or commitment of any kind concerning quantities that will actually be purchased. The current volume of this contract is approximately $25 million annually. TCPN makes no guarantee or commitment of any kind regarding usage of any contracts resulting from this solicitation. The volume for this contract estimates from $5 million a year to $50 million a year.
Evaluation
A committee will review and evaluate all responses and make a recommendation for award of contract(s).
TCPN will base a recommendation for contract awards on multiple factors, each factor being assigned a point value based on its importance.
Clarifications/Discussions
TCPN may request additional information or clarification from any of the respondents after review of the proposals received for the sole purpose of elimination minor irregularities, informalities, or apparent clerical mistakes in the proposal. Clarification does not give respondent an opportunity to revise or modify its proposal, except to the extent that correction of apparent clerical mistakes results in a revision. After the initial receipt of proposals, TCPN reserves the right to conduct discussions with those respondent’s whose proposals are determined to be reasonably susceptible of being selected for award. Discussions occur when oral or written communications between TCPN and respondents are conducted for the purpose clarifications involving information essential for determining the acceptability of a proposal or that provides respondent an opportunity to revise or modify its proposal. TCPN will not assist respondent bring its proposal up to the level of other proposals through discussions. TCPN will not indicate to respondent a cost or price that it must meet to neither obtain further consideration nor will it provide any information about other respondents’ proposals or prices.
Formation of Contract
A response to this solicitation is an offer to contract with TCPN based upon the terms, conditions, scope of work, and specifications contained in this request. A solicitation does not become a contract until it is accepted by TCPN. A contract is formed when TCPN’s authorized administrator signs the Signature Form and Board of
Directors approves award of the contract. The prospective vendor must submit a signed Signature Form with the response thus, eliminating the need for a formal signing process.
Multiple Awards
Page 5 of 103

TCPN has a large number of potential entities which may utilize this contract throughout the nation. In order to assure that any ensuing contract(s) will allow TCPN to fulfill current and future needs, TCPN reserves the right to award contract(s) to multiple vendors. The decision to award multiple contracts, award only one contract, or to make no awards rests solely with TCPN.
Past Performance
Past performance is relevant information regarding a vendor’s actions under previously awarded contracts; including the administrative aspects of performance; the vendor’s history of reasonable and cooperative behavior and commitment to customer satisfaction; and generally, the vendor’s businesslike concern for the interests of the customer.
Open Records Policy
Because TCPN is a governmental entity responses submitted to TCPN are subject to release as public information after contracts are executed. If a vendor believes that its response, or parts of its response, may be exempted from disclosure, the vendor must specify page-by-page and line-by-line the parts of the response, which it believes, are exempt. In addition, the respondent must specify which exception(s) are applicable and provide detailed reasons to substantiate the exception(s).
The determination of whether information is confidential and not subject to disclosure is the duty of the Office of
Attorney General (OAG). TCPN must provide the OAG sufficient information to render an opinion and therefore, vague and general claims to confidentiality by the respondent are not acceptable. TCPN must comply with the opinions of the OAG. TCPN assumes no responsibility for asserting legal arguments on behalf of any vendor.
Respondent are advised to consult with their legal counsel concerning disclosure issues resulting from this procurement process and to take precautions to safeguard trade secrets and other proprietary information.
Specifications
TCPN specifications have been developed to indicate minimal standards as to the usage, materials, and contents based on their needs. Manufacturer’s specifications (Design Guides), when used by TCPN, are to be considered informative to give the respondent information as to the type and kind requested. Responses of reputable manufacturer's regularly produced product of such items similar and substantially equivalent will be considered.
Page 6 of 103

EVALUATION CRITERIA
Pricing factors as determined by TCPN (30 points)
Electronic Price Lists
•
Products, services, warranties, etc. price list.
•
Prices listed will be used to establish both the extent of a manufacturer’s product lines, services, warranties, etc. available from a particular bidder and the pricing per item.
•
Labor Rates (Prices) should be based upon national and regional pricing.
Ability to provide and perform the required services for the contract (30 points)
•
Product delivery within participating entities specified parameters.
•
Number of line items delivered complete within the normal delivery time as a percentage of line items ordered.
•
Products ability to perform towards above requirements and desired specifications.
•
Quantity of line items available that are commonly purchased by the entity.
•
Quality of items available compared to normal participating entity standards.
•
Ability to provide all the requested services.
Value Added Services Description, Product and/or Services (20 points)
•
Marketing and Training
•
Customer Service
•
Additional products and services related to this offering.
References (10 points)
Minimum of ten (10) customer references for product and/or services of similar scope dating within the past 3 years.
Technology for supporting the program (10 points)
•
Electronic on-line catalog, order entry use by and suitability for the entity’s needs
•
Quality of vendor’s on-line resources for TCPN members.
•
Specifications and features offered by respondent’s products and/or services.
Page 7 of 103

VENDOR CONTRACT
Between and
THE COOPERATIVE PURCHASING NETWORK (TCPN)
For
HVAC Equipment, Service, Refrigeration, Plumbing and Other Related Services
The following pages will constitute the contract between the successful vendor(s) and The Cooperative
Purchasing Network (hereinafter referred to as “TCPN”), having its principal place of business at 7145 West
Tidwell, Houston, TX 77092. Respondent shall include in writing any required exceptions or deviations from these terms, conditions, and specifications. If agreed to by TCPN, they will be incorporated into the final contract
This contract consists of the provisions set forth below, including provisions of all attachments referenced herein. In the event of a conflict between the provisions set forth below and those contained in any attachment, the provisions set forth below shall control.
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1. Customer Support
The vendor shall provide timely and accurate technical advice and sales support to TCPN staff and TCPN participants. The vendor shall respond to such requests within one (1) working day after receipt of the request.
2. Assignment of Contract
No assignment of this contract may be made without the prior written approval of TCPN. Purchase orders and payments can only made to awarded vendor unless otherwise approved by TCPN.
Awarded vendor is required to notify TCPN when any material change in operations is made that may adversely affect TCPN’s members, (i.e. bankruptcy, change of ownership, merger, etc.)
3. Disclosures
Respondent affirms that he/she has not given, offered to give, nor intends to give at any time hereafter any economic opportunity, future employment, gift, loan, gratuity, special discount, trip, favor or service to a public servant in connection with this contract.
Include a complete description of any and all relationships that might be considered a conflict of interest in doing business with participants in TCPN.
The respondent affirms that, to the best of his/her knowledge, the offer has been arrived at independently, and is submitted without collusion with anyone to obtain information or gain any favoritism that would in any way limit competition or give an unfair advantage over other vendors in the award of this contract.
4. Renewal of Contract
Unless otherwise stated, all contracts are for a period of one (1) year with an option to renew annually for an additional six (6) years if agreed to by TCPN and the vendor. TCPN shall review the contract prior to the renewal date and notify the current awarded vendor each year of the contract renewal. Awarded vendor shall honor the administrative fee for any sales occurred beyond 30 days on any sales made based on a TCPN contract whether awarded a renewal or not.
5. Funding Out Clause.
Any/all contracts exceeding one (1) year shall include a standard “funding out” clause. A contract for the acquisition, including lease, of real or personal property is a commitment of the entity’s current revenue only, provided the contract contains either or both of the following provisions:
Retains to the entity the continuing right to terminate the contract at the expiration of each budget period during the term of the contract and is conditioned on a best efforts attempt by the entity to obtain appropriate funds for payment of the contract.
Page 8 of 103

6. Ordering Procedures
Purchase orders are issued by participating entities to the awarded vendor stating “Per TCPN Contract” .
7. Shipments (if applicable)
The awarded vendor shall ship ordered products within seven (7) working days for goods available and within specified time period on the vendor’s proposal for specialty items after the receipt of the order unless modified. If a product cannot be shipped within that time, the awarded vendor shall notify the entity placing the order as to why the product has not shipped and shall provide an estimated shipping date. At this point the participating entity may cancel the order if estimated shipping time is not acceptable.
8. Invoices
The awarded vendor shall submit invoices to the participating entity clearly stating “Per TCPN Contract”.
The shipment tracking number or pertinent information for verification shall be made available upon request.
9. Tax Exempt Status
Since this is a national contract, knowing the tax laws in each state is the sole responsibility of the vendor.
10. Reporting
The awarded vendor shall electronically provide TCPN with a detailed monthly or quarterly report showing the dollar volume of all sales under the contract for the previous month or quarter. Reports shall be sent via e-mail to TCPN offices at reporting@tcpn.org
. Reports are due on the fifteenth (15 th
) day after the close of the previous month or quarter. It is the responsibility of the awarded vendor to collect and compile all sales under the contract from participating members and submit one (1) report. The report shall include at least the following information as listed in the example below:
Vendor Name
TCPN Report
Month or Quarter
Entity Name Zip Code State PO or Job# Sale Amount
11. Payments
Total
The entity using the contract will make payments directly to the awarded vendor.
12. Pricing
The awarded vendor agrees to provide pricing to TCPN and its participating entities that are the lowest pricing available and the pricing shall remain so throughout the duration of the contract. The awarded vendor agrees to promptly lower the cost of any product purchased through TCPN following a reduction in the manufacturer or publisher's direct cost. Price increases must be approved by TCPN. However, the awarded vendor must honor previous prices for thirty (30) days after approval and written notification from
TCPN if requested.
All pricing submitted to TCPN shall include the two percent (2%) administrative fee to be remitted to TCPN by the awarded vendor .
It is the awarded vendor’s responsibility to keep all pricing up to date and on file with TCPN. All price changes shall be presented to TCPN for acceptance, using the same format as was accepted in the original contract.
All deliveries shall be freight prepaid, F.O.B. destination and shall be included in all pricing offered unless otherwise clearly stated in writing.
Page 9 of 103

13. Warranty conditions
All supplies, equipment and services shall include manufacturer's minimum standard warranty and one (1) year labor warranty unless otherwise agreed to in writing.
14. Indemnity
The awarded vendor shall protect, indemnify, and hold harmless TCPN and its participants, administrators, employees and agents against all claims, damages, losses and expenses arising out of or resulting from the actions of the vendor, vendor employees or vendor subcontractors in the preparation of the solicitation and the later execution of the contract. Any litigation involving TCPN, its administrators and employees and agents will be in Harris County, Texas. Any litigation involving TCPN’s members shall be in the jurisdiction of the participating agency.
15. Franchise Tax
The respondent hereby certifies that he/she is not currently delinquent in the payment of any franchise taxes.
16. Marketing
Awarded vendor agrees to allow TCPN to use their name and logo within website, marketing materials and advertisement. Any use of TCPN name and logo by awarded vendor must be approved.
17. Supplemental Agreements
The entity participating in the TCPN contract and awarded vendor may enter into a separate supplemental agreement to further define the level of service requirements over and above the minimum defined in this contract i.e. invoice requirements, ordering requirements, specialized delivery, etc. Any supplemental agreement developed as a result of this contract is exclusively between the participating entity and awarded vendor. TCPN, its agents, members and employees shall not be made party to any claim for breach of such agreement.
18. Certificates of Insurance
Statutory Workers Compensation Insurance is required in the state in which the services are to be performed. Certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the TCPN participant prior to commencement of work. The insurance company shall be licensed in the applicable state in which work is being conducted.
The awarded vendor shall give the participating entity a minimum of ten (10) days notice prior to any modifications or cancellation of policies. The awarded vendor shall require all subcontractors performing any work to maintain coverage as specified.
19. Commercial General Liability
Includes Independent Contractor's Liability; Contingent Liability; Contractual Liability; Completed Operations and Products Liability, all on the occurrence basis, with Personal Injury Coverage, Owner's Indemnity, and broad form Property Damage without the XCU exclusions. Maintain Completed Operation Liability for at least two years after the date of final completion.
Combined limits of bodily and personal injury and property damage:
Single limit
Unimpaired aggregate
$500,000.00
$2,000,000.00
Comprehensive automobile liability:
Include non-ownership and hired car coverage as well as owned vehicles.
Bodily damage
Each Person
Each Occurrence
Property damage
Each Occurrence
$250,000.00
$1,000,000.00
$250,000.00.
Page 10 of 103

20. Legal Obligations
It is the Respondent’s responsibility to be aware of and comply with all local, state, and federal laws governing the sale of products/services identified in this RFP and any awarded contract and shall comply with all while fulfilling the RFP. Applicable laws and regulation must be followed even if not specifically identified herein.
21. Miscellaneous
Either party may cancel this contract in whole or in part by providing written notice. The cancellation will take effect 30 business days after the other party receives the notice of cancellation. After the 30th business day all work will cease following completion of final purchase order.
Any Purchase order or signed agreement for maintenance or Service or equipment purchased issued up to the date of the termination of this contract will be binding for the entire term and length of the contract not to exceed 5 years.
TCPN reserves the right to request additional items not already on contract at any time.
Page 11 of 103

SIGNATURE FORM
The undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to furnish goods and/or services in strict compliance with the terms, specifications and conditions at the prices proposed within response unless noted in writing.
The undersigned further certifies that he/she is an officer of the company and has authority to negotiate and bind the company named below.
Prices are guaranteed: 180 days
Company name T.rane U.S. Inc.
Address
City/StatelZip
1 Centennial- Ave.
Piscataway, NJ 08854
Telephone No. 704-655-5499 1
Fax No. 931-648-5901
Email address jwatson@trane.com
Printed name
Position with company
Authorized signature
Accepted by The Cooperative Purchasing Network:
Term of contract lO
10 to
9 . 30· I L
Unless otherwise stated, all contracts are for a period of one (1) year with an option to renew annually for an additional six (6) years if agreed to by TCPN and the awarded vendor. Awarded vendor shall honor all administrative fees for any sales made based on a TCPN contract whether renewed orn
Date
/o/3ko
I ;
Print
N ~ k
Authorized Signature
'Kol3i:f2.\
A. l'Jcc..H'-'wc..
Print Name
TCPN Contract Number
R 50'-15
Date

1. Provide a brief history of your company, including the year it was established.
ANSWER:
Trane
Our Beginnings
For more than a century the Trane name has identified products and technology that stretched the world's idea of what was possible – a tradition that's still very much with us. In many ways Trane is a classic American success story that grew into a global one.
It began with our founder, James Trane , a Norwegian immigrant who opened his own plumbing shop in La Crosse, WI, in 1885.
With the inspiration of cold Wisconsin winters, James Trane invented a new low- pressure heating system he proudly called the Trane Vapor Heating System. His son,
Reuben, was just back from college with a degree in mechanical engineering, so father and son began manufacturing operations in 1910 and incorporated as The Trane
Company in 1913. It was Reuben's invention of the convector radiator in 1923 that firmly established the company's reputation as an innovator, a reputation Trane people have been building on ever since.
Growth through innovation
The idea of using technology to give people relief from summer heat was a radical and unproven idea when Trane became an air conditioning pioneer in 1931. Trane fundamentally changed the concept of air conditioning large buildings with the 1938 launch of Turbovac, the industry's first hermetic, centrifugal refrigeration machine. This was the beginning of a long chain of innovations leading to Trane' s current CenTraVac®, the industry standard for large commercial air conditioning systems. This is the most energy efficient system available anywhere for large buildings and it has earned Trane the "Best of the Best" Award from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Expanding our offer to customers
With the acquisition of Sentinel Electronics in the late 1970s, Trane moved into the important building automation and management field. The company was the first to offer integrated controls for all its products and became a leader in the still new field of energy management, a leadership position that continues to expand. Our days as a leader in residential air conditioning began in 1982. That's when we took advantage of an opportunity to acquire General Electric's Central Air Conditioning Division. We're proud that over the decades we've enriched the scope of our products and technology as well as the scope of the total solutions we can offer each customer.
In 1984 Trane was acquired by American Standard Companies and remained the largest of its three businesses: Air Conditioning Systems and Services, Vehicle Control
Systems (WABCO) and Bath and Kitchen.

In 1988, we re-launched the American Standard heating and air conditioning brand, introducing a new generation of families to the century-old American Standard tradition of making quality products for the home.
New Chapters
On Nov. 28, 2007 we successfully completed a plan announced the previous February to separate the three American Standard businesses, leaving each free to concentrate exclusively on the markets it knows best. Over the course of the year WABCO was spun off as an independent corporation and Bath and Kitchen was sold to Bain Capital
Partners. On Nov. 28th American Standard Companies changed its name to Trane, with its stock trading under the new symbol "TT". Our new name reflects our business focus and our leadership in providing integrated heating, ventilation and air conditioning services and solutions.
In early 2007, American Standard Companies Inc. (NYSE: ASD), based in Piscataway,
NJ, was an $11 billion dollar global enterprise with more than 62,000 employees and three market-leading businesses: Air Conditioning Systems and Services, Bath and
Kitchen Products, and Vehicle Control Systems. In the second half of 2007, the company separated its three businesses. The Air Conditioning Systems and Services sector became Trane Inc. (NYSE: TT) based in Piscataway, NJ, and its subsidiary,
American Standard Inc. became Trane U.S. Inc. Trane Inc. began trading as a public company on Nov. 28, 2007. At the time of its launch, it had annual sales of more than $7 billion and approximately 29,000 employees. On June 5, 2008, Trane was acquired by
Ingersoll Rand (NYSE: IR), which is a Bermuda-based company with U.S. executive headquarters in Montvale, NJ. http://www.ingersollrand.com/.
Today Trane Inc., as a wholly owned subsidiary of Ingersoll Rand (NYSE: IR), provides systems and services that enhance the quality and comfort of air in homes and buildings around the world. Through its two premium brands – Trane and American Standard
Heating & Air Conditioning – the business offers a broad range of energy-efficient heating, ventilation and air conditioning solutions. Its systems and services comprise dehumidifying and air cleaning products; aftermarket service and parts support; advanced building controls; and building and financing solutions, including those that allow energy-efficient systems to pay for themselves through energy savings. Trane ’s systems and services have leading positions in premium commercial, residential, institutional and industrial markets; a reputation for reliability, high quality and product innovation; and a powerful distribution network. The business has 34 plants in 10 countries and more than 29,000 employees worldwide.
Our momentum continues to build because - as our people have said for years - "it's hard to stop a Trane ."
Ingersoll-Rand
Ingersoll-Rand began in 1871 with the formation of the Ingersoll Rock Drill Company with Simon Ingersoll’s patenting the steam-powered rock drill. In 1905, the merger of
Ingersoll-Sergeant Drill Company (formed in 1988 as a result of merger) became the
Ingersoll-Rand Company, a publicly-traded corporation. In addition to the Air conditioning Segment ( Trane ), the corporation has three other segments: Climate
Control Technologies, Industrial Technologies, and Security Technologies.

The Climate Control Technologies provides equipment and services to manage controlled-temperature environments for food and other perishables, our and encompasses both transport and stationary refrigeration solutions. Product brands include Thermo King, a world leader in transport temperature control systems, and
Hussmann, a manufacturer of refrigeration and food merchandising equipment.
Ingersoll Rand Industrial Technologies provides products, services and solutions that enhance our customers' energy efficiency, productivity and operations. Our diverse and innovative products range from complete compressed air systems, tools and pumps to material and fluid handling systems and environmentally friendly microturbines. We also enhance productivity through solutions created by Club Car, the global leader in golf and utility vehicles for businesses and individuals.
Ingersoll Rand’s Security Technologies Sector is a leading global provider of products and services that make environments safe, secure and productive. The sector’s market- leading products include electronic and biometric access control systems, locks and locksets, door closers, floor closers, exit devices, steel doors and frames, portable security devices, decorative hardware, cabinet hardware and time, attendance and personnel scheduling systems from well-known brands like Schlage.
The following Trane franchise offices are independently owned and are part of this
RFP response.
Zone 1 Houston
Houston Trane founded as subsidiary of Trane Company by R. O. Hunton in 1981 and was purchased from Trane Company by R. O. Hunton in 1984. Houston Trane completed the first gas Turbine Cooling project for power plants, using commercial chillers (Destec Energy) in 1987. In 1990, Houston Trane constructed a 54,000 square foot Westpark HQ and became 1st participant in HL&P's Commercial Cool Storage Pilot
Program and later, completed the world's first CFC conversion of a high-rise building air conditioning system at Texaco Heritage Plaza in Houston, Texas.
Houston Trane changed their name to Hou-Tra International in 1997 and founded
Hou-Tra Specialty Products that same year. HVAC Mechanical Services, Inc. was purchased by Hou-Tra International and merged with Hou-Tra's Trane Aftermarket
Services Division to form a new company - a full-service, turn-key solutions provider for commercial, institutional and industrial markets headquartered at Luce St in 1998.
Hunton Distribution was formed by merging Residential equipment sales, Parts and
Supplies and Vical Financial in 2002. At the same time, Hunton Distribution expanded their territory to include West Texas, Oklahoma and Eastern New Mexico with distribution locations in Houston (2), Lubbock, Oklahoma and El Paso.
Hou-Tra International was renamed as The Hunton Group , consisting of Hunton Trane ,
Hunton Trane Services , and Hunton Specialty Products on the Commercial Solutions side; and Hunton Distribution on the Distribution side in 2004. Today, Hunton Group reaches sales of $200 million and over 350 employees along with Hunton Energy , a development company for power production using emerging and tested technologies.

Zone 4 Shreveport
H. E. "Bud" Storer , Chairman of Storer Equipment Company , joined Trane in 1959 and has represented Trane i n Shreveport since January 1962. The Shreveport district was originally a part of the New Orleans district, but came into it's own right in 1967 when
Bud was awarded the Shreveport franchise. Two years later, the Storer Trane Service
Agency was established under the leadership of Ray Butts. During the early years, customers knew us only as The Trane Company and we sold and serviced only Trane products.
Controls, parts, technical services and training were added to our portfolio over time, making us a single-source provider for our customers. In 1986 Storer Equipment purchased the Dykes Company , a manufacturer's representative for boilers and other industrial products. Our Parts Center today offers a complete line of parts not only for
Trane equipment, but for many other industry manufacturers as well.
Representing commercial and industrial boilers and boiler accessories and numerous other HVAC manufacturers, allows Storer Equipment to better serve our customers total system needs.
Our Operating Area
Our primary area of operation is within an approximate 150 mile radius of Shreveport, including North Louisiana, Northeast Texas and Southwest Arkansas. We have service technicians residing in Monroe and Alexandria, Louisiana; as well as Tyler and
Longview, Texas. Storer Equipment Company offers the highest level of professional services for heavy refrigeration and boilers while minimizing costly travel time and subsistence expense to our customers.
Our Location
Storer Equipment Company is headquartered at 504 West 67th Street, Shreveport, LA,
71106, in an 8,300 square foot office building and a 9000 square foot warehouse. A separate 4,000 square foot supply and parts warehouse is located on common land totaling approximately 1.7 acres of centrally located property.
At Storer Equipment , our business is comfort. We have the ability to offer total integrated comfort systems including HVAC equipment and controls with building management from a single source. Storer Equipment is dedicated to providing the finest quality products and service available anywhere.
We look forward to helping you "create the right atmosphere" for your facility. If you are not already a customer, we hope you will give Storer Equipment the opportunity to demonstrate our abilities.
Our Mission
The mission of Storer Equipment Company is to be the dominant manufacturer’s representative firm in our market and the supplier of choice for our engineer, contractor and owner customers in Louisiana, Texas and Arkansas for HVAC products for both commercial and industrial application, for technical services, for replacement parts and for Integrated Comfort Systems.

Our Philosophy
Our customer comes first!
Storer associates are recognized to be our most important customers, as well as strategic partners upon whom we rely. We appreciate our customers - we want to deserve their friendship and their confidence. We treat our customers as we wish to be treated. We want to help them improve their business - we listen and we respond to their needs. We recognize that the owner or end user is ultimately paying the bill and our decisions are guided by the best long run interest of that owner.
We tell it like it is!
We are up front and honest with our customers - we intend to be fair to our customers and we expect fairness in return. Integrity and truthfulness are the foundation of our credibility and justify the trust we need from our customer.
We are positive and creative!
We have a "can do" attitude! Our marketing emphasis is to seek needs or problems to which we can offer solutions - any need or any problem related to HVAC or mechanical systems or to our technical skills! We are continually broadening and improving our capability - looking for better ways - new ideas - new products.
We sell value!
Quality and low cost are seldom compatible! We choose to sell value - we want to be the best and sell the best products and services - we can only distinguish our company by our persistence to offer value.
We are one team!
Storer Equipment associates are one team with a shared goal to work cooperatively to exceed customer requirements.
We do things right!
Each of us, individually and collectively, is working hard to realize our full potential. We aspire to world class performance that we understand can only be realized by doing things right the first time.
We accept leadership responsibility!
We recognize that we are a trendsetter in our commercial HVAC market - we hold ourselves to the highest standard - we strive to provide a catalyst for positive change while being sensitive to traditional relationships of our industry. We influence our market through our strategic planning and strive to make our associates and customers as comfortable as possible with change.
We strive for continual improvement!
We are committed to the QIP process in all aspects of our business and work to the goal of meeting or exceeding both our external and internal customer requirements every time. Constant feedback, measurement and adjustments are a way of life with us. We know that improved processes can allow people to achieve success and fulfillment in their work.
We are a learning organization!
We are dedicated to continuous learning as a cornerstone of our business. Learning will enrich associates and customers in their personal lives, as well as their professional lives.
We are creating a heroic environment!
Associates are encouraged to empower themselves to be heroic in decisions that go the extra mile to exceed customer expectations. We want to solve customer problems. Once made aware of a customer’s problem or need, an associate assumes ownership and follows through until the

customer is delighted with our responsiveness. Our goal is to win customers over and keep them forever in a close relationship.
Our Shared Values
The success of an organizational structure is highly dependent on the individual achievements of the people who work within these groups. Recognizing this is a critical success factor; we have redefined our culture by introducing an organizational model called the Shared Values Process Operating System. This system has at its foundation eight important human values that are shared across all organizational lines. Our associates developed the four core business values.
We believe that sharing a common foundation based on how we interact with one another, is the key to helping all employees reach their full potential. Providing our employees a value-based work environment will have the beneficial effect of supporting innovation, promoting customer and employee partnerships, fostering continuous improvement and distinguishing us for our quality - not only in our products, but also in our people.
The Shared Values Process gives managers and employees a context, a platform and the tools to deal effectively with people. It does not change or fix people; rather it offers everyone the opportunity to perform the way they have always wanted to...Heroically!
Zone 7 Arkansas
In 1983, Bill Harrison acquired the Trane franchise for Arkansas and began operating as Harrison Trane, supplying, servicing, and maintaining Trane equipment. Through the years , Harrison Trane , now Trane Arkansas , has expanded it’s capabilities to include parts supply, energy management and climate control, as well as testing adjusting and balancing. Other offerings include air sampling and testing, energy benchmarking and energy conservation retrofits.
An extensive training program consisting of manufacturer’s programs and seminars ensures that our technicians are trained on the latest service and diagnostic methods for most brands of equipment. Our technicians are also trained on all major brands of automatic temperature controls and building automation systems.
Our 27 years experience includes a diverse list of projects including numerous worship centers, healthcare facilities, both K-12 and higher education campuses, government installations, commercial real estate, corporate office spaces, and manufacturing facilities.
Trane Arkansas’s core is the specialized skills of our associates; skills necessary to meet 21st century facility needs. We have certified electricians, welders, pneumatics specialists, boiler mechanics, general HVAC mechanics, and NEBB certified Test,
Adjust and Balance technicians.
In order to support energy conservation and sustainability, we have Certified Energy
Managers on staff to assist you with evaluating your building’s current energy usage.

Upon benchmarking, they can make recommendations on how to operate your building more efficiently and enhance your bottom line.
In addition, we have several LEED® Accredited Professionals to assist you with planning sustainable practices and goals for your building and guide you through the
LEED® certification process for your facilities.
The associates at Trane Arkansas are your trusted advisors for all your HVAC system needs. We represent a number of top of the line products, in addition to Trane branded equipment, that can be used to meet whatever HVAC system needs you have.
Our systems knowledge, service experience and controls capabilities make Trane
Arkansas uniquely qualified to be your HVAC total solutions provider
Zone 10 Wichita
The Trane District sales Office was established in 1948 in Wichita. John Knipp purchased the franchise in 1990 and founded Knipp Equipment as a Kansas
Corporation. Under the Knipp Equipment umbrella are (dba): Kansas Trane Sales Co.,
Kansas Trane Parts Center , Kansas Trane Service Co ., and Kansas Trane Controls .
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Since 1979, Tozour Energy Systems, Inc. has been a leader in the HVAC and building automation industry, providing our clients with the most innovative solutions on the market and the highest level of customer service.
Founder and Chief Executive Officer, Douglas O. Tozour, began his career with Trane after graduating from the U.S. Naval Academy in Annapolis, Maryland and serving five years in the U.S. Marine Corps. Doug quickly moved up through the ranks at Boland
Trane in Washington DC, and was promoted to Sales Manager of the Philadelphia Trane franchise in 1974. Tozour Energy Systems , Inc was established in 1979 when Doug purchased the Trane organization in Hartford, Connecticut. In 1983, he sold the Hartford office back to Trane and purchased the Philadelphia Trane franchise, doing business as
Tozour-Trane.
Today, Tozour Energy Systems is one of the Philadelphia area's leading commercial
HVAC providers and the company has grown to include three business units: Tozour-
Trane , Tozour-Trane HVAC Parts & Supplies , and Tozour Energy Services .
Zone 14 Portland
TraneOregon is owned and operated by Robert G. Davis. Mr. Davis acquired the franchise in July, 1982. When he acquired the business there were 11 associates.
Currently, there are 71 associates at TraneOregon . Mr. Davis and his organization have developed a service organization that has grown from 4 technicians to a current staff of
30 journeymen. TraneOregon was recently voted one of the Top 100 companies to work for in the state of Oregon.

Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Sales and Service is the San Francisco Commercial Sales Office and
Authorized Warranty and Service Department for the Trane Company. The office has been doing business in the San Francisco Bay Area since the early 1930’s and has been under the control of the current ownership since 1984.
Zone 17 Wilmington
The Delaware territory was assigned to John Renninger as an independent franchise in
1959 with a staff of 3; two sales engineers and a secretary. The business was incorporated in 1969, trading as Renninger Trane.
Although the focus was equipment sales, with 70% of the business conducted with the DuPont Company, Renninger Trane hired its first service engineer. John Seiberlich joined the company in 1972 as a sales engineer, along with two additional service engineers.
In 1982, the first service sales person was hired to concentrate on expanding our service business by selling service contracts.
The Building Automation Systems group was formed in 1987 to serve our customers’ controls needs.
In 1993, the business was sold to John Seiberlich with a staff of 32 associates and
$4.1M in revenue. The name of the company was changed to Seiberlich Trane . While the business continued to grow, there was now a focus on Building Automation Systems and Service instead of equipment sales. The Contracting Solutions group was established in 1999 to provide customers packaged solutions to their HVAC needs.
Today, Seiberlich Trane employs 70 associates including 24 highly specialized service and BAS technicians. The company has exceeded $20,000,000 in revenue with over
130 commercial service contract customers maintaining both equipment and controls systems. Seiberlich Trane maintains sales and service associates in locations to serve northern and southern Delaware, the eastern shore of Maryland, and southeastern
Pennsylvania.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Paul A. Halvorson, Inc. (DBA Halvorson Trane ) is an independently owned Trane
Franchise, operating throughout most of the state of Iowa. Trane’s presence in Iowa began in 1946, when Tracy Johnson left Trane headquarters in La Crosse, WI, and started the Trane Des Moines Franchise. In 1960, Bill Bernard took over the Des
Moines office, and was the manager until Dick Kasparek assumed the roll in 1984. In
1989, Dick left to become the manager of Trane ’s office in Chicago, and Paul Halvorson purchased the business and became Trane ’s district manager for Des Moines. Paul graduated in engineering from the University of Nebraska, and prior to Des Moines had been with Trane franchises in Dayton, OH and Peoria, IL.
Halvorson Trane started in 1989 with 12 employees and revenues of approximately
$750,000. Today, Halvorson Trane ’s revenues have grown over 15 times what they were in 1989. Besides solid growth in Trane equipment volume, Halvorson Trane has achieved strong growth in Strategic Products (non-Trane equipment), providing a well rounded portfolio of products for our customers. Expanding beyond a traditional Heating

Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment company, Halvorson Trane has also experienced tremendous growth in HVAC Service, Building Automation Systems, and
Parts, providing complete turnkey solutions for our customers.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Mechanical Services , Inc. dba LMS Building Services, A/C Systems Supply,
Lawyer Trane / Trane was started in 1969 to perform a dual function to serve as the
District Sales Office for Trane, the largest international manufacturer of commercial air conditioning equipment and to serve Southern Nevada owners as an after- market service company.
Through internal expansion and acquisition of specialty service companies, LMS
Building Services has grown to be a major supplier of mechanical services. These services include Centrifugal Water Chillers, Reciprocating and Helical-Rotary Water
Chillers, Rooftop Air Conditioners, Boilers, Direct Digital Control Systems, Authorized
Trane Parts, Contract Maintenance and Specialized Maintenance Services.
Zone 22 Greensboro
In 1962, Don Brady established Brady Trane as a Trane Company franchise to sell and service HVAC equipment in North Carolina. We have grown to a 300 associate organization providing solutions to our customer base. Sales, service, turnkey, performance contracting and financial arms provide an integrated response to the customer’s needs.
Zone 24 Flint
Trane has been represented in the Mid-Michigan area since the 1920s. In 1929 Howard
Leach and Jack Cantwell obtained a Trane Franchise with Jack Cantwell taking the
Detroit area and Howard Leach taking out-state Michigan area. The first office in Flint was a small room attached to the garage. In 1963 Howard Leach retired and Art Leach became the manager. In 1979 Art Leach retired and Jay Nelson became the owner of the Trane Franchise.
Nelson Trane was incorporated in the State of Michigan in September 1980 with Jay
Nelson as its President. For twenty years the Company has continued to operate in the
Mid-Michigan area under Jay Nelson’s leadership. The Corporate headquarters is located in Flint, Michigan and a second sales office is located in East Lansing, Michigan.
The Company’s headquarters is located in a one-storey 8000 sq. ft. office building and a parts store plus additional warehouse with access to interstate 1-75 and 1-23 @ Hill
Road.
The company provides building owners with solutions for their buildings Heating,
Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and Control Systems needs from the time the building is built until it is replaced. Solutions include technical services and maintenance, systems and equipment, controls and building automation systems and parts. Nelson Trane has positioned itself with its relationships both with owners and contractors to be the market leader in Eastern Michigan.

Today we have fifty plus associates working together to provide the highest quality service, support, and products to our customers. Our Company has the ability to provide an integrated (single source) source for building controls, air-conditioning equipment, parts and service, essentially all of the indoor environmental needs of our customers.
Our Field technicians have an average of thirteen (13) years of experience in the HVAC industry.
The company is organized into six operating groups, which are interrelated, interdependent, and seamless to our customers. The six groups are:
New System Sales (NSS) acts as the Sales Agent for Trane Products and sells other
HVAC Specialized products that enhance the sales of Trane equipment. This group is often referred to sales.
The Trane Parts Center (TPC) acts as Trane ’s warranty representative for replacement parts and distributes commercial and light commercial parts.
The Building Automation Group (BAS) installs, supports, coordinates, manages and commissions projects for temperature control systems. BAS also upgrades existing temperature controls and automation systems.
The Building Technical Services Group (BTS) provides maintenance, repair and customer training for the operation and maintenance of all makes H.V.A.C. and its related equipment and warranty service for Trane equipment and warranty service for
Trane equipment.
Facilities Management Group (EBS) finds solutions to Building Owners needs; matching the Company’s, its vendors’ and subcontractors’ capabilities to the needs of the customer.
Comprehensive Comfort Solutions devotes its time to performance contracting and turnkey contracting solution for owner customers.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
1906 Company founded in St. Louis, Missouri by Harry L. Hussmann
•
First patented meat display case
•
•
First frozen food case for Clarence Birdseye
Introduced refrigeration systems specifically designed for food stores
1935 First self-service frozen food display case
• First self-service display cases for meat, dairy, produce
• Introduced a merchandiser
•
•
that keeps temperature near zero in an open display
First dairy multi-deck merchandiser

• Established Canadian sales and service organization
1951 First fully automatic defrost display cases introduced
•
•
Introduced multi-deck frozen food display fixtures
Introduced Big System for total-store refrigeration
1967 Completed new St. Louis plant – over 1,600,000 sq. ft. under roof. Still the world’s largest food store equipment manufacturing facility.
1967 Acquired American Refrigeration Products in Mexico
1968 Introduced foamed-in-place insulation
1969 Acquired manufacturing operation in Gloversville, New York
1972 Introduced revolutionary dual air curtain system for meat cases
1976 Acquired Krack Corporation in Addison, Illinois
1982 Developed SuperPlus Refrigeration System
1982 Opened Infrisa in Monterrey, Mexico
1984 Introduced La Gallerie’ product line of curved glass cases
1990 Introduced Vision Merchandisers in North America
1993 Introduced the PROTOCOL refrigeration system
1994 Introduced the Accent Series of Self-Contained Specialty Merchandisers
1995 Introduced Impact Merchandisers
1995 Began Luoyang/ Hussmann, a Joint Venture manufacturing operation in Luoyang,
China
1996 Introduced a line of Impact low temperature models
1997 Signed Joint Venture agreement with Fast Frio in Londrina, Brazil
1997 Introduced Impact Convertible merchandisers for all medium temperature applications
1998 Acquired McAlpine Triangle Australasia in Australia and New Zealand
1998 Opened a new state-of-the-art refrigeration manufacturing plant in Suwanee,
Georgia, near Atlanta

1999 Introduced ASC service specialty cases with patented elliptical design
1999 Acquired Groupo Koxka in Spain, making Hussmann the third largest company of its kind in Europe
2000 Introduced Innovator Doors for reach-ins
2000 Hussmann was acquired by Ingersoll Rand and became part of the Ingersoll
Rand Climate Control Technologies Sector
2001 Acquired Precision Refrigeration, Inc., Taylor Industries, Inc., and National
Refrigeration Services, Inc. (NRS)
2002 Introduced Innovator II Doors for greater energy efficiency in reach-ins
2002 Introduced NIM Frozen Novelty Spot Merchandiser
2003 Introduced Impact Elite Merchandisers
2003 Introduced CR3 Service Deli Case with self-service deli front
2003 Introduced Protocol HE (High Efficiency)
2003 Introduced Hussmann Refrigeration System Solution – parallel system optimized for reliability and performance
• Introduced Always*Clear Reach-In Doors that prevent fogging when opened and closed under normal shopping conditions
2004 Introduced CID Mini Specialty Merchandiser
2004 Introduced Impact Excel Merchandisers for medium temperature
2004 Introduced Hussmann NuLook Program
2004 Announced Hussmann Assurance Plans for comprehensive equipment and service solutions
2004 Introduced BCH Bottle Cooler with cassette refrigeration
• Introduced Impact Excel Merchandisers for low temperature
2005 Introduced the Q-Series specialty merchandisers
• Hussmann celebrated its 100 year anniversary
2006 Introduced the RGDC Bump Out specialty merchandiser
2006 Introduced LED lighting for reach-in merchandisers
2006 Introduced Impact Excel Contour Styling
2007 Launched the Hussmann Green Program

2007 Introduced Ultra Low Front Dairy Case
2007 Launched the Protocol Low Profile System
2008 Became a Greenchill Partner
2008 Introduced LED shelf lights for multi-deck cases
2008 Launched Protocol SP
2008 Introduced Q-Series multi-deck cases
AFFILIATES’ PRODUCTS & SERVICES:
Air Cleaning Solutions (Dust Collector)
United Air Specialists, Inc. (UAS) is headquartered in Cincinnati, OH and was founded in
1966 with the mission of designing and manufacturing air purification equipment of the highest quality.
With this commitment to quality driving company policy, UAS has become the industry leader in air cleaning and pollution control. Through its Air Quality Group, UAS provides solutions to air quality problems ranging from indoor
Air quality concerns like cigarette smoke and allergens in offices, bars and homes to welding smoke, oil mist and process dusts in factories. UAS offers a diverse product line that meets or exceeds regulations set forth by the Occupational Safety & Health Act
(OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
Armstrong (Pumps & Water Specialties)
At Armstrong , we take pride in a family tradition of fluid flow innovation, superb workmanship, and acknowledged product reliability.
Since our founding in 1934 by Samuel Allan Armstrong, our company has pioneered an uncompromising range of products for customers in residential, commercial and industrial markets. From the very beginning, the Armstrong name has been a benchmark for quality in design, engineering and manufacturing.
In 1952, our company, under the direction of James A.C. Armstrong , began to institute bold initiatives across the entire spectrum of our corporate activities that set our course for the next 30 years. In the decades that followed, we developed new technologies, established international manufacturing operations and expanded into more diverse markets. Today, as we serve customers throughout the world, our original commitment to production of the highest quality is unchanged. We will not compromise the expectation of us, and we will never allow an inferior product to carry the Armstrong name. For Armstrong, identifying customer needs, offering superior technology, and building great customer experiences, are all part of a long-standing family tradition.

Camus Boiler (Boilers)
Camus Hydronics Ltd is a manufacturer of an extensive line of gas fired copper tube and stainless steel boilers for residential, light commercial, commercial and industrial applications. It operates out of a 65,000 sq. ft. head office and manufacturing facility complete with a state of the art testing lab, training facility, manufacturing and warehouse.
Camus became a corporation in 2001. It has a total of 52 employees including 5 engineers, service and management staff. The President, Mario Ruscio, together with our Engineering Team has over 75 years of collective experience. This experience allows Camus to provide new and better solutions to the challenges and needs of our industry and marketplace.
The Camus design team is equipped to lead the way with innovative designs and leading edge technology and has earned a reputation as an industry leader in product innovation and design. Camus feels that there is a tremendous opportunity for growth by focusing on this.
As well, Camus Hydronics is taking a leading role in the development of environmentfriendly products through innovative engineering as we incorporate the very latest technologies designed to create higher efficiency levels while lowering emissions.
Our high efficiency units either meet or surpass the standards of both the Canadian and
US Green Building Councils while earning the Energy Star rating. This means our products meet the strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the Canadian and US
Environmental protection Agency and the Department of Energy.
Camus is committed to providing our customers with the very highest levels of quality, service and reliability. Because of this commitment and our reputation earned throughout Canada and the United States, Camu s has been able to expand to several other countries including Australia, Russia, China, the Arab Emirates and Iran.
Dynamic Air Quality Solutions (Indoor Air Filtration)
Dynamic Air Cleaners use a technology called non-ionizing “polarized-media” and it’s actually been around for a long time. The first electrically enhanced air filters date back to 1930 and combine elements of both passive and electronic filtration.
Discovery, Early Years and Acquisition
Dynamic Air Cleaners use a technology called non-ionizing “polarized-media” and it’s actually been around for a long time. The first electrically enhanced air filters date back to 1930 and combine elements of both passive and electronic filtration. As with most high-efficiency filtration products, polarized media had roots in industrial applications.
Although there have been a number of different configurations since then, all are based on charging, or polarizing, fibers in a filter and particles in the air in order to generate an electric force between the fibers and particles. While the principle has been around for many decades, it has only been in recent years that the technology has been fully understood to maximize effectiveness and to provide consistent, reliable performance.
In 1982, two university professors from Carleton University in Ontario, Canada developed a design for a residential application that provided a simple means of replacing dirty media. They started Engineering Dynamics, Ltd. (EDL) and began

manufacturing 1” and 2” polarized-media electronic air cleaners, room console units and overhead ceiling-mount units. All of the polarized-media air cleaners on the market today can be traced back to beginnings at EDL, although subsequent patents and refinements have created discernable differences in the product designs and features.
The original EDL was acquired in 1993 by Environmental Dynamics Group, now known as Dynamic Air Quality Solution s, the manufacturer of Dynamic Air Cleaners. Initially the focus was primarily residential, but there was a clear need for improved air quality in commercial and industrial applications. This resulted in a focus on technology enhancements, new configurations, and a complete line of commercial products that now dominate in some categories, such as k-12, healthcare and casinos.
Evapco (Cooling Towers)
On June 14, 1976, Evapco, Inc. was founded in Baltimore, MD under the visionary leadership of William E. Kahlert, Wilson E. Bradley and financial advisor John A.
Luetkemeyer. Building on Mr. Kahlert and Mr. Bradley's combined 46 years of industrial cooling experience, Evapco began as a manufacturer of forced draft evaporative condensers for the growing industrial refrigeration industry.
Evapco' s durable, innovative designs and ability to provide special attention to the different needs of its customers ensured immediate acceptance of Evapco 's products domestically and overseas. Within three years of founding, Evapco opened a new facility in California and established a licensing agreement with CCT in Italy, later becoming a wholly owned Evapco operation.
Building on the successful formula of commitment to research and development, quality products, competitive prices and customer satisfaction, Evapco continued to grow throughout the 1980's. Facilities and licensees were strategically opened in South Africa,
England, Australia, Illinois and Taneytown, Maryland to better serve the emerging market. Evapco also expanded its product lines to include various styles of evaporative condensers, closed circuit fluid coolers and open cooling towers.
In 1986, Evapco revolutionized the factory assembled evaporative cooling industry with the introduction of the induced draft, counterflow AT cooling tower. The innovative AT design represented the most efficient, space saving, easy maintenance evaporative cooling product ever introduced. Evapco' s highly successful AT design was subsequently incorporated into the evaporative condenser and closed circuit cooler product lines as the ATC and ATW models.
By 1990, Evapco moved its world headquarters from Baltimore to Taneytown, where it is located today. Building on its core values, Evapco continued to grow through the 1990's, and strengthened international operations by opening facilities in China and Belgium and a licensee in Egypt. Evapco continued to enhance the product line by engineering several new industrial evaporator product lines featuring patented fin coils. In 1994,
Evapco acquired Refrigeration, Valves and Systems (RVS) in Bryan, Texas, adding recirculator packages and pressure vessel products, enabling Evapco to provide all of the major heat transfer components of an industrial refrigeration system. In 2000,
Evapco, Inc. opened a new facility in Iowa, further expanding the refrigeration product line with critical air process equipment and rooftop evaporator units.

2005 was another exciting year for EVAPCO, Inc . A new subsidiary was opened in
Lenexa, Kansas. EvapTech, Inc. will provide large field erected cooling towers for the
Power and Heavy Industrial markets. Also in 2005, Tower Components, Inc. was acquired by EVAPCO . TCI is located in Ramsuer, North Carolina and makes a variety of heat transfer material that is used in evaporative cooling towers
Evapco's commitment to excellence in research and development has provided years of continual product improvement to the air conditioning and industrial refrigeration industry. Today, Evapco Inc. continues to remain a strong, growing, employee owned company, building on a successful philosophy of quality engineered products and unmatched customer service.
Evaporcool (Process Cooling)
The Evaporcool™ System started with an idea:
The underlying technology for what has today become the Evaporcool ™ system was the brainchild of a lifelong HVAC technician. He developed an innovative way to capture cool water which he could use in the evaporative cooling process without requiring any additional energy. The very first system was built soon after as a residential application, and the resulting energy savings were shocking. It did not take long to recognize the tremendous value, cost savings and environmental benefits this technology would offer commercial users. From that moment on, we have focused exclusively on commercial applications.
The system has come a long, long way :
The very first systems were constructed using hand tools and materials purchased from a local hardware store. In the years that have followed, our technology has undergone countless improvements and iterations through the coordinated efforts of a team of highly experienced engineers, product designers and HVAC technicians. Along the way we have developed and patented a number of new technologies, including innovative ways to conserve water. Well aware of all of the problems with traditional evaporative cooling, such as water transferring to the coils, a re-circulated water reservoir and a
‘one-size fits all approach,’ our team systematically rethought the entire evaporative cooling process.
It has been a great learning process:
Over these past years, we have installed or tested our systems on virtually every type of air-cooled HVAC unit. We have sold our system to clients across the country, ranging from major multi-national corporations, to local, state and federal government agencies.
Through helpful feedback from our early customers and close observation by our talented installation and maintenance teams, we have been able to field test the durability and functionality of the various parts of our system under “real world” conditions. Every aspect of the system has been meticulously studied and every solution tested and retested. It is this process of refinement that has brought us to today’s stateof-the-art Evaporcool™ system.
The Evaporcool™ system has no peers :

The Evaporcoo l™ team has extensively tested every component of the system in our laboratory, at state universities and in other internationally recognized testing facilities.
Evaporcool ™ has been computer designed and tested, and its components are made of carefully selected modern materials for durability and reliability. Each component is machine-made, but every Evaporcool™ system is custom designed and hand assembled in our manufacturing plant and subject to our strict quality control measures.
It is then custom installed by our specially trained and certified installation experts.
The results have been impressive :
Of all we have accomplished, nothing has been more rewarding than listening to our satisfied customers tell us how Evaporcool ™ has solved their problems and saved them money. While each story is unique, there is certainly a common theme. Whether they acquired our system to reduce skyrocketing energy bills and peak demand charges, or to keep their condenser coils clean without costly maintenance, or because their aging air conditioning units couldn’t keep up in the heat of summer, our customers are always surprised by the number of ways we’re helping them save money and stay cool.
Government Capital Corporation (Financing)
Established in 1992 Government Capital has grown over the years to provide financing for over $1 billion in funding involving over 5000 transactions.
Mitsubishi (Mini-Splits)
Established in 1973 by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of Japan, Mitsubishi Electric US
Companies strive to be the preeminent marketers of electronic technologies that revolutionize people's lives. Mitsubishi Electric US is a recognized leader in the research, marketing, sales, engineering, and manufacturing of electrical and electronic equipment used in information processing and communications, consumer electronics, industrial technology, energy, transportation and construction.
Mitsubishi Electric US products include high-definition projection televisions, DVD players, VCRs, projectors, printers, factory automation equipment, automotive equipment, medical devices, escalators, elevators, telecommunications and satellite systems, heating and air conditioning units, semiconductor devices, large scale video displays for stadiums and facilities, and electric utility products. They have 6,000 employees in 30 locations throughout North America.
Multistack (Chillers)
FOUNDERS
In early 1989, three former Trane Company executives—Bill Bast, Dick Campbell and Monte Holman— partnered to form Multistack Inc., taking over the North
American sales, marketing, engineering, and product support of an Australian invented modular water chiller.
HISTORY

Throughout 1989 and the early 1990’s, Multistack LLC established an extensive
North American distribution network, redesigned the Australian product for North
American distribution, established a manufacturing process in West Salem,
Wisconsin, and began a revolution in the commercial water chiller industry.
As with any new idea, skepticism was common. In a mature industry like cooling and refrigeration, new ideas are not accepted without being put to the test. But year after year, Multistack saw its sales grow at an annual rate in excess of 15 percent.
In fact, in six of the last seven years Multistack has experienced annual growth in excess of 35 percent!
Since the early 90's, control of Multistack has shifted to succession management. Mr.
Mark Platt and Mr. Charles Kenyon joined Multistack in 1995 and 1996 respectively and have been controlling the day-to-day operation of the business since that time.
In June of 2002 Messrs. Platt and Kenyon, along with a small group of private investors successfully executed a Management Buyout of Multistack . This transaction insured the company’s independence and a continued focus on its primary market of modular water chillers.
Today, Multistack is touching the world in many ways most don’t realize. Our chillers are used by major US companies like CBS, Paramount Studios, PPG, Gillette, GE, Ford,
GM, and many others. We provide the cooled water used to produce toothbrushes, to cool the crash test facility for a major US automobile manufacturer, to handle the critical cooling needs of the United States Department of State overseas, and recently secured a contract to provide critical cooling to the proving grounds for the US Global Missile
Defense System (formerly SDI or “Star Wars”).
MODERN FACILITY
In April 2006 Multistack took occupancy of its new 70,000 square foot facility in Sparta,
Wisconsin. This new state-of-the-art facility combined all development, testing, manufacturing, and administration under one roof.
In the winter of 2007, a major office expansion was completed. A major plant expansion was completed in July of 2008 that nearly doubled its manufacturing capacity. Today,
Multistack occupies a total of 120,000 square feet and is the fastest growing chiller company in North America.
Multistack continues to distinguish itself by putting its customers first, by providing flexibility of design, and providing quick, on-time shipments – every time. Today, with over 10,000 machines operating in North America, and several times that worldwide,
Multistack is an idea whose time has come.
Multistack chillers and cooling products are certainly niche products. But if your needs include the replacement of an existing water chiller in a hard-to-reach space or if you need the superior reliability, ultra-quiet operation and flexibility of a modular system, it may be the right choice for you.
PVI (Hot Water Heaters)

PVI Industries began building commercial, institutional, and industrial water heaters in
1961. From modest beginnings, we've become one of the leading suppliers of engineerspecified plumbing and heating equipment for new construction and building retrofits.
There are now more than 130,000 PVI installations worldwide.
Originally, the PV I product line was a handful of simple gas water heaters. It has since grown to more than 1000 standard models and tens of thousands of possible custom models, utilizing any of the common energy sources (gas, oil, electric, steam, and hot water) or combinations of energies in storage tanks ranging from 50 to 4500 gallons. Our production is 100% dedicated to the ASME commercial market with no residential manufacturing.
PVI products are available nationally and internationally through a network of independent and factory sales representatives. PVI equipment in the field is supported by factory-trained service professionals and a team of highly skilled customer service technicians in our home office. PVI water heaters are also backed by the industry's strongest warranty and service policy package. Our offerings include no-cost first year service policies, extended service policies, multi-year heat exchanger warranties, scale failure warranties, and 5-, 10-, 15-, and 20-year tank warranties.
PVI's corporate headquarters and highly automated manufacturing facility are located in
Fort Worth, Texas. The facility also houses our water heater R&D center, an accelerated-destruction tank lining testing center, one of the largest electroless nickel
(EN) plating facilities in North America, and a multi-media training center for engineer/specifiers and service technicians.
TAS (Packaged Chiller Plants)
Founded in 1999, TAS , Ltd. specializes in the manufacture and assembly of packaged chilled and hot water systems for four market segments: turbine inlet chilling,
HVAC/district cooling, mission critical and industrial process cooling applications, utilizing pre-engineered, packaged, air- or water-cooled chiller plants; along with renewable solutions for geothermal energy and waste heat recovery.
In 2004 TAS received its ISO 9001:2000 Certification ensuring that all of its products are manufactured to the highest standards.
TAS has successfully completed projects using electric centrifugal chillers, absorption chillers, and thermal energy storage (TES) with scopes of supply ranging from engineering and packaged equipment supplier to “turnkey” installation of the packaged plants. The combination of TAS’ exclusive sourcing agreements for high efficiency chillers and specialized applications engineering and chiller plant systems integration expertise have resulted in chiller plant capacities and efficiencies that no other supplier can match - standard plant modules range from 200 to 8,000 tons. This summary of experience provides the best qualifications in the industry to successfully complete packaged central plant projects on-time and on-budget with guaranteed performance:
• Over 900,000 tons of refrigeration applied

• One of the world’s largest single projects at 120,000 tons
• One of the world’s largest TES applications (280,000 ton-hours)
Constant improvements and modifications have been implemented in our central plant designs. The TAS exclusive relationship with Trane for water-cooled chillers guarantees the most efficient and reliable system operation available. Another exclusive relationship with GEA/FES allows for large tonnage packaged industrial air-cooled systems (utilizing ammonia) for low temperature applications of large HVAC and District Cooling systems where availability of water is scarce. The TAS Packaged Central Plants are designed specifically for:
Ø High efficiency – for the entire plant, guaranteed performance
Ø Quick and easy installation
Ø Low first cost
Ø High Industrial Quality
Ø Highest Net Present Value/lowest Life-cycle cost for the owner
Temspec (Unit Ventilators)
Temspec Inc. began operations in 1971. At that time the company manufactured concealed vertical stack fan coil units for installation in high-rise hotels, condominiums, student residences and retirement residences within the greater Toronto area.
In 1981 Temspec Inc. underwent a dramatic change. That year the company introduced a chilled water classroom unit ventilator and expanded distribution into the U.S. market.
The design, which featured ultra quiet operation and a small unit footprint was revolutionary for unit ventilators of its era.
In 1988 Temspec Inc. developed a self contained DX classroom unit ventilator, carrying forward the same ultra quiet design and a small unit footprint. In 2000 Temspec Inc. introduced a high-rise fan coil unit with a finished cabinet for exposed applications. The unit is primarily intended for renovation projects within high-rise residential buildings. In
2003 the company introduced an air-to-air heat pump for the classroom and in 2008 updated the unit to R410A and 9.5 EER.
Today, Temspec is a leading manufacturer of HVAC equipment. The company has a significant and growing share of the total North American HVAC market for high rise and classroom applications.
Yaskawa (Inverters)

Yaskawa Electric Corporation (YEC) has been dedicated to the motion and drive control business for nearly a century, beginning in 1915 when it began manufacturing electric motors. Today it is the world’s largest manufacturer of servos, inverters, machine controllers, and robotics, and is the only company in its field awarded the Deming
Application Prize for quality.
Yaskawa Electric America, Inc. (YEA) is a part of YEC, and was established in 1967.
Headquartered in Waukegan, Ill., YEA serves the North and South American markets.
YEA has a global network of Yaskawa offices and subsidiaries.
2. Provide company’s official registered name.
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane U.S. Inc. is the legal name to be used by almost every Trane office with the exception of work performed in North & South Carolina (Zone 25)
Trade, Assumed, or DBA (doing business as) Names: a. Trane (Used by most Trane offices) b. Trane Pacific Service (Honolulu Office for work in Hawaii) c. Southern California Trane (Los Angeles/San Diego Offices for work in California)
The following Trane franchise offices are independently owned and are part of this
RFP response.
Zone 1 Houston
Hunton Trane, Hunton Trane Services, Hunton Specialty Products and Hunton
Distribution
Zone 4 Shreveport
Storer Equipment Company, Ltd.
Zone 7 Arkansas
William A. Harrison, Inc. dba Trane Arkansas,
Zone 10 Wichita
Knipp Equipment Inc.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour Energy Systems, Inc.
Zone 14 Portland

Robert G. Davis and Associates, Inc. dba TraneOregon
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Sales and Service, Inc.
Zone 17 Wilmington
John R. Seiberlich, Inc. – trades as Seiberlich Trane
Zone 19 Des Moines
Halvorson Trane and Des Moines Trane Parts
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Mechanical Services, Inc
Zone 22 Greensboro
Brady Sales & Services, Inc.
Zone 24 Flint
Jay N Nelson, Inc. dba Nelson Trane
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann Corporation
3. Provide your company’s corporate organizational chart.
ANSWER:

Ingersoll Rand
Board of Directors
Mike Lamach
CEO & President
Didier Teirlinck
President, Trane
Commercial Systems,
Worldwide
David Regnery
President, Trane
Commercial Systems,
Americas
Jeff Watson, VP
North America Sales and Field Operations
Jason Bingham, VP
Customer Strategy &
Innovation
Felix Wilson, VP
US West Territory
Bill Harris, VP
Education Vertical Sales
Jon Symko
TCPN Contract Leader
TCPN Project Team

4. List number of sales and service offices in USA, listing the name of key contact at each with title, address, phone and fax number, e-mail address and service offices in the USA.
ANSWER:
Although Trane has over 95 district offices, we are listing only those offices presently active in the TCPN process. Note, that the Key contact is the office
TCPN champion.
Zone 1
Jon Symko
10555 Westpark Dr
Houston, TX 77042
Strategic Account Executive
Tel 713-266-3900
Fax 713-266-7011 jsymko@huntongroup.com
No. Sales Offices 2
No. Service Office 1
Houston, TX # of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
84
38
10
8
6
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 2
Greg Spencer
Sales Leader
1400 Valwood Pky Suite 100
Carrollton, TX 75006
gsspencer@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
Dallas, TX
Service Technicians
Controls Technicians
Tel 972-406-6090
Fax 972-243-1398
# of Employees
130
11

Facilities Technicians
Refrigeration Technicians
Sales (Account Managers)
Support
Engineering Support
Administration
Ft. Worth, TX
Service Technicians
Controls Technicians
Sales (Account Managers)
Support
Engineering Support
Administration
Lubbock, TX
Service Technicians
Controls Technicians
Sales (Account Managers)
Support
Engineering Support
Administration
Zone 3
Ken Dixon
General Sales Manager
9535 Ball Street, Suite 1100
San Antonio, Tx 78217 krdixon@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 4
14
50
32
8
4
3
# of Employees
18
3
8
2
2
2
# of Employees
10
1
4
1
0
1
Tel 210-657-0901
Fax 210-657-1761

San Antonio, TX
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative Support
Austin, TX
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Harlingen, TX
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Corpus Christi, TX
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
# of Employees
20
4
2
1
1
# of Employees
18
3
1
1
1
# of Employees
0
1
5
2
0
# of Employees
0
0
2
1
0

Zone 4
Craig Storer
General Sales Manager
504 W. 67
TH
Street
Shreveport, Louisiana 71106 chstorer@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Shreveport, LA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 5
Jorge Polanco
Direct Sales
1405 Vanderbilt Drive
El Paso, Tx 79935 jpolanco@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
El Paso, TX
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 6
Larry Erp
Vertical Market Specialist
50 West Southern Avenue
Tel 318-865-5663
Fax 318-861-8481
# of Employees
33
12
7
3
16
Tel 915-593-3484
Fax 915-593-0027
# of Employees
15
6
3
1
4
Tel 602-258-9600
Fax 602-253-8018

Temple, Arizona 85282 lerp@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 2
No. Service Office 2
Phoenix
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Tucson
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 7
Mike McClellan
General Sales Manager
1501 Westpark Drive, Suite 9
Little Rock, Arkansas 72204 mjmcclellan@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 2
No. Service Office 2
Little Rock
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
# of Employees
28
17
4
3
5
# of Employees
10
3
1
1
1
Tel 501-661-0621
Fax 501-661-9109
# of Employees
27
9
7
3

Administrative
Springdale
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 8
Mark Fafard
Direct Sales Manager
4401 Ellison NE
Albuquerque, New Mexico 87109 msfafard@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Albuquerque
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 9
Wendell Rames
Sales Manager
305 Hudiburg Circle
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73108 wbrames@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 2
No. Service Office 2
12
# of Employees
13
5
3
1
2
Tel 505-884-2044
Fax 505-884-2449
# of Employees
27
5
2
1
7
Tel 405-787-2237
Fax 405-787-0752

Oklahoma City, OK
Service Technicians
Controls Technicians
Sales (Account Managers)
Support
Engineering Support
Administration
Tulsa, OK
Service Technicians
Controls Technicians
Sales (Account Managers)
Support
Engineering Support
Zone 10
Brett Miller
Direct Sales Manager
1201 Ida
Wichita, Kansas
Bmiller4@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Wichita
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
# of Employees
7
1
8
3
1
2
# of Employees
13
1
6
1
1
Tel 316-265-9655
Fax 316-265-1974
# of Employees
16
8
2
5
3

Zone 11
Sara Holmes
K-12 Specialist / Team Leader
8014 Flint
Lenexa, Kansas 66214 sholmes@trane.com
No. Sales Office 4
No. Service Office 4
Kansas City, KS
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Springfield MO
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Omaha, NE
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Tel 915-599-4664
Fax 915-599-4669
# of Employees
75
19
5
4
11
# of Employees
2
0
8
3
3
# of Employees
1
0
2
2
1
# of Employees

Lincoln, NE
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 12
Frances MacCarrigan
Executive Account Manager
3606 Horizon Drive
King of Prussia, Pennsylvania 19406
Frances.Maccarrigan@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Philadelphia
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 13
Administrative
Brian Durr
District Manager
601 Grassmere Park Drive, Suite 10
Nashville, Tennessee 37211 bgdurr@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 4
No. Service Office 3
Nashville
Service Technicians
Sales
2
2
1
0
1
Tel 610-962-1600
Fax 610-962-0230
# of Employees
75
60
20
14
18
Tel 615-242-0311
Fax 615-726-3357
# of Employees
20
6

Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Knoxville/Chattanooga
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 14
Stan McIntyre
Account Executive
7257 SW Kable Lane, Suite 300
Portland, Oregon 97224 slmcintyre@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Portland, OR
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 15
Administrative
Scott Harbers
Business Development Manager
2020 152 nd
Ave NE
Redmond, Virginia 98052 sharbers@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
1
1
5
# of Employees
25
5
2
3
2
Tel 503-620-8031
Fax 503-639-1454
# of Employees
30
12
5
4
5
Tel 425-643-4310
Fax 425-643-4314

, WA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 16
Administrative
Don Thomas
EBS Sales Manager
310 Soquel Way
Sunnyvale, California 94085-4101 dthomas@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
San Francisco, CA
Service Technicians
Sales
# of Employees
48
33
11
16
10
# of Employees
23
13
3
4
5
# of Employees
2
1
0
8
2
Tel 408-481-3600
Fax 408-481-3666
# of Employees
57
8 indirect / 15 indirect

Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Oakland, CA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Santa Rosa, CA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 17
Administrative
Pam Kinley
Marketing, Training & Account Development
66 Southgate Blvd
New Castle, Delaware 19720 pakinley@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Wilmington, DE
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
6 indirect / 9 direct
5
30
# of Employees
2
0
0
0
5
# of Employees
1
0
0
0
1
Tel 302-395-0200
Fax 302-395-0700
# of Employees
22
9
5

Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 18
Ed French
District Manager
530 Elmwood Park Blvd
Harahan, Louisiana 70123 esfrench@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
New Orleans, La
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Baton Rouge, La
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Mobile, AL
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
5
4
Tel 504-733-6789
Fax 504-731-0833
# of Employees
14
6
0
1
1
# of Employees
15
5
0
1
1
# of Employees
0
1
1
8
3

Zone 19
Kit Cartwright
CSS Sales Manager
2220 NW 108
TH
Street
Clive, Iowa 50325 kccartwright@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Des Moines
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Zone 20
Chuck Bennett
Sales Manager-Service Solutions
445 Bryant Street, Unit 5
Denver, Colorado 80204 cbennett@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 7
No. Service Office 7
Denver/Boulder, CO
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Boise, ID
Service Technicians
Sales
Tel 515-270-0004
Fax 515-270-3835
# of Employees
20
10
2
4
5
Tel 303-228-3300
Fax 303-228-2828
# of Employees
22
10
1
6
6
# of Employees
10
2

Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Colorado Springs, CO
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Ft Collins, CO
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Grand Junction, CO
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Salt Lake City, UT
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
1
1
3
# of Employees
12
3
1
2
4
# of Employees
10
2
1
2
3
# of Employees
8
1
1
1
3
# of Employees
15
3
1
4

Zone 21
Administrative 4
John Kotek
Strategic Account Executive
3036 S. Valley View Blvd.
Las Vegas, Nevada 89102 jkotek@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 1
No. Service Office 1
Las Vegas
Tel 702-876-7530
Fax 702-876-5106
# of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 22
Administrative
22
10
3
3
6
Al Kuhnemann
Sales Manager
Tel 336-378-0670
1916 Church Street
Greensboro, North Carolina 27405 atkuhnemann@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
Fax 336-274-7487
No. Service Office 3
Greensboro, NC # of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
65
18
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
8
3
30
Raleigh, NC
Service Technicians
# of Employees
33

Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Wilmington, NC
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 23
Administrative
21
5
3
3
# of Employees
10
4
1
1
2
Jim Hahn
Strategic Account Executive
Tel 540-563-2828
Fax 504-366-4958
2343 Highland Farm Road NW
Roanoke, Virginia 24017 jimhahn@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
Richmond , VA # of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
32
9
3
2
4
# of Employees Roanoke , VA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
51
8
7

Engineer Support
Administrative
Johnson City, TN
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 24
Administrative
Parry Hughes
VP & GM of Sales, N.A.E.
5335 Hill 23 Drive
Flint, Michigan 48507 aphughes@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 2
No. Service Office 2
Flint, MI
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Lansing, MI
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
7
8
# of Employees
12
5
2
0
1
Tel 810-767-7800
Fax 810-767-9058
# of Employees
15
12
3
3
4
# of Employees
9
5
1
0

Zone 25
Administrative
Ron Campbell
General Sales Manager
4501 South Tyron Street
Charlotte, North Carolina 28217
Rcampbell3@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
Charlotte, NC
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Asheville, NC
Service Technicians
Sales
1
Tel 704-525-9600
Fax 704-525-8582
# of Employees
40
12
7
5
3
# of Employees
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Greenville, SC
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Zone 26
Administrative
Keit Tan
6
2
1
1
1
# of Employees
38
10
3
3
2
Tel 916-577-1101

Strategic Account Executive
4145 Del Mar Avenue
Rocklin, California 95677 ktan2@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 3
No. Service Office 3
Sacramento, CA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Fresno, CA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Reno, NV
Fax 916-577-1175
# of Employees
14
14
14
2
3
# of Employees
1
0
8
3
1
# of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
0
0
1
1
1
Zone 27
Mark Schnetzka
Direct Sales Manager
2677 Buford Highway NE
Atlanta, Georgia 30324-3239 mschnetzka@trane.com
No. Sales Offices 5
No. Service Offices 5
Tel 404-321-7500
Fax 404-636-5204

Atlanta, GA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Macon, GA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Savannah, GA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
Augusta, GA
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
Engineer Support
Administrative
# of Employees
77
14
2
15
8
# of Employees
8
2
2
2
1
# of Employees
1
1
5
1
1
# of Employees
1
2
3
1
1

Birmingham, AL # of Employees
Service Technicians
Sales
Sales Support
32
7
1
Engineer Support 8
Administrative 5
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
5. List number of national employees with breakdown of direct sales, sales support, service technicians, engineering support and administration.
ANSWER:
Total US
Service Technicians 4400
Sales 1600
Sales Support 400
Engineer Support 200
Administrative Support 200
6. Note if you are a certified W/MBE vendor and what percentage of your business is with W/MBE suppliers.
ANSWER:
Trane is committed to providing opportunities for minority owned Small Business
Enterprise (SBE), Historically Underutilized Business Zone Small Business (HZSB),
Small Disadvantaged Business (SDB), Women-Owned Small Business (WOSB),
Veteran-Owned Small Business (VOSB) and Service Disabled Veteran-Owned Small
Business (SDVOSB). As we do with other governmental and commercial organizations, we work to understand TCPN’s social responsibility goals and objectives and to the extent commercially feasible, support them.
Trane is committed to utilizing minority owned / small business enterprises in our business operations and subcontracting activities.
Trane has developed contract specific subcontracting plans tailored to our client’s specific needs with close consideration of SBE / MBE concerns as follows:

o Trane works to establish the program goals and ensure the team sets up a regular communication and review process. o Trane identifies qualified SBE / MBE contractors, both from past work experience with Trane and new, qualified entrants, who would be interested in working with Trane on this project. o Trane initiates contact with qualified SBE / MBE firms inviting them to participate in this project. o Trane provides complete bid package information including documentation
from the Request for Proposal (RFP) and pertinent specifications, drawings,
unit pricing sheets, and all other job related information. o Trane includes in the bid package all necessary information about Trane , our
subcontract terms and conditions, Subcontractor Qualification Forms, and
pertinent technical data on the service-maintenance / installation of the
solutions we are proposing for this project. o o
Trane conducts face-to-face meetings in our offices with interested subcontractors along with bid package reviews, guidelines for unit pricing, background data from each subcontractor, pricing response / timeline, and review of Project Plans - particularly if / as multiple subcontractors may be required to meet project deadlines.
Trane monitors and reports performance against the goals developed for the project.
Additionally, Trane already has specific subcontracting plans and metrics in place for its
Federal Contracting Vehicles including the GSA Federal Supply Schedule and the
Department of Energy Super ESPC IDIQ contracts and diligently seeks to continue utilizing small and minority business concerns in meeting specific subcontracting plan goals for those projects. Trane complies with Executive Orders 11246 and 11458 regarding EEO and Affirmative Action Guidelines for Federal Contractors /
Subcontractors Regarding Race, Color, Gender, Religion, and National Origin. Trane ’s subcontractor identification process (as described above) targets subcontracting candidates by their past experience with Trane . Those candidates, who have already established a track record with Trane , are strategically selected on a project by project basis. The criteria for their selection are experience, ability, history, and potential business impact. Utilizing this process, and having already identified Small Businesses,
Minority Owned Businesses, Small Disadvantaged Businesses, Women Owned
Businesses and Small Business Administration 8(a) certified businesses, we continue to seek opportunities to subcontract to these resources.
7. Provide your company’s Dun & Bradstreet (D&B) number.
ANSWER:

Trane
Trane U.S. Inc. (Piscataway Headquarters) = 00-134-4621
The following Trane franchise offices are independently owned and are part of this
RFP response.
Zone 1 Houston
D&B# 11-849-2768
Zone 4 Shreveport
D&B # 04-921-2889
Zone 7 Arkansas
D&B # 10-365-7771
Zone 10 Wichita
D&B # 62-191-9141
Zone 12 Philadelphia
D&B # 01-120-7222
Zone 14 Portland
D&B # 15-117-0800
Zone 16 San Francisco
D&B # 04-325-6395
Zone 17 Wilmington
D&B # 06-435-6967
Zone 19 Des Moines
D&B # 14-781-7167
Zone 21 Las Vegas
D&B # 04-646-3543
Zone 22 Greensboro

D&B # 04-451-1582
Zone 24 Flint
D&B # 06-189-1610
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann Corporation (Bridgeton Headquarters) = 00-696-7731
8. Provide your income statement, balance sheet and cash flow for the past three (3) years.
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane US annual reports are provided in Appendix # 9
9. Please define your standard terms of payment.
ANSWER:
Trane
Net 30 days. Anticipation Discount is available. See Question 15 in the TAB 3-Value
Added Responses for a more detailed explanation.
10. Provide a description of your company’s relevant market and your position within it.
ANSWER:
Trane
Is in the manufacturing, sales, installation and service of commercial HVAC equipment and services. Has the broadest, most complete product line in the global HVAC industry.
Our industry share position is first in the following areas: New Installation Controls,
Chiller Systems, Applied Air Handling Systems, Applied Rooftop Systems, Applied
Variable Air Volume Systems.
Hussmann
Is in the manufacturing, sales, installation and ongoing service of commercial refrigeration products including display refrigerated medium and low temperature merchandisers, remote condensing units and coils. We hold a strong market position in the areas of service and self service remote and self contained refrigerated display cases and the accompanying refrigeration systems and installation and ongoing service support to our customers.

AFFILIATES’ PRODUCTS & SERVICES:
Air Cleaning Solutions (Dust Collector)
UAS is one of the largest suppliers of dust/fume/mist collection equipment in North
America with a market share of approx. 10% while the remainder is distributed across dozens of competitors. The relevant markets are dust and fume collection in metalworking, foundry, pharmaceutical industries and mist collection in the metalworking and machinery industry.
Armstrong (Pumps & Water Specialties)
Drawing on decades of experience, our design teams are dedicated to a leading-edge development. Armstrong 's history of new product introductions is evidence of our commitment to innovation, and a constant focus on meeting and surpassing the needs of our customers.
Our products are internationally recognized for design efficiency, long service life and operating economy. Our applications include residential, commercial and industrial installations in some of the world’s premier facilities. Our goal is to provide leadership to the industry, practical solutions to customer problems, and superior alternatives to conventional thinking.
Camus Boiler (Boilers)
Camus revolutionized the boiler/hot water industry with the introduction of the all stainless steel high efficiency heat exchanger for hot water and heating application in the commercial and industrial segments of the market. With worldwide sales and services,
Camus has become an innovative leader in the Commercial/Industrial HVAC industry.
Our boilers input capacity range from 80,000 BTUH to 6,000,000 BTUH
Dynamic Air Quality Solutions (Indoor Air Filtration)
Dynamic manufactures and distributes innovative and cost effective air cleaning systems that improve workplace effectiveness. As a replacement to traditional filtration, a
Dynamic air cleaner delivers improved indoor air quality while reducing operating cost s .
Our combination of the industry’s lowest static pressure and longest media life expectancies produce substantial savings in fan energy and replacement costs.
Because of Dynamic’s unique ability to capture ultrafine particulate and VOCs without ionizing, our cleaned environments allow facility owners to reduce ventilation per
ASHRAE’s 62.1, IAQ procedure. In a LEED design, we are a proud partner of the
ASHRAE headquarters renewal project as well as many other sustainable developments.
Evapco (Cooling Towers)

Evapco revolutionized the evaporative cooling industry with the introduction of the induced draft, counter flow AT cooling tower. With worldwide sales and services,
Evapco has become an innovative leader in the Commercial/Industrial HVAC industry.
Evaporcool (Process Cooling)
Evaporcool is a sophisticated version of the simple concept that of evaporative cooling.
We have what we believe to be the most technologically advanced evaporative precooler in the HVAC industry. We are applicable to almost any air cooled HVAC unit.
Evaporcool reduces electrical consumption on fresh air units as well as refrigeration units and air compressors. We are continually advancing and widening our target market in evaporative space.
Government Capital Corporation (Financing)
With vast experience in the Tax Exempt Public Sector finance industry, Government
Capital Corp . has provided financing to over 5,000 Cites, Counties, Schools and other
Public Sector entities.
Mitsubishi (Mini-Splits)
Mitsubishi introduced ductless mini-split technology to the US marketplace in 1980 and has established a leadership position in this technology. As the first market entrant,
Mitsubishi assumed the role of educating the marketplace on the benefits of ductless mini-splits and training the contractor base on its proper installation and maintenance. In
2009 alone, over 10,000 HVAC professionals attended a Mitsubishi training course.
Mitsubishi ’s share of the ductless mini-split market exceeds 30%.
Multistack (Chillers)
World leader in the design, manufacture and application of Modular Water Chillers.
PVI (Hot Water Heaters)
We have been manufacturing ASME water heaters for the engineer-specified and building owner markets since 1961. We are the maker of the world's most efficient gasfired water heater; 99% thermal efficiency at full firing rate. We e mploy anti-corrosion technologies and product designs unique to the industry.
TAS (Packaged Chiller Plants)
The combination of TAS ’ exclusive sourcing agreements for high efficiency chillers and specialized applications engineering and chiller plant systems integration expertise have resulted in chiller plant capacities and efficiencies that no other supplier can match. This experience provides the best qualifications in the industry to successfully complete packaged central plant projects on-time and on-budget with guaranteed performance
Temspec (Unit Ventilators)

Temspec specializes in individual classroom air conditioning. Each unit ventilator is designed to bring in outside air, condition it (temperature, flow & humidity) and circulate in the specific room where it is located. Temspec was one of the original pioneers in classroom zone air conditioning and continues to be one of the leaders in design and manufacturing throughout the U.S.A.
Yaskawa (Inverters)
Our dedication to quality and performance places Yaskawa at the forefront of inverter manufacturers worldwide, resulting in reliable products that remain unmatched in the industry today.
Boasting more than 50 years of experience in the drives business and nearly 100 years in the motors business, we are pleased to share our knowledge and expertise with you.
11. Describe the scope of sales/field support your company would make available to government entities.
ANSWER:
Trane
100 percent nationwide: Sales, Engineering, Service, Controls and Parts.
Hussmann
100 percent nationwide coverage from our factory operated branches and service subcontractors for Sales, Engineering Support, Service and Parts
AFFILIATES’ PRODUCTS & SERVICES:
Air Cleaning Solutions (Dust Collector)
Provide dust collection and mist collection equipment and field service, if required. Local
Contracted Representatives provide ductwork design, provide equipment and ductwork components, technical assistance and field service, if required.
Armstrong (Pumps & Water Specialties)
Local support is provided by our local nationwide representatives.
Camus Boiler (Boilers)
The network of sales representatives will aid in product needs identification, budgeting, and problem solving and will coordinate with Camus on product procurement and logistics.
Dynamic Air Quality Solutions (Indoor Air Filtration)
Sales distribution model includes full time, corporate employees as regional managers responsible for direct customer growth and the coordination of mass product sales through various independent distributors. All regional managers oversee networks of

representation that collectively serve all US states. Product and system: pricing, engineering, service and parts are coordinated from Dynamic headquarters located in
New Jersey.
Evapco (Cooling Towers)
Evapco has more than 160 sales offices around the world, a large majority of which are factory trained in cooling tower service.
Evaporcool (Process Cooling)
We have a team of qualified sales support also engineering Service and parts. We offer
24/7 access to help via help hot line and we are represented in all 50 states through our relationships with license contractors.
Government Capital Corporation (Financing)
With vast experience in the Tax Exempt Public Sector finance industry, Government
Capital Corp . has provided financing to over 5,000 Cities, Counties, Schools and other
Public Sector entities.
Mitsubishi (Mini-Splits)
The Mitsubishi f ield organization consists of over 60 qualified HVAC professionals, located in major markets across the US. This organization provides training and assistance in all areas of product deployment including technology application, engineering design, procurement, installation and startup of equipment and controls.
Multistack (Chillers)
We provide all field support through our afflation with Trane.
PVI (Hot Water Heaters)
We provide all support through our local field représentatives.
TAS (Packaged Chiller Plants)
100 percent nationwide: Sales, Engineering, Service, and Controls.
Temspec (Unit Ventilators)
From the Temspec facility, support available includes: Service Manager, Technical Sales
Rep, Applications Engineer, Parts Sales. Field support would be by Trane
Yaskawa (Inverters)
Customer Service consists of 9 Sales people, 5 Service techs, 1 Engineer, and 3
Administrative personnel, available for consultation by phone or for on-site support depending on requirements.

12. Describe the scope of training opportunities your company would make available to government entities as needed.
ANSWER:
Onsite and offsite training is available in a myriad of scopes from technical, analysis, design and industry compliance. See TAB 5-Form A Services Section under Training for more details.
13. Describe your company’s Customer Service Department (hours of operation, number of service centers, parts outlets, number of technicians, etc.) Clarify if the service centers are owned by your company of if they are a network of subcontractors.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
Hunton Trane Services
5622 Luce Street
Tel 713-643-8336
Toll Free 1-800-880-7378
Houston, TX 77087 Fax 713-643-3693
Has the largest service department in the Trane network of distributors. They service
industrial and commercial accounts with HVAC service, pipefitting, plumbing, filters,
modifications and fabrication.
There are 3 parts locations throughout the Greater Houston area.
Zone 2 Dallas
Texas-Oklahoma Trane (Owned and operated by the Corporation)
1400 Valwood Parkway, Suite 100
Carrollton, TX 75006
Tel 972-406-6000
Fax 972-243-1398
(3) Service Centers located in Dallas, Ft. Worth and Lubbock
(5) Parts locations located in Dallas, Ft. Worth, Arlington, Garland, Lubbock. All locations are Company owned.
Currently have (130) technicians
Office business hours: 8-5 M-F
Parts: Normal business hours, 8-5 M-F
Summer business hours (5/15/10 thru 9/30/10) 7:30 to 5:30 M-F, 8:00 to 1:00pm
on Saturday.
Service: Normal business hours, 8-5 M-F. 24hr after hour support (# 972-406-3666)
Zone 3 San Antonio
San Antonio (Owned and operated by the Corporation) Tel 210-657-0901
9535 Ball St., Suite 1100 Fax 210-657-1761
San Antonio, TX 78217
Austin Sales District
24 Hr Phone 210-657-0932
9801 Metric Blvd, Suite 400 Tel 512-416-8823

Austin, TX 78758 Fax 512-416-8894
24 Hr Phone 512-416-8822
Harlingen
************REMOTE LOCATION*********
Dispatch is handled out of San Antonio
************REMOTE LOCATION*********
Dispatch is handled out of San Antonio Corpus Christi
Zone 4 Shreveport
Craig Storer - General Manager Tel 318- 861-8453
Storer Equipment Company, Ltd Cell 318- 465-7122
Shreveport Sales District Fax 318- 861-8481
504 West 67th
Shreveport LA 71106 chstorer@trane.com
Zone 5 El Paso
Southwest Trane (Owned and operated by the Corporation)
1405 Vanderbilt Tel 915-593-3484
El Paso, TX 79935 Fax 915-593-3490
24 hour response from service department
1 service center in El Paso
1 parts Dept. In El Paso
Zone 6 Arizona
Southwest Trane (Owned and operated by the Corporation)
Terry Stevens – District Mgr. Tel 602-258-9600
Trane – South West District Fax 602-253-3801
850 West Southern Ave. trstevens@trane.com
Tempe. AZ 85282
Hours of operation are 7:00 am to 4:30 pm for the 4 service centers and 6 parts outlets.
Service centers located in Tucson and Tempe and are all company owned. 4 Parts centers in Arizona as part of the Southwest Trane District and are all company owned.
We have approximately 100 service and 15 controls technicians in the district.
Zone 7 Arkansas
Mike McClellan – District Manager
Trane – Arkansas Sales District
1501 Westpark Drive, Suite 9
Little Rock, AR 72204
7 Account Managers
4 Trane Arkansas Owned Service Centers
3 Parts Center Locations
40 Service Technicians
Tel 501-661-0621
Fax 501-661-9109

5 Customer Service Representatives
Office Hours: 7:00 am—5:00 pm Monday-Friday
Emergency Service Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
Zone 8 New Mexico
Southwest Trane (Owned and operated by the Corporation)
Terry Stevens – District Mgr. Tel 602-258-9600
Trane – South West District Fax 602-253-3801
850 West Southern Ave. trstevens@trane.com
Tempe. AZ 85282
Hours of operation are 7:00 am to 4:30 pm for the service centers and parts outlets.
Service center located in Albuquerque and are all company owned. 1 Parts centers in
Albuquerque as part of the Southwest Trane District and are all company owned. We have approximately 100 service and 15 controls technicians in the district.
Zone 9 Oklahoma
24/7 as far as hours of operation for Service, Parts hours are Mon thru Fri 7:00 am to
5:00 pm with emergency on call 24/7.
One service center, one parts center, 12 service technicians, Operation owned by
Ingersoll Rand.
Zone 10 Wichita
Our normal hours of operation are from 8 to 5, and we always have a service tech on call 24 hours/7days a week. We only have a service center located in down town Wichita but have 2 service techs located in western Kansas. There is only one parts center and it is also located in down town Wichita. We currently have 12 service techs, 4 BAS techs, and 1 electrician. Everything is owned by us and not a network of subcontractors.
Zone 11 Kansas City
District Customer Service Department - 24 hours / 7 days a week, 6 Service Centers, 4
Parts Centers, and 75 Technicians
All company owned.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour-Trane’s dispatch center is staffed with four Service Coordinators from 7AM to
5PM Monday through Friday. After hours and on weekends, the service line rings to an answering service that passes all service emergencies directly to an on-call service technician. Our 75+ technicians, all working directly for Tozour-Trane , operate out of the
King of Prussia, PA, Moorestown, NJ and Pleasantville, NJ Service and Parts Centers.
They are dispatched by a wireless dispatch system that captures all details regarding maintenance and service performed. The time tickets can be transmitted electronically to our clients or remain in a web accessible database for private use at any time.

Each of our three territories has an Area Service Manager and Customer Service
Representative. All are under the direction of our Director of Service. Additionally, our technicians are backed up by our Sustainability Services Center which monitors sites, downloads data and creates performance reports on system operation. The Center can remotely access most client’s sites and check status, diagnose or make setpoint changes as needed.
Zone 13 Tennessee
Tennessee Trane (Owned and operated by the Corporation)
Brian Durr
District General Manager
Phone: 615-565-9426
Mobile: 410-967-9837 (please leave messages on Cell)
Email: bgdurr@trane.com
Zone 14 Portland
OregonTrane
7257 SW Kable Lane-STE 300
Tigard, Oregon 97281 normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.)
Tel 503-630-8031
Fax 503-639-8031 after hrsTel 503-620-8031
Zone 15 Washington
Washington
Service Center
Parts Outlets
Technicians
Hussmann Tech
3
3
20
27
Hawaii
Service Centers
Parts Outlets
Hussmann Tech
3
1
4
Trane Tech 15
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Trane Service is a locally owned franchise office for the Trane Company.
Our normal hours of operation are 7:00 AM to 4:30 PM. We offer after hours service 24 hours per day / 7 days per week.
Pacific Coast Trane Service operates out of our Sunnyvale office as does the main portion of our commercial sales team. We have satellite commercial sales offices in
Oakland and Santa Rosa. We have parts centers in San Jose and Benicia.
Pacific Coast Trane Service currently employs 57 service mechanics.
Zone 17 Wilmington

Wilmington, DE
The Service Department for Seiberlich Trane is located in our main office at 66 Southgate
Blvd, New Castle, De 19720. We have 22 company service technicians on staff, positioned throughout the State of Delaware. Our main office hours are 8am – 5pm
Monday through Friday. We have technicians on call 24 hours a day for emergency calls.
The on-call technicians can be reached through our main phone number at 302-395-
0200, Toll Free: 877-246-7200, Fax: 302-395-0700, Email: wilmington-trane@trane.com
Our parts store, Seiberlich Trane HVAC Parts & Supplies, is located at 18 Boulden Circle,
Suite 10, New Castle, De 19720. Our normal store hours at 8am –; 5pm Monday –
Friday. Our spring & summer hours at 7:30am – 5pm Monday – Friday. The parts store phone number is 302-395-0200, Direct line: 302-356-2400, Fax 302-356-2401, Email parts@seiberlich.com
Zone 18 Gulf States
Hours of Operation: 7:00am – 4:00pm, but we are on call 24/7.
Number of Service Centers: 4 (Baton Rouge, New Orleans, Mobile, and Pensacola)
Parts Outlets: 5 (Baton Rouge, New Orleans, Gulfport, Mobile, and Pensacola)
Number of Service Technicians: 46
Number of Controls Technicians: 7
Number of Hussmann Service Technicians: 32
Number of Hussmann Install Technicians: 13
All of our service centers are company-owned.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Our customer service department is centered in Des Moines, IA. We have a sub-office in Cedar Rapids, IA, which rings back to our main office in Des Moines. Our hours of operation are 8 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. We have after hours service via our automated phone system, and provide 24/7 emergency service for both HVAC service and BAS systems. Our Parts center is located in Des Moines. We have 19
BAS/Service technicians, who are our employees (not subcontractors).
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Rocky Mountain District
The hours or operation for the Rocky Mountain seven (7) service locations is 8 am to 5 pm. Locations in Colorado: Denver, Colorado Springs, Grand Junction, Fort Collins. All
Colorado locations have Trane parts centers. Utah: Salt Lake City including a parts center. Idaho: Boise and Twin Falls. Boise has a parts center. Total number of technicians: 72. All locations are company owned.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane
3036 S. Valley View Blvd.
Las Vegas, NV 89102

Hours of operation:
7:00am – 4:00pm Mon-Fri
Single service center, single parts center (same location, both owned by us)
25 Technicians
Zone 22 Greensboro
Brady Trane Service Agency’s hours of operation are 7:30 am to 4:30 PM Monday thru
Friday with after hours emergency call procedure for technical assistance. Greensboro is the main dispatch center with nine service technicians strategically located throughout our coverage area. The company is wholly owned by Brady Trane . We employ 108 technicians, 6 service resource coordinators. In addition providing normal service and diagnostic work we offer:
•
EPA reclaim station
•
Refrigerant Storage
•
Water Treatment
•
Laser Alignment
•
Eddy Current Test
•
Vibration Analysis
•
Thermal Imagery
•
Overhauls
•
Controls-Virtual Service & Monitoring
Our customer base and service agency is supported by five parts outlets.
Zone 23 Virginia
Trane Virginia District
• (3) Three Service centers located in; (These offices are owned and operated by
Ingersoll Rand) o o
Richmond
Roanoke o Danville,
• (4) Four parts outlets: o Richmond o o
Roanoke
Fredericksburg o Charlottesville
• Hours of operation are from o 8am to 5pm Monday thru Friday o
7 / 24/ 365 emergency response through a 1-800 on call service.
•
The district has 237 associates o o o
108 dedicated service technicians.
7 professional engineers
9 certified energy managers o
19 LEED accredited associates o o o
11 controls service technicians
6 controls project managers
2 solutions project managers.

Contact info
Jim Hahn
Direct Sales Leader
Tel 540-563-2828 jimhahn@trane.com
Zone 24 Flint
Nelson Trane – Building Technical Services , Normal Hours of Operation 7:30 AM – 4:30
PM Mon. Fri., After Hours Service Available 24/7….Twenty-Two (22) Service technicians, Two (2) Team Leaders/Field Supervisors, One (1) Technical Services
Manager. One (1) Central Dispatching Point, One (1) Service Coordinator. One (1) Parts
Outlet, with Three (3) Parts Consultants
Zone 25 Charlotte
Charlotte, NC
7:30am – 5:30pm 24 / 7 hour after hour response
9 parts centers
85 technicians
All company owned
Zone 26 Sacramento
Hours of operation: 8am-5pm with 24/7 after hours service support.
Service centers: (3) Sacramento, Reno and Fresno
Parts outlets: (3) – Sacramento, South Sacramento, Fresno
Techs: 23
All service centers are company owned.
Zone 27 Atlanta
Georgia
We have 1 main service center (all service dispatchers and PA’s work out of the
Atlanta office). We have 4 additional full service remote offices that technicians work out of but again their dispatcher resides in the main service center in Atlanta. The business hours are 7:30 AM – 5:00 PM. We have a live after hours answering service
(all non-business hours). We have 8 parts centers. We have 77 service technicians.
All service centers are company owned.
Alabama
We have 1 main service center (all service dispatchers and PA’s work out of the
Birmingham office). We have 2 additional full service remote offices that technicians work out of but again their dispatcher resides in the main service center in
Birmingham. The business hours are 7:30 AM – 4:30 PM. We have a live after hours answering service (all non-business hours). We have 3 parts centers. We have 32 service technicians. All service centers are company owned.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.

Hussmann
Hussmann operates service branches in major cities across the country that are company owned facilities with service technicians as well as a number of subcontractors where we do not have company owned service departments. Our service departments are typically staffed Monday thru Friday 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. and have technicians on call for after hours and weekend service needs. We also operate a National Call Center for our customers to call and service will be dispatched from that call center to our local service branches or independent service contractors.
AFFILIATES’ PRODUCTS & SERVICES:
Air Cleaning Solutions (Dust Collector)
UAS Customer Service Department is located in Cincinnati, OH (800-252-4647, press option 1). Hours of operation are 8am-5pm ET Monday to Friday. UAS Parts Center is located in Cincinnati, OH. UAS Service Centers are a network of sub-contractors who are trained in Dust Collection Service. In Texas, the Service Center is Air Cleaning
Solutions (877-633-0304) are approximately 6 Service Centers serving Houston, Dallas, Austin, San Antonio, Corpus Christi and the Rio Grande Valley.
Air Cleaning Solutions Service Center has 4 certified technicians.
Armstrong (Pumps & Water Specialties)
Customer service is handled by Local support through our rep organization.
Camus Boiler (Boilers)
Camus manufactures boilers and hot water heaters which are sold through a network of representatives throughout the world. Service (when needed) is provided by the representatives or their agent. Camus employs a technical manager whose sole responsibility is on-site training and troubleshooting. Furthermore, Camus also offers technical support by phone for any troubleshooting issues.
Dynamic Air Quality Solutions (Indoor Air Filtration)
See Trane Zones who supply local customer support.
Evapco (Cooling Towers)
The main point of contact for all issues is the local sales office. For critical applications, it would be wise to contact the local office about emergency contact information. Evapco offices are open 8-5pm local time. There is an emergency phone tree system as well.
Evaporcool (Process Cooling)
The main service center is in Memphis, TN and is open 8 to 5 eastern time. We have a call center 24hrs/day 365 day year. Our network of installers and trouble shooters are mechanical contractors all over the world so our network is subcontractors. Our on staff technicians are six and growing. Our parts department is five and growing. We have

distribution centers in Dallas, Miami Los Angeles, Sacramento, Chicago, Tulsa,
Nashville, Phoenix, Memphis, Atlanta and Birmingham
Government Capital Corporation (Financing)
Not applicable
Mitsubishi (Mini-Splits)
Mitsubishi’s customer service function is handled by its company-owned Operations
Group Department located at the company’s US headquarters in Suwanee, GA, near
Atlanta. It is staffed by 12 customer service representatives and can be reached at
(800) 889-9904 from 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM Eastern Time
Multistack (Chillers)
The main point of contact for all issues is the local sales office
PVI (Hot Water Heaters)
For replacement parts pricing and availability and non-warranty service or repair , contact your local PVI Sales Representative
For warranty service , contact PVI Customer
Service at 1-800-433-5654. Please have serial number and model number when you call. For 24-hour emergency service call: 1-800-433-5654
TAS (Packaged Chiller Plants)
See Trane Zones who supply local customer support.
Temspec (Unit Ventilators)
Customer Service Department is open from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. EST. It is located at the facility and consists of a Technical Sales Rep, Technical Sales Supervisor,
Applications Engineers, Service Manager, Parts Sales.
Yaskawa (Inverters)
Customer Service consists of 9 Sales people, 5 Service techs, 1 Engineer, and 3
Administrative personnel, available for consultation by phone or for on-site support depending on requirements.
14. Describe how your company handles after-hours customer service needs.
ANSWER:
After hours customer needs are handled by individual Trane district offices. Please see answers to Question 16 for each Zone.
15. Indicate your response time to emergency service calls.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston

4 hour emergency response from receipt of service request.
Zone 2 Dallas
4 hour emergency response from receipt of service request.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Contract Customers have between one to three hour response times for service calls depending on location of Customer.
Zone 4 Shreveport
Our response time is within 15 minutes of an emergency a qualified technician is talking to the client to determine the appropriate course of action. If that action requires a technician on site we will dispatch as approved by the client and arrive at the job site within 2 hours of that determination. A Storer associate will remain in contact with the client until the emergency is passed to the job site technician.
Zone 5 El Paso
Our response to time to emergency service calls is between 2 and 4 hours.
Zone 6 Arizona
Our response to time to emergency service calls is between 2 and 4 hours.
Zone 7 Arkansas
Our response to time to emergency service calls is within one (1) hour.
Zone 8 New Mexico
Our response to time to emergency service calls is between 2 and 4 hours.
Zone 9 Oklahoma
Response time for emergency service call is 30 minutes from dispatch to the service technician
Zone 10 Wichita
Our response to time to emergency service calls is between 2 and 4 hours.
Zone 11 Kansas City
Our response to time to emergency service calls is between 2 and 4 hours.
Zone 12 Philadelphia

Emergency service calls – if we have dial up capability with the building we are in contact within one hour. If we have no connection at the building we will have a tech on site within two hours.
Zone 13 Tennessee
Historically, our customer’s ultimately decide what “timely” means and if we meet their wants and needs for service response time. Some customers have critical applications and require 2 hour response, others have redundancy built into their system and require same day or next day service.
Zone 14 Portland
Historically, we have been able to respond to emergency calls within 4 hours.
Zone 15 Washington
Hawaii we have all techs on Oahu and one on Maui. But in general we can respond to anything on Oahu inside 4 hours
Alaska all techs in Anchorage, and work in the bush or remote from Anchorage is a float plan or dog sled away but in general Anchorage and vicinity inside 4 hours
Washington is a large State and travel distances to the remote corners are 5-6 hours one way, but again in general we can respond inside of 4 hours.
We have signed on for 2 hour response times when we have the site locations and they are close to our tech pool.
Zone 16 San Francisco
We offer all contract customers a 2 hour response time, including after hours.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Response time can vary based on specific contract language; however, Seiberlich Trane typically responds to emergency service calls within two hours and has a technician at the customer’s site within 4 hours of receiving the emergency call.
Zone 18 Gulf South
2 hours is our standard response time
Zone 19 Des Moines
We offer guaranteed response times for 2 hours or 4 hours, for contract customers. We also offer overtime options for customers who call later in the day and want same day service.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain

Rocky Mountain Trane’ s historic capability and flexibility is to respond to the customer’s expectation for response time. This could be 2 hours or the next day, as determined by the customer.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
The time to notify the customer of dispatched service is 30 minutes or less. The total time from call request until technician is at job site is 4 hours or less.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Our response to time to emergency service calls is within one (1) hour.
Zone 23 Virginia
Response time is less than two hours for after hour services.
Zone 24 Flint
If it is an emergency we try to be on site within 2 hours of the initial call.
Zone 25 Charlotte
Two hours
Zone 26 Sacramento
Our response to time to emergency service calls is within two (2) hours.
Zone 27 Atlanta
Emergency sales calls made after 5PM are dispatched within 30-60 minutes of receiving
the call.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
16. Describe your 24/7 service compliance.
ANSWER:
Trane
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with five technicians and two Field Supervisors on call.
Technicians on call are a Heavy Commercial technician, a Light Commercial technician, an Industrial technician, a Building Automation technician and a filter technician. Two supervisors are also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and

relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors.
The following Trane franchise offices are independently owned and are part of this
RFP response.
Zone 1 Houston
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having normal technician staff available during normal work hours and after hours we have on call technicians.
Each week an on-call list is prepared with five technicians and two Field Supervisors on call. Technicians on call are a Heavy Commercial technician, a Light Commercial technician, an Industrial technician, a Building Automation technician and a filter technician. Two supervisors are also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This procedure is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays.
An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation by phone or email and dispatches these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then proceed to the jobsite and perform the service. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors.
Zone 4 Shreveport
See Trane Answer
Zone 7 Arkansas
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with five technicians and two Field Supervisors on call.
Technicians on call are a Heavy Commercial technician, a Light Commercial technician, an Industrial technician, a Building Automation technician and a filter technician. Two supervisors are also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors
Zone 10 Wichita
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with technicians on call. Technicians on call are a Heavy

Commercial technician, a Light Commercial technician, an Industrial technician, a
Building Automation technician and a filter technician. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service
Coordinators and relayed to the technicians
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having 25 journeymen technicians available during normal working hours, which is Monday – Friday 7:00 AM-
5:00 PM. In addition, two technicians are on call each week to handle any emergency calls. All technicians are trained on all types of equipment and emergencies. The Trane
Parts Center also has an associate on call for after hours emergencies and response.
This list is rotated and in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year, including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal business hours and routes call to appropriate technician. Any calls received during normal business hours are handled by one of 3 Resource Coordinators.
Zone 14 Portland
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having 25 journeymen technicians available during normal working hours, which is Monday – Friday 7:00 AM-
5:00 PM. In addition, two technicians are on call each week to handle any emergency calls. All technicians are trained on all types of equipment and emergencies. The Trane
Parts Center also has an associate on call for after hours emergencies and response.
This list is rotated and in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year, including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal business hours and routes call to appropriate technician. Any calls received during normal business hours are handled by one of 3 Resource Coordinators.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with five technicians and two Field Supervisors on call.
Technicians on call are a Heavy Commercial technician, a Light Commercial technician, an Industrial technician, a Building Automation technician and a filter technician. Two supervisors are also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors
Zone 17 Wilmington

Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with two technicians on call. Our technicians on call have experience in Heavy Commercial equipment, Light Commercial equipment, and
Building Automation systems. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation (8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and team leaders.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with two technicians and one Field Supervisor on call.
Technicians on call are a Commercial HVAC technician and a Building Automation technician. Field supervisors are also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering system receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation
(8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having technicians available during normal work hours and after hours on-call technicians. One supervisor is also on call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This compliance is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the technician.
The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs at a prevailing rate.
Calls received during normal hours of operation (7 a.m. to 4 p.m.) are handled by the
Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Compliance with 24/7 hours of operation is accomplished by having all technicians available during normal work hours and an after hours list of on-call technicians. Each week an on-call list is prepared with five technicians and two field supervisors on- call.
Technicians on- call are a Heavy Commercial Technician, a Light Commercial
Technician, an Industrial Technician, a Building Automation Technician and a filter
Technician. Two Supervisors are also on- call each week to answer any questions when a technician needs assistance as well as any customer issues requiring supervisory decisions. This list is rotated each week and is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays. An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays theses calls to the appropriate technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs. Calls received during normal hours of operation

(8 a.m. to 5 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors.
Zone 24 Flint
One (1) Service Technician is on-call for after hours calls each day. On-call rotation is approximately every sixteen (16) weeks. After hours answering service receives request for emergency service and pages on-call service technician. On-call service technician will respond to the answering service within twenty (20) minutes or less. Service technician will call the customer and determine if the call is best handled by himself or another service technician, based on location and type of equipment to be serviced. If the answering service does not get a response within twenty minutes they, have a list of individuals to continue to call until they receive a response. Service calls received during normal business hours are handled by our Service Coordinator.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann’s National Call Center is operational 24/7 and receives and dispatches calls from our customers and dispatches customer service calls thru our normal procedures during normal business hours. Our call center also has the contact information for our
“on call” technicians at each of our facilities for after hours emergency dispatch.
17. Discuss your organization’s capability and historical flexibility in completing timely service calls and problem resolution.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
All TCPN customers are provided with a d edicated Strategic Account Manager ( Mike
Bee ). Additionally, there are two dedicated Existing Building Salesmen, Mark Thompson and Mike Tabb, assigned to most TCPN customers. It’s the responsibility of all the salesmen to resolve problems in a timely and expedient manner. If they cannot resolve the issue, the Comprehensive Solutions Manager will assist. The account managers have at their disposal the resources of the national account department, as well as
Trane Corporate resources to gain quick resolution to customer problems.
Zone 2 Dallas
Texas Trane’s HVAC maintenance personnel are grouped into Teams based on geography. Accounts are divided up among the maintenance Teams. There are three
Teams in Dallas, one in Ft. Worth, one in West Texas (Abilene to Lubbock) and one in
Waco. The activities of the Teams are directed by an Area Service Manager, 3 team leaders, administrative personnel, a Project Administrators (clerical) and a Resource
Coordinators (dispatchers). The Teams are responsible for efficient and effective scheduling to complete required scheduled maintenance activities and to cope with emergencies as they arise. If one Team’s mechanics and technicians become overloaded by emergency calls, overflow personnel can be “borrowed” from the other

Teams until the overload abates. In a dire emergency, personnel from other Trane locations can be called in to resolve serious short-term staffing overloads.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Service Calls are handled by each territory and are dispatched by a total of three (3)
Coordinators. One for Austin and two for San Antonio that also handle Corpus Christi where there are two technicians and the Rio Grande Valley where there are a total of five (5) technicians. The San Antonio office has twenty (20) technicians and the Austin sub office has a total of eighteen (18) technicians.
They have the ability to route technicians from one territory to another at any time in order to take care of service calls. Contract Customers have between one to three hour response times for service calls depending on location of Customer. All of the technicians have phones and if additional information is needed they have the ability to contact the team leaders for assistance. They also can contact the Service Manager and District Operations Manager depending on the nature of the problem.
Zone 4 Shreveport
All TCPN customers are provided with a dedicated national account relationship manager. It’s the project manager’s responsibility to resolve problems in a timely and expedient manner. The project manager has at his disposal the resources of the national account department, as well as Trane ’s Corporate resources to gain quick resolution to customer problems.
Zone 5 El Paso
Service calls are taken and scheduled based upon the level of emergency and facility requirements. The account manager and service manager handle all problem resolutions with each customer individually.
Zone 6 Arizona
See Answer for Zone 5
Zone 7 Arkansas
TCPN customers in Arkansas are served by a dedicated team of professionals serving the K-12 market. Ben Dye, Kerry Jones, Todd Castleberry and many others are focused on developing solutions for any customer need. They have at their disposal the resources of our 130+ employee Arkansas organization as well as thousands of other
Trane employees.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See Answer for Zone 5
Zone 9 Oklahoma

Calls for Service come into our office through a dedicated “800” number and are routed to one of 2 Resource Coordinators (one in Oklahoma City and one in Tulsa) for handling by our Service Response teams.
Service managers are Jim Chambers in Oklahoma City & Terry Thomas in Tulsa.
There are 11 service technicians in Oklahoma City and 13 Service technicians in Tulsa.
Zone 10 Wichita
We are very flexible when it comes to running service calls. We prioritize them to the degree of whether or not it is an emergency. If the call can wait we will usually run them from highest priority to lowest priority and then we try to handle our service contract customers first.
Zone 11 Kansas City
The Kansas City Trane District’s capabilities come from the quantity and quality of individuals and our organizational structure involved in timely service calls and problem resolution. The District has 62 Service Technicians with 550 years of combined experience which are supported by 5 experienced area service managers (ASMs).
These individuals are supported by local Account Managers, Project Managers, Project
Assistants, and a District Leadership team. Also, the District has at their disposal the resources of the national account department, as well as Trane Corporate resources to gain quick resolution to customer problems.
The diversity among the local and national individuals gives our Trane District flexibility to solve simple to complex project requirements.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour-Trane’s 70+ Service Technicians are cross trained in all HVAC equipment types.
As such, we are able to select from many technicians to respond to problems. It has been our practice to prioritize trouble calls by clients who have service contracts and those that are involved in life safety activity. Our technicians are dispatched via a wireless dispatch system that tracks all open calls to enable a reassignment in case the dispatched technician does not respond to the call.
Zone 13 Tennessee
Our service capability and flexibility is measured in the form of customer satisfaction.
Historically, our customer’s ultimately decide what “timely” means and if we meet their wants and needs for service response time. Some customers have critical applications and require 2 hour response, others have redundancy built into their system and require same day or next day service.
We currently measure our customer satisfaction through detailed customer satisfaction surveys and maintain over 90% satisfaction rates. Our goal is to increase this satisfaction through process improvement and continued interface with our customers.
Our customer satisfaction process highlights any open issues with performance and also generates corrective actions by our acquisition and fulfillment teams.

Face to face customer meetings are also utilized to review expectations and performance when/as needed.
Zone 14 Portland
Historically, we have been able to respond to emergency calls within 4 hours. Once the problem is diagnosed, and appropriate parts are acquired we make it a priority to complete the job. We have 25 journeymen and 5 apprentices that have all been trained to handle different situations.
Zone 15 Washington
We have hundreds of Service contract customers in our district (Seattle, Hawaii, and
Alaska). All of these customers have Mechanical service requests for timely response and repair completion requirements. Our greatest testament to customer satisfaction in this area is renewal of agreements and contract retention. We have over a 95% annual renewal rate. Our customer satisfaction surveys also bear this out with routinely high ratings for follow up and follow through with timely completion.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Trane Service is very versed at responding to our customers needs. We service some of the San Francisco Bay Area’s most critical facilities including process plants, FDA certified Bio-pharmaceutical plants, hospitals and data centers.
With 57 service mechanics, we have a large base of mechanics to draw from and we have experience servicing equipment from all major manufacturers.
We offer all contract customers a 2 hour response time, including after hours.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Seiberlich Trane Service leads the way in providing quality and timely HVAC system service to the commercial and industrial markets of our community. Along with delivering high quality service for your system, we pride ourselves in being your Total
Systems Solutions Provider.
•
Existing Building Systems .
Our Existing Building Systems department can help you identify and develop a strategic plan focused on reducing your facilities operating cost while meeting your concern with the compliance of regulatory agencies. Once refined, we construct and implement single-source solutions for your facility. These solutions include, but are not limited to proper management of HVAC assets, identification of building equipment upgrades, and the use of computerized analysis payback programs.
•
Training.
Each technician undergoes a rigorous five-year apprenticeship program, as well as an on-going program of local and Trane factory-sponsored seminars and classes. We offer one of the strongest service-training programs in the industry. Our service engineers are kept abreast of the latest equipment and state-of-the-art maintenance and service techniques, which means they bring industry expertise to the jobs and customers they serve.

•
A Wide Range of Service Programs . Seiberlich Trane offers a wide variety of maintenance and repair programs, all individually tailored to meet your needs. Our services include, but are not limited to:














Predictive Maintenance/Inspection contracts for all HVAC equipment and control systems
Comprehensive Service/Warranty contracts for all HVAC and controls systems
Total HVAC service
Complete CenTraVac, absorption, reciprocating and rooftop service
Centrifugal, absorption and reciprocating overhaul
Eddy current analysis
Re-tubing
Oil, lithium bromide and refrigerant analysis
Retrofit/renovation/replacement services
Facility management services
Remote monitoring
Extended parts and labor warranties
Refrigerant recycling
Refrigerant conversion



Vibration analysis and balancing
Chiller rentals
24 hour, 7 day emergency service
Zone 18 Gulf South
We have 44 Trane factory service technicians across our geography. We have been able to respond and be flexible to customer needs with current demand. Our technicians have been able to solve customer problems, and if not, have solved within our vast resources (tech support, Area Service Managers, inside support, etc)
Zone 19 Des Moines
Service calls are typically dispatched within 24 hours, with emergencies typically dispatched within the same day. We offer guaranteed response times for 2 hours or 4 hours, for contract customers. We also offer overtime options for customers who call later in the day and want same day service.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Rocky Mountain Trane’s historic capability and flexibility is to respond to the customer’s expectation for response time. This could be 2 hours or the next day, as determined by the customer. The length of time for service resolution (Service Call) is determined by the extent of the repairs required. Most repairs are completed the same day. Some will require additional time for the purposes of securing customer approval.
Zone 21 Las Vegas

The following process is followed in dispatching service to a customer's site. The time to notify the customer of dispatched service is 30 minutes or less. The total time from call request until technician is at job site is 4 hours or less.
The process used to expedite a service call to a service repair quotations starts with the initial service request. The Call Center time and date stamps each service call entry as well as informing the project manager, assigned to the account, of the service request.
Once the technician is on the job and has identified the problem, he contacts the project manager and explains the problem and the recommended solution. Our project manager will then contact the customer’s representative with the verbal repair quotation, estimated time for repair and request for approval. If the repair can be made at the time the technician is at the jobsite, he will be informed to perform the repair; if not, the project manager will inform the customer’s representative with the scheduled repair date. All of the project managers carry cell phones and are easily reached any time of the day or night. As an added means of assuring customer satisfaction the communication center will call each customer location after each scheduled maintenance and quoted repair service. The results of this satisfaction survey is electronically returned to the Trane Project Manager and if further actions are required they will be immediately addressed. The results are compiled and submitted for the customer’s review on a predetermined time frame.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Brady Trane has 21 field technicians with over 20 years of experience which leads to quick on the spot problem diagnostic work and resolution. In addition, we have senior in-house technical support positions. When needed we have a strong relationship with factory technical support. Mr. Dick Wells of Brady Trane is a 20 year member of Trane’s
Service Council Nationwide.
Zone 23 Virginia
See Answer for Zone 13
Zone 24 Flint
We measure the needs of our customers with each service call received. If it is an emergency we try to be on site within 2 hours of the initial call. If the call is not an emergency we will work with the customers schedule and have the technician on site when the customer requests, which is usually the same day. If that is not possible we will offer the customer our overtime services or let him know we will make his service call a priority the next morning.
Zone 25 Charlotte
See answer for Zone 13
Zone 26 Sacramento
Proactive use of revenue and backlog forecasting in our business allows us to forecast manpower requirements to staff our service business. Our historical customer

satisfaction survey of service and contract customers have been very positive around our response time and problem resolution skill sets.
Zone 27 Atlanta
Our service dispatchers contact all customers once an order is placed and transmitted to them by an account manager. Our dispatcher thanks the customer for their business and gives an initial timeframe as to when we will begin the project. This timeframe is based upon parts availability and expected delivery. Once the parts are in another call is placed to the customer with an exact date of the project. All customer complaints are escalated to the Service Manager and Sales Manager. One of them immediately contacts the customer and, if the customer allows, a face to face meeting is held within
24 hours.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Thru our National Call Center all calls are received and dispatched to the appropriate
Branch and followed up to ensure our service is completed. Our objective is to respond to service requests within 24 hours. Calls placed with our Branches directly or to an independent subcontractor have the same objective of a 24 hour response time. Calls that are unable to be resolved on the initial service call when parts are needed are continually monitored until the work is completed and the service ticket is closed.
AFFILIATES’ PRODUCTS & SERVICES:
Air Cleaning Solutions (Dust Collector)
Problem resolution is rapid with the availability of telephone assistance via the Field
Service Department at Corporate headquarters (800-252-4647), press option 1.
Armstrong (Pumps & Water Specialties)
We have a certified service technician available for repair or design problems. We can normally dispatch by the next day.
Camus Boiler (Boilers)
Camus has a certified service technician available for repair of design problems. We can normally dispatch by the next day.
Dynamic Air Quality Solutions (Indoor Air Filtration)
See Answers for all Trane Zones
Evapco (Cooling Towers)

Evapco ’s focus is on fanatical customer service. We work around the customer’s schedule when service calls are necessary. Problem resolution is handled with Evapco’s marketing engineers and sales representatives hand-in-hand.
Evaporcool (Process Cooling)
Service calls are typically routed to our local representatives. However, in emergencies typically we will respond within the same day. Although we cannot offer guaranteed response, we have taken our two inside technical support staff and have flown or driven to the customer’s facility to determine the problem at our expense. One thing we do guarantee and that is our customer service will be number one for Evaporcool .
Government Capital Corporation (Financing)
Not Applicable
Mitsubishi (Mini-Splits)
Mitsubishi does not currently provide service calls related to its equipment. This function is customarily provided by the installing contractor.
Repair opportunities depend on the availability of parts etc. We are in the HVAC business, we understand that if your unit is down it is critical. And historically have performed excellent under pressure.
Multistack (Chillers)
Multistac k sets the standard in the industry for superior customer service, fast and on time shipment, superior product quality, and new product development. Our pioneering leadership in environmental issues is well documented. If you want the best, be sure to specify the original: Multistack.
PVI (Hot Water Heaters)
PVI is a customer-oriented company and our desire is customer satisfaction. PVI’s purpose is to provide the user with protection against failure which could occur during the time period detailed within this limited warranty.
If the owner is dissatisfied because the water heater or boiler has failed to perform satisfactorily due to a defect in material or workmanship of any component part in the first year of service, or within 18 months of the shipment date, whichever occurs first, PVI will repair the product at no cost. General conditions, as stipulated on PVI’s limited warranties, will apply to this one-year cost-free service policy. See Appendix #4 for warranty certificate.
TAS (Packaged Chiller Plants)
See Trane Zones who supply local customer support.
Temspec (Unit Ventilators)

Temspec’ s capability and flexibility in completing timely service calls and problem resolution is excellent. It should be noted that it is dependent on Trane ’s site response.
Temspec provides parts either under warranty or as a parts sale for all jobs. Technical advice is provided by the Service Manager or an applications engineer.
Yaskawa (Inverters)
Response time via telephone will be within 30 minutes of your first call. Repair opportunities depend on the availability of parts etc. We are in the HVAC business, we understand that if your unit is down it is critical and historically have performed excellent under pressure.
18. Please describe the quality program(s) within your company and the program which measures your service work.
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane has adopted the Six-sigma initiatives to improve the quality of service to help streamline and to identify Service Agreement and repair processes. First, all service providers must meet the stringent service provider’s requirements to become a Trane
Comfort Specialist, prior to being utilized as a Trane Service Provider. The Trane service offices also have a stringent technician training and certification program have
When a service technician attends a technical training course they will be issued a document that they have attended the training class on a certain date that is documented/monitored by the La Crosse Technical Training group.
Trane also has a policy of surveying facility personnel after each scheduled and/or unscheduled service call. Not all corporate owned offices do this locally, but we do ask some Service Agreement customers to provide feedback on the timeliness and quality of our service process. Reviewing quotations and work orders is one of the primary responsibilities of the dedicated project manager. The project manager will check for cost verification, hourly rate, and reasonableness of work performed prior to an invoice of the associated work being submitted to the customer.
The following Trane franchise offices are independently owned and are part of this
RFP response.
Zone 1 Houston
Hunton Trane Services quality management program is a great tool for all levels of management to measure our effectiveness and performance in every department that comes into contact with our customers. The program consists of the following procedures:
•
Our Customer Service Representative contacts our customers on all jobs that were completed the previous week.
•
Based on a series of preset questions, our customers are able to measure us on a scale of 1-5, with 1 being the worst and 5 being the best.

•
Customers are encouraged to provide verbal input in addition to answering the preset questions to help us learn how they perceive their experience, from start to finish, with our company.
•
The option is given to answer questions on a more in depth survey via phone, fax or email. This enables us to measure more specifically.
•
All information is logged and forwarded to the required department with any follow up items to be addressed by that department.
Zone 4 Shreveport
Trane equipment is produced using Statistical Process Controls and Six Sigma initiatives to ensure a high quality product is delivered to our customers. To continue that high standard in the service and installation of our equipment, Storer Equipment Company tracks the equipment performance and satisfaction of customers. New equipment start ups are tracked with appropriate logs recording the critical steps of the procedure.
Annual oil samples and vibration analysis are used to determine the performance of the equipment per contractual agreement. An aftermarket account representative is assigned to each account to follow up with the customer at several intervals after start up to ensure understanding and satisfaction of our product and work. After the completion of preventive maintenance work, calls are made to customers. The
Customer Satisfaction Call questionnaire is used to obtain information about equipment use and technician performance. The records are placed in the customers file and distributed to the appropriate managers for follow up. Service work is measured reviewing repeat business calls, contract add-ons and service history within a certain time period. Service reports are reviewed for accuracy, length of time spent on each job, and callbacks to a job. Technical direction is available to our customers when calling for input after job completion, and technicians are on call around the clock for emergency support. Additional Customer Care includes personal interviews with randomly selected customers to obtain feedback regarding our performance and suggestions for improvement. Our continuous improvement efforts are further supported through new product training, technician career development training, and continuing education through specialized courses. In addition, we offer service agreements and software support agreements that provide additional owner/operator training specific to the equipment at their facility.
Zone 7 Arkansas
Trane Arkansas utilizes an on-going Total Quality Management program for all associates. The Trane Arkansas attitude is to meet customer requirements every time.
By embracing this personal performance standard, it encourages us to take our customers’ requirements seriously. Each technician is assigned to a team leader, who in turn reports to the service manager. Team leaders make follow-up “Quality
Assurance Visits” to customer sites with written action reports.
Zone 10 Wichita
We have our marketing manager or service coordinator call the customer back after the service call is completed to ensure they were satisfied with the service we provided them. It is tracked and the results of the calls are distributed to the account manager for any other follow up that may be necessary.

Zone 12 Philadelphia
The primary quality review is provided by the Service Dispatch system. All service orders and scheduled work are entered here and closed out when complete. The Area
Service Manager is responsible for reviewing all open orders monthly and making sure that work is completed in a timely basis.
Secondly, all service contract customers are surveyed by a dedicated service person.
She issues a monthly report on all responses to the senior service management and the
Executive Leadership team. Any issues identified are dealt with directly by the leadership team.
Zone 14 Portland
TraneOregon sets quality goals each year that are measured monthly. We utilize a system of tracking and “call-backs” that may occur due to non-repair or satisfaction upon the first visit. Our goal is less than 1% call backs annually. We have met this goal the last 4 years. In addition, we track technician leads regarding additional repair and maintenance. We track the number of these leads sold in an effort to ensure the customer equipment is maintained to the highest quality.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Our service territory is broken down into geographical regions. Each region is assigned a service dispatcher and a field foreman. The field foreman are responsible for oversight of the mechanics. They perform tail gate safety meeting twice per month, hold monthly breakfast meetings to discuss shop issues and disperse technical information and also perform job site visits.
When a issue arises with quality, we provide additional training for the mechanic and perform follow-up site visits to confirm the issues have been corrected.
Zone 17 Wilmington
All Seiberlich Trane associates strive to meet our customer service standards with every customer interaction. To follow up on the quality of our customer service, we consistently conduct customer surveys. One type of survey is a detailed, face to face interview with our service contract customers. We gather customer feedback regarding our entire process from sales, to service, to invoicing and everything in between including training needs. The second type of survey is a quick phone survey to follow up on a specific service call that was placed. The service calls are chosen at random for the phone survey program. All information collected as a result of our surveys is shared with the appropriate team. The information allows us to continually improve upon our customer service.
Zone 19 Des Moines
As a representative of Trane and other manufacturers, we participate in the quality alert programs to provide feedback to manufacturing regarding any quality issues in the products we provide. We also participate in their programs to resolve any outstanding product related issues and perform the warranty work. Within our company, we review our service work in terms of safety, refrigerant management, and warranty callbacks.

For safety we track injuries and work practices to ensure we provide safe solutions for our customers. We track refrigerant usage for our customers, to help ensure EPA compliance as well as any equipment related issues. We track warranty callbacks to ensure that we minimize downtime and errors for our customers.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Our marketing team follows up on every service call directly with the customer.
Information from our service tickets are transferred internally to marketing. We interview the customer by phone and learn of the customer’s satisfaction and experience. Twice per month, our service manager and dispatcher, as well as our owner and general manager meet to review the interview notes. Any open items or problems learned are given a specific action plan and someone takes responsibility to resolve them.
Zone 22 Greensboro
We provide the following quality programs:
•
In-house continuous training programs
•
Constant monitoring of callbacks for customer feedback
•
Customer response cards are utilized
Zone 24 Flint
There is no formal quality program; however, we do have a third party talk to our customers to evaluate our service performance.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann has quality check processes in all of our factories that include checks on the production lines during manufacturing and post production audits including, in many cases, run testing at the end of the line on self contained products, pressure testing for leak detection, etc. Warranty claims are also monitored to identify any quality issues.
When service is performed calls are monitored for completion and proper operation prior to closing the service ticket.
19. List your company’s standard scope of work performed for preventative maintenance visits.
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane’s Preventive Maintenance program typically consists of four quarterly site visits.
This is one annual inspection and three routine inspections. The number of site visits can vary according to the system needs. Please see TAB 5-Form A Services under
Scheduled Maintenance for further details of each piece of equipment.
Planned Maintenance Program Comprehensive Inspection:

Air Conditioning :
Condenser coil fins will be straightened and cleaned annually
Evaporator coil will be inspected and cleaned annually
Blower wheels will be inspected and cleaned during scheduled maintenance
Refrigerant charge checked by superheat / sub-cooling method
Air filter(s) will be changed quarterly
Belts and pulley(s) will be inspected and adjusted during scheduled maintenance
Lubrication of motors and bearings
Thermostat will be checked and calibrated annually
Controls and Safeties will be inspected and tested
Motors will be cleaned and inspected
Capacitors will be tested
Condensate drain will be checked to assure it is open
Crankcase heater will be operationally checked
Relays and contactors will be inspected
Unit disconnect inspected
Unit wiring will be inspected; loose connections will be tightened
Temperatures will be taken and recorded
Ductwork will be checked for proper insulation
Heat Pumps:
Condenser coil fins will be straightened and cleaned annually
Evaporator coil will be inspected and cleaned annually
Blower wheels will be inspected and cleaned during scheduled maintenance
Refrigerant charge checked by superheat / sub-cooling method
Air filter(s) will be changed quarterly
Belts and pulleys will be inspected and adjusted during scheduled maintenance
Lubrication of motors and bearings
Thermostat will be checked and calibrated annually
Controls and safeties will be inspected and tested
Motors will be cleaned and inspected
Capacitors will be tested
Condensate drain will be checked to assure it is open
Crankcase heater will be operationally checked
Relays and contactors will be inspected
Unit disconnect inspected
Unit wiring will be inspected, loose connections will be tightened
Temperatures will be taken and recorded
Ductwork will be checked for proper insulation
Auxiliary heat strips- will be checked
Gas Heating Systems:
Heat exchanger- will be inspected for cracks and deterioration
Air filter(s) will be replaced
Burners- will be cleaned
Fan switch- will be checked and adjusted annually
Pilot- will be cleaned and adjusted annually
Safety controls- will be operationally checked
Blower wheel- will be cleaned and motor lubricated
Gas line- will be checked from the furnace shut off valve to the burners

Combustion Air- openings will be checked
Flue pipe will be inspected
All panels will be secured
Thermostat- will be checked and calibrated annually
Temperatures and performance will be recorded
Hussmann
Our service contracts/preventative maintenance agreements are generally developed specifically for a customer based on the equipment package they are asked to cover.
20. List the dollar volume your company completes in HVAC maintenance annually.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
$3,92 MM This is maintenance only, does not include repairs.
Zone 2 Dallas
TX-OK completes $37 MM annually in direct service work.
Zone 3 San Antonio
$4.5 MM
Zone 4 Shreveport
$6 MM Service
Zone 5 El Paso
See Answer for Zone 6
Zone 6 Arizona
Southwest Trane does $30 MM in annual revenue throughout the district, including quoted work, repair work, and service agreement work.
Zone 7 Arkansas
$9MM annually
Zone 8 New Mexico
See Answer for Zone 6
Zone 9 Oklahoma
$2 MM annually for Oklahoma

Zone 10 Wichita
$4 MM
Zone 11 Kansas City
$430,000 HVAC Maintenance Contracts Annually
Zone 12 Philadelphia
$19-20 MM
Zone 13 Tennessee
$15-20 MM That number should be split 50/50 to represent 50% replacement, 50% repair.
Zone 14 Portland
Total Service Company HVAC maintenance is 8.9 million/year
Zone 15 Washington
Seattle district office - total service business is about $8 MM
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Trane Service completes approximately $3 million dollars in contracted service agreements annually.
Zone 17 Wilmington
$6.9 MM
Zone 18 Gulf South
$12.5 MM
Zone 19 Des Moines
Our annual maintenance contract volume is approximately $1MM. This contract base only, and does not include repair or upgrade work.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain approximately $22 MM
Zone 21 Las Vegas
$5 MM - $8 MM

Zone 22 Greensboro
$24MM
Zone 23 Virginia
$24 MM
Zone 24 Flint
$4 MM
Zone 25 Charlotte
$15 MM
Zone 26 Sacramento
$25 MM
Zone 27-Atlanta
GA $22 MM
AL $10 MM
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
21. Describe your call center organization.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
Hunton Trane Services :
Service calls during normal operating hours of 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. are answered by a staff of six service coordinators. Each is assigned to a specific group of technicians depending on the type of equipment to be serviced. Backup is provided by a Supervisor of dispatch as well as 2 Area Service Managers who will assist with call assignments as needed.
After hours calls are answered by an answering service. Calls are divided into Retail,
Commercial, Industrial and Plumbing. A backup supervisor as well as back up technicians are assigned a weekly rotation on the on call list. A copy of every service call logged by the after hours service is sent to our dispatch group and the list is checked every morning (excludes weekends) to make sure all calls have been addressed.
Zone 2 Dallas
Texas Trane:

Calls for Service come into our office through three dedicated Resource Coordinators who take calls directly. Those numbers are:
Dallas 972-406-3629
972-406-3673
972-406-3670
Fort Worth
Lubbock
817-838-1348
817-838-1350
Zone 3 San Antonio
Trane – San Antonio :
4 Service coordinators receiving 50 service calls daily. Off hours, an answering service is used to contact on-call technicians.
Zone 4 Shreveport
Storer Equipment:
During regular business hours, our two dispatchers receive all service calls and dispatch
technicians accordingly. During off hours, we have an answering service that dispatches
technicians on-call.
Zone 5 El Paso
Southwest Trane:
Hours are Monday through Friday 8:00am - 5:00pm. After-hours emergency service
24/7. We have two (2) service coordinators available to receive calls, who in turn can dispatch a technician to the jobsite within 2-4 hours.
Service:
•
Customer calls come into a dedicated call center for service or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Service consists of 6 service coordinators and 6 project administrators.
•
Service calls are picked up by our Service Fulfillment Group (Service
Coordinators) for resolution and dispatching.
•
Service Agreement customers are directed to a designated “Service Agreement
Team”
•
Service requests for repair work from non- service agreement customers are directed to our “Service Repair Team” for resolution and dispatch.
Equipment :
•
Customer calls and orders come into a dedicated call center for equipment or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Equipment consists of 7 Project Managers and 2 Application specialist and 2 Project
Administrators for processing orders and technical specifications.
Zone 6 Arizona
Southwest Trane:
Service:

•
Customer calls come into a dedicated call center for service or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Service consists of 6 service coordinators and 6 project administrators.
•
Service calls are picked up by our Service Fulfillment Group (Service
Coordinators) for resolution and dispatching.
•
Service Agreement customers are directed to a designated “Service Agreement
Team”
•
Service requests for repair work from non- service agreement customers are directed to our “Service Repair Team” for resolution and dispatch.
•
Customer calls and orders come into a dedicated call center for equipment or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Equipment consists of 7 Project Managers and 2 Application specialist and 2 Project
Administrators for processing orders and technical specifications.
Zone 7 Arkansas
Arkansas Trane:
During standard office hours, 7:30 am-5:00 pm, the phone system is answered by an operator and calls are directed to the appropriate person. After hours calls are directed to the appropriate party by a 24/7, 365 day per year answering service. Should the oncall person be unavailable, the next on-call person is contacted.
Zone 8 New Mexico
Service:
•
Customer calls come into a dedicated call center for service or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Service consists of 6 service coordinators and 6 project administrators.
•
Service calls are picked up by our Service Fulfillment Group (Service
Coordinators) for resolution and dispatching.
•
Service Agreement customers are directed to a designated “Service Agreement
Team”
•
Service requests for repair work from non- service agreement customers are directed to our “Service Repair Team” for resolution and dispatch.
Equipment:
•
Customer calls and orders come into a dedicated call center for equipment or into an automated call attendant for the district office. Call Center for Equipment consists of 7 Project Managers and 2 Application specialist and 2 Project
Administrators for processing orders and technical specifications.
Zone 9 Oklahoma
See Answer for Zone 2
Zone 10 Wichita
We really don’t have a call center. We have an answering service that is on 24/7 and when they receive a call past normal business hours they call the tech that is on call and dispatches them.

Zone 11 Kansas City
We do not have call center operations in this district office.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Live Operators 24/7/365.
Highest quality Operators, well trained in customer service to comfort customers in emergency situations. The messaging features include dispatching on call technicians via phone and following up with voicemail, fax, email, text messaging and pagers (if needed). They provide customized services for individual customer arrangements. They are also easily accessible for updates in coverage and changes in service times.
Currently, the answering service starts after 4:30pm and ends at 7:30am.
Zone 13 Tennessee
See Answer for Zone 23
Zone 14 Portland
TraneOregon’ s calls center is staffed Monday – Friday, 7:00 AM – 5:00 PM by 3
Resource Coordinators. In addition, after hours assistance is available by phoning our main number. We have 25 journeymen technicians available to assist at the request of the Resource Coordinators. In addition, we also have a parts associate on call after hours if needed.
Zone 15 Washington
Each of the offices in the Northwest – Hawaii District (Western WA, Alaska and Hawaii) has a phone number for each location that is answered during normal business hours
(8AM to 5PM) by a local office resource who can make sure that the call is directed to the person who can best support the customer. After these hours, those numbers are
“rolled over” to our Trane National Service organization who can get the information from the customer and contact the appropriate “on call” after hours technician to support the customer’s needs.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Our call center consists of four dispatchers. The dispatchers work together to schedule and dispatch calls for our entire region. The dispatchers are each assigned a certain geographical region.
Zone 17 Wilmington

Customers may call our office 24/7 to place a service call. Our phone numbers are 302-
395-0200 or toll free 877-246-7200. If a customer calls when our office is closed (normal business hours are M-F 8am-5pm), they will be given the following option: “If you are a service contract customer requiring assistance of a Service technician prior to 8:00am on our next normal business day, please dial 1.” This option will forward the call to our answering service which will take a message containing all the pertinent customer contact information. The answering service will then contact 1 of the 2 service technicians on-call, who will then contact the customer to resolve their service issue.
Zone 18 Gulf South
Service calls during normal operating hours of 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. are answered by a staff of four service coordinators. Each is assigned to a specific group of technicians depending on geography. After hour calls are handled by Trane Centralized Monitoring
(TCM).
Zone 19 Des Moines
Calls are handled by our automated phone system, along with a receptionist. Calls are routed to specific departments / people, as appropriate. For Service Calls, callers are routed to our two dispatchers, who discuss the situation, identify the appropriate technician, and schedule the service call with the customer.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
A third-party relationship has been established with FirstCall, Inc. located in Greenville,
SC to handle after hours and overflow calls for all company-owned Trane Commercial
Service offices. This allows Trane to provide customers with a more consistent and reliable experience, less wait time, and the opportunity to speak to a live person within approximately 30 seconds.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
An answering service receives all calls after normal hours of operation and relays these calls to the technician. The technician will then visit the jobsite and perform the repairs at a prevailing rate. Calls received during normal hours of operation (7 a.m. to 4 p.m.) are handled by the Service Coordinators and relayed to the technicians and supervisors.
This compliance is in effect 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year including holidays.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Brady Services provides professional HVAC service to North Carolina. This service is delivered by nine teams of highly qualified technicians strategically located throughout the state. Each team is coached by a team leader.
All service work is scheduled through Brady Services headquartered in Greensboro, NC by one of six Resource Managers. The Resource Managers have teams permanently assigned to them. The Resource Manager is responsible for taking the call, determining the urgency of the call and dispatching the best qualified technician to handle the call.

Brady Services provides after-hour emergency service by means of a toll free telephone number to a central answering service. There are three service area groups on standby duty to respond to emergency calls. They are identified as western, central and eastern areas. Each area has two men on standby except the western area where there are four men. Nine service team leaders are available to provide logistical and technical assistance to the standby technicians. Additionally, there is one control technician on standby. Standby duty rotates weekly.
Brady Trane has five parts outlets to support the service operation. Parts department personnel are on call to assist technicians when needed.
Zone 23 Virginia
Monday - Friday 8am to 5pm – Local Call Center
•
•
Calls are received and responded to by our local center.
Team of 4 project administrators & 3 dispatchers will receive calls and dispatch accordingly.
After hours call service 24/7/365 - National Call Center
•
•
Calls are routed to the National Call center located in Columbus Ohio.
A team of technical specialists, M&V support analysts, contract specialists &
• program experts will respond to the call.
After diagnoses of the call they will dispatch local ON-Call technicians accordingly.
Zone 24 Flint
Nelson Trane – Building Technical Services , Normal Hours of Operation 7:30 AM – 4:30
PM Mon. Fri., After Hours Service Available 24/7….Twenty-Two (22) Service technicians, Two (2) Team Leaders/Field Supervisors, One (1) Technical Services
Manager. One (1) Central Dispatching Point, One (1) Service Coordinator. One (1) Parts
Outlet, with Three (3) Parts Consultants
Zone 25 Charlotte
See Answer for Zone 23
Zone 26 Sacramento
We have central dispatching center in Sacramento with (2) dispatchers. Dispatch covers technicians in the Fresno, Sacramento and Reno territory. Dispatchers are 8am-5pm.
We also have 24/7 after hours service line.
Zone 27 Atlanta
We utilize a company called 1 st
Call as our after hours answering service. They answer all calls live and contact one of our 6 service techs on call that particular night/weekend.
The calls are promptly dispatched. The attach file is sent out to various leaders in our organization every morning at 7:38 AM. As you can see it summarizes each call. I in turn forward it to the assigned account manager/s for follow up and to insure we responded promptly and to also inquire on any services needed as a result of the call.

Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Our warranty/service call center is located in our corporate offices in Bridgeton, MO and is staffed with a Call Center Manager and a staff of service dispatchers who take the calls, and dispatch them to our local service centers of outside contractors where needed. They dispatch the call and follow it thru the system. The call center is available to our customers on a 24/7 basis.
22. Does your company offer a dedicated, 800 number for all locations to place phone and fax orders? Is the call center available 24 hours/7 days week?
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
We use a dedicated “800” number (1-800-880-7378) and it is available 24 hours/7 days a week
Zone 2 Dallas
We do not offer a 1-800 call service. Service Response is available 24/7 via 972-406-
3666.
Zone 3 San Antonio
After hours #’s
San Antonio (210) 657-0932
Austin (512) 416-8822
Rio Grande Valley (866) 275-7178
Zone 4 Shreveport
The 800- 844-8422 number is for Texas calls, Our call center answers 24/7 on that number and on 318-865-1466.
Zone 5 El Paso
See answer for Zone 6
Zone 6 Arizona
We do not have an 800 number. However, we are targeting the end of 2011 to have a call center for the district for Parts, Service, and LCU (City Desk) each having their own
800 number.
Zone 7 Arkansas

During standard office hours, 7:30 am-5:00 pm, the phone system is answered by an operator and calls are directed to the appropriate person. After hours calls are directed to the appropriate party by a 24/7, 365 day per year answering service. Should the oncall person be unavailable, the next on-call person is contacted.
Toll: 800-983-6055 for calls. Fax is 501-661-9109.
After hours calls are sourced through an answering service 24-7.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer for Zone 6
Zone 9 Oklahoma
Oklahoma City 1-800-826-4346
Tulsa 1-800-982-2261
Emergency call is available 24/7 in both locations.
Zone 10 Wichita
Yes we do 800-342-1361. It is answered by us or our answering service 24/7.
Zone 11 Kansas City
Orders – 913-599-4664 phone / 913-599-4669 fax
Service – 8-5 M-F 913-599-4664 phone / 913-599-4669 fax
Service – After Hours 877-882-8139 phone only
Call Center is available 24 hours / 7 days a week
Zone 12 Philadelphia
The company # is 610-962-1693. This # can be used to contact all departments during normal business hours and to contact Service and Parts after hours. The call center is manned 24/7.
Zone 13 Tennessee
We currently offer a local service phone number for service requests during normal business hours. The number is dedicated to the local office and is forwarded to our 24/7 afterhours call center at the end of each day. If preferred by the customer, one 1-800 number can be established for all incoming service calls. Otherwise, for TN, the local office numbers are:
Trane Memphis (Mid-South)
Trane Chattanooga
901-345-6000
423-296-1506

Trane Nashville
Trane Knoxville
Zone 14 Portland
Yes we do 800-245-3964
615-242-0311
865-588-0607
Zone 15 Washington
No we do not. However, for each of our district locations (Seattle, Hawaii and
Anchorage) we have a direct phone number that if after hours, is rolled over to after hours support resources.
Zone 16 San Francisco
We do not have an 800 number.
All calls, including after hours, should be to our business phone number.
Pacific Coast Trane Service (408) 481-3700
For Service 24 hours per day / 7 days per week
Zone 17 Wilmington
Customers may call our office 24/7 to place a service call. Our phone numbers are 302-
395-0200 or toll free 877-246-7200. If a customer calls when our office is closed (normal business hours are M-F 8am-5pm), they will be given the following option: “If you are a service contract customer requiring assistance of a Service technician prior to 8:00am on our next normal business day, please dial 1.” This option will forward the call to our answering service which will take a message containing all the pertinent customer contact information. The answering service will then contact 1 of the 2 service technicians on-call, who will then contact the customer to resolve their service issue.
Seiberlich Trane does not have a line dedicated to place orders. However, our general toll free number is: 877-246-7200
Zone 18 Gulf South
After Hours Emergency
Parts & Service
(866) 639-9251 (This number is ONLY from 5pm to 7am)
During Normal Business Hours please contact a Trane Office for Service or Parts/Sales as listed below
Baton Rouge Sales Office (877) 863-8719 Toll Free
(225) 291-9472 Fax
(225) 298-4295 Parts Fax
Mobile Sales Office (866) 305-4418 Toll Free
(251) 665-2920 Fax
(251) 665-2936 Parts Fax

New Orleans Sales Office (888) 806-5432 Toll Free
(504) 731-0833 Fax
(504) 733-8601 Parts Fax
1-866-422-7917 Email Fax Number for Service
Pensacola Sales Office (866) 418-4780 Parts Toll Free
(850) 505-9915 Parts Fax
Gulfport Parts Store (228) 863-4445 Telephone
(228) 863-4441 Fax
Zone 19 Des Moines
We do not have a dedicated 800 number. Our phone system is available 24/7, and pages the on call BAS or Service technician as appropriate.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
No, but all orders can be faxed to our Denver location at 303-228-3300 and will be properly processed. We have call center availability at all locations 24 hours/7 days per week.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane does not offer a dedicated 800 number. The after hours call service is available 24 hours/7 days per week.
Zone 22 Greensboro
We have “800” phone and FAX number at each office location available for order entry.
The call centers are available for service 24 hours/7 days a week.
Zone 23 Virginia
1-800-478-7263
Yes, call center is available 24 hours / 7 days a week.
Zone 24 Flint
Our company offers a dedicated, 800 number for all locations to place phone orders
(800-245-3964) but no 800 fax and it is available 24 hours/7 days a week.
Zone 25 Charlotte
Yes we do. 800-933-9601 also, we have these numbers for after hours:
704-529-3299
888-748-7263

(704) 525-8582 (fax)
Zone 26 Sacramento
Sacramento offers an 800 service call number available after hours 7 days a week.
Number is 866 459 4155.
Zone 27 Atlanta
We do not have one 1-800 number for all offices and all business streams.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Phone orders can be placed by calling our customer service department during regular business hours at 1-800-879-1152 ext. 5707 between 8 a.m and 4:30 p.m. CST. Fax orders can be submitted 24/7 to 314-298-4757 attn: Kelly McCombs.
23. Describe how service call problems get escalated in emergency situations during and after hours. Who would be responsible in your company for assessing the appropriate course of action to remedy the problem?
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
After hours service calls are received by call center and routed to the appropriate on call service technician. When escalation is required, the technician or dispatcher will contact the on call service supervisor. The supervisor assesses the situation and calls in the necessary resources. The on call supervisor has the emergency contact information for all departments and managers.
Zone 2 Dallas
Initial responsibility during business hours resides at the technician level. Should the technician require further input or decision authority, the team leaders would then be engaged. If further discussions or level of authority are required, the Area Service
Manager is engaged. Ultimately, if further input is required, the District Service Leader is engaged.
After hour responsibilities fall to the technician on-call. The same chain or communication is employed.
Zone 3 San Antonio
During regular hours – the technician on job site would notify the Service Manager – for after hour’s situations – the technician on call would notify the backup Superintendent – depending on severity they would then notify the Service Manager.

In both cases the Service Manager would then determine if the issue needed to be escalated up higher – District Manager for example would be notified depending on severity of the emergency situations.
Zone 4 Shreveport
The lead technician is responsible to respond to all emergencies. If the emergency requires escalation it goes to the field technical manager and then to the service department manager. If further escalation is required the general manager would engage and support the technical staff until the emergency is resolved.
Zone 5 El Paso
Southwest Trane
Service calls are taken and technicians dispatched in each office during normal business hours. Each dispatcher and all technicians have team leaders as immediate supervisors for problems and emergency situations. Area service managers in each office would be the next level of escalation for problems and emergencies. Finally the Service solutions leader would be the final escalation in the organization for resolving emergencies. The district and area mangers are also available for emergency situations.
After hours call are routed to the on call technician in each office. Every office has several on call technicians and one on call supervisor for emergency situations. The area service managers and service solutions leader are always available via phone for after hour’s emergencies as needed.
Zone 6 Arizona
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 7 Arkansas
The on-call technician assesses the call scale and urgency. At that time he will determine his availability as well as capability and contact his supervisor if assistance is required. If later the technician assesses on-site a need for additional support, his supervisor will be engaged.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 9 Oklahoma
See answer for Zone 2
Zone 10 Wichita
We have an answering service staffed 24/7. When a call comes in after hours the answering services calls the service tech that is “on call” and he returns the call to the customer to determine if it is a emergency or not. If it is, he will proceed to the customer to get the call resolved.

Zone 11 Kansas City
Average 6 per day –
Service Technicians and Area Service Managers
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour-Trane’s single service phone # 610-962-1650 is linked to our service office 24/7.
During the day, our service dispatch center handles the call. In the evening, our call center forwards emergency calls to the on-call technician. If he needs help, he calls the
Area Service manager or Service Director, Bob Carr, to elevate the call for additional resources, including Parts Center after hours response.
Zone 13 Tennessee
During normal business hours, emergency situations are handled by our service coordinators. If a conflict arises where we cannot meet the emergency demands, the service coordinator will immediately contact and involve the local area service manager
for conflict resolution. This resolution may include running a technician out of area, doubling manpower, pulling manpower from other non-emergency situations, or calling in another technician from another area or district. Area service managers are also on- call and handle any escalated item from our call center during after hours.
Zone 14 Portland
If decisions need to be made to manage emergency calls or allocate resources the decisions are made by either Tammy Nelson, Service Manager, Joe Groom, Field
Supervisory or Corey Richards, Lead Resource Coordinator. They are all available via cell phone during and after work hours.
Zone 15 Washington
We have an on-call protocol which 1 st
includes the technician, 2 nd
the Area Service manager, 3 rd
the operations mgr, 4 th
a field supervisor, 5 th
another Field Supervisor, and others.
It most often never gets beyond a 2 nd
stage.
Zone 16 San Francisco
After hour calls are routed to an office support person/dispatcher who is on call for the week. The office on call person has the support of the account manager, office manager, field foreman and general manager if need be. In the event of an emergency, the on call dispatcher and mechanic can pull from this team as need be to facilitate the customer’s needs.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Seiberlich Trane’s Service Department is organized with a General Service Manager, (2)
Team Leaders, (2) Service Coordinators, and (2) Service administrative assistants. The responsibilities are as follows:

•
Service Manager is responsible for overall direction, procedures, and financial success of the department
•
Service Team Leaders provide direct support of our technicians and customers
•
Service Coordinators schedule our technicians’ time and coordinate schedules with customers
During office hours, our Service Coordinators would field any emergency calls and dispatch a technician to the site, informing the appropriate Service Team Leader should their assistance be required. After hours, a service call to our office would be routed through our answering service. The answering service would immediately notify the lead technician on call. Should the on-call technician require additional support, he would notify the Service Team Leader.
Zone 18 Gulf South
Gulf South Call escalation
Normal working hours:
•
Call comes into Service Coordinator (SC)
•
SC assesses problem and critical nature
•
SC provides and estimated time for technician to arrive (may take up to 1 hour
•
while checking status with qualified technicians for call)
•
if estimated time is not satisfactory to customer – escalates call to Area Service
Manager
After hours:
•
Call comes into call center
•
Dispatched to one of 5 technicians Gulf South has on call by geographic locations
•
On call technician calls customer with ETA, etc
•
if customer not satisfied – on call technician calls Area Service manager to discuss and prioritize
Zone 19 Des Moines
During normal working hours, our customers talk directly to our dispatchers to identify emergency situations, and our dispatchers elevate the call / response time. During after hours, our automated attendant system calls our on call technician directly. If the technician doesn’t respond within 5 minutes, it calls two more times. The system then calls the field supervisor, then service manager, to ensure after hour emergency calls are handled in an appropriate amount of time.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Service call emergency level is determined by the dispatcher during the conversation with the individual that calls in requesting service during normal office hours. After

hours, the “call service” calls the technician on call; the technician in turn calls the individual requesting service and determines the emergency level of the call.
Service call response time can range from ”The closest tech will immediately get in service vehicle and drive to jobsite” to “ Call customer back on the next business day and schedule next convenient appointment”.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
The field technician assesses the situation at the jobsite. All of our technicians are journeyman level at minimum. If the problem extends beyond their personal ability, depending on the time of day, the next move may be to call into technical support.
Concurrently, our service manager is available 24 hours a day and may get involved to remedy the problem.
Zone 22 Greensboro
During normal working hours, all calls are received and evaluated by the Resource
Coordinators. After hours, the on-call technician receives the call and evaluates. In either case, the next level of assessment is via the Service Team Leaders and/or the
Service Manager.
Zone 23 Virginia
We have a service dispatch team at all times assisted by our service management team.
Zone 24 Flint
One (1) Service Technician is on-call for after hours calls each day. On-call rotation is approximately every sixteen (16) weeks. After hours answering service receives request for emergency service and pages on-call service technician. On-call service technician will respond to the answering service within twenty (20) minutes or less. Service technician will call the customer and determine if the call is best handled by himself or another service technician , based on location and type of equipment to be serviced. If the answering service does not get a response within twenty minutes they, have a list of individuals to continue to call until they receive a response.
Service calls received during normal business hours are handled by our Service
Coordinator.
Zone 25 Charlotte
We have two technicians and one ASM (Area Service Manager) on after hours call at all times. If the opportunity can’t be solved by these individuals then they phone John
Bassett who has the authority to make all decisions for the District.
Zone 26 Sacramento
Service calls are escalated based on a collaborative team effort between the service dispatcher, service technician, area service manager and account manager. Escalation is based on a decision making matrix.

Zone 27 Atlanta
The appropriate area service manager would be updated and would immediately talk to the customer and also to the involved service technicians. He would handle the issue and would involve the sales manager or service manager if needed.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Service calls, as they are received by our service center, are reviewed with the caller to determine the specifics of the issue and prioritized based on the collected information.
Those items that are of immediate nature; refrigeration system failure, etc. are escalated to “high priority” and handled first, less emergency calls are handled as received. This is true of standard and after hours calls. Non-emergency after hours calls are handled the next business day.
24. Please list the services your company can install that will accumulate renewable energy or green credits that can be traded in the future.
ANSWER:
Trane
•
Fuel Cell
•
Nitrogen in Tires
•
Black Box
•
Direct Contact Boiler
•
Lighting & Plug Load Controllers
•
Cool-n-Save
•
Tankless Heat Pump HW Heaters
•
LED HiBay-Warehouse Applications
•
Voltage Regulation – Power Quality
•
Solar Wind Air Conditioning
•
Gym Equipment Energy Production
•
Intelligent Boiler Controller
•
TSHO-T8 replacement for HID
•
Flozone Water Treatment
•
Direct Contact Technologies-Supportive documentation-TSHO
•
Spectrally-Enhanced Lighting
•
DCV for Food Service Hoods
•
Direct Contact Technologies-Solar PV Fact Sheet
•
LED Street Lighting
•
Eco Induction Garage Lighting
•
Packaged Solar Kits
•
Delamping – motion sensor
•
Green Energy Machine
•
Super Insulation Glass
•
Dri-Steam Humidification

•
Sub-Power Metering
•
Solyndra Solar PV Systems
•
Solar Powered Trash Compactor
•
Greywater Recovery System
•
Sky Lights
•
Thermal Depolymerization Plant
•
Retro-Commissioning
•
Solar Tracking Technology
•
Off-Grid Solar-Wind LED Lights
•
Garper Lighting Voltage Limiter
Hussmann
Hussmann retail refrigeration
•
Hussmann has been developing technologies that offer environmental benefits for over 15 years. Some of these technologies, like Innovator doors, were developed mainly to help our customers reduce energy costs. Green benefits were an added advantage. Others, like the Protocol refrigeration system, were developed to specifically address environmental concerns. We currently offer a variety of products and services which can have a significant impact in helping to reduce emissions. The time has arrived for us to actively promote wider adoption of these products and services.
•
Protocol distributed refrigeration
•
ECM fan motors
•
Integrated night curtains
•
Innovator II Doors
•
E-Plus Coils
•
Low Temp Excel Islands
•
EcoShine LED lights
25. Describe your expectations of your subcontractors and /or service centers when completing a repair. How does your company verify these expectations are being met?
ANSWER:
Tools, Training, Safety & Expertise
Trane’s service and contracting technicians are not only among the most skilled in the industry they are also extensively trained in safe work procedures. Our technicians receive safety training, equipment, tools, procedures, and management support to identify jobsite hazards and take appropriate measures to prevent personal injuries. The resources available to Trane technicians include:
 Safety Training – 20 hrs per year, including classroom and web-based platforms.
-Topics include, but are not limited to, Lockout/Tagout, Confined Space Entry,
Hazard Communication, Respiratory Protection, Hearing Conservation, Excavations,
Scaffolding, Rigging, Powered Industrial Truck operation, Ladders, Vehicle Safety,
Fire Protection, PPE, Emergency Response, First Aid / CPR.










Electrical Safety – NFPA 70E compliant – electrical PPE; flame-resistant clothing; training.
Fall Protection – full complement of fall arrest and fall restraint equipment for each technician.
Ergonomics – custom-designed for HVAC field technicians, includes training, material handling equipment and procedures.
Smith System Safe Driving Program – Trane’s safety Managers are certified instructors; safety Managers train technicians; 1-800 “How’s My Driving?” stickers are located on the back of service vehicles.
USDOT compliance – technicians scheduled within Material of Trade and Hours of
Service limits and are fully qualified under Department of Transportation rules for driving commercial motor vehicles with GVWR >10,000 and 26,000 lbs.
Refrigerant Management – Service technicians are trained to manage refrigerant in accordance with U.S. EPA rules using a sophisticated electronic tracking system developed by Trane.
Empowerment - Technicians are empowered with full management support to address safety hazards as they see fit. If ever in doubt about how to do a job or task safely, the technician is required to ask a qualified person for assistance before proceeding with work.
Management Leadership and Commitment
Accident prevention is a primary responsibility of management at Trane . Trane ’s safety culture is based on the following management principles:
 Leadership at the local level manages the local organization’s safety performance.


Management is financially accountable for safety performance.
Local management is actively engaged in risk reduction activities and training and

 manages safety performance outcomes.
Management clearly communicates to all Trane employees their safety expectations and strongly enforces compliance with those expectations.
Employees are held accountable when they fail to meet safety expectations.
Local management and supervisory personnel at the local level are responsible for implementation of the following safety program elements:






The Safety Management System developed by Trane – developed in accordance with OHSAS 18001.
Audits and Inspections – Supervisors, Middle and Upper Managers must conduct field inspections. Corporate Safety conducts detailed compliance and management systems audits.
Company safety compliance programs – ensure that they are fully implemented.
Safety and environmental performance – tracked using a Balanced Scorecard with leading and lagging indicators and metrics.
Subcontractor Qualification – implement this process to promote safety and safety plan compliance on multi-employer job sites.
Six Sigma and Lean – use these productivity tools to enhance safety on job sites.
Drug and Alcohol Policy – mandatory DOT required for-cause and post-accident testing after recordable injuries and property damage.
Motor Vehicle Records Search – annual checking of driving records of employees driving company vehicles.

26. List the steps taken from start to finish in receiving a service call through to completion of repair and invoicing. Include time frames associated with each step.
ANSWER:
Local Service
Provider assigns a
Local Service Provider:
Facility
Requests
Repair
Services
TCPN proposal
Number and
Preapproved limit
(2hrs)
1. Identifies the Facility #
2. Identifies the Caller
3. Document the Problem
(2 hrs)
Trane Service Provider
Calls Client to:
A. Confirm Request/Schedule
B. Ask for Details if Applicable
C. Give Arrival Time
Tech arrives at Facility; Signs in Yes
Repair within preapproved limit?
No
(See Question 15)
Client Reviews & Authorizes Repair and/or Replacement Proposal
Repair within preapproved limit?
No
Trane Service
Provider Prepares
Quote for repair
Yes
Trane Service Provider performs administrative functions and invoices client with TCPN P.O.
(See Question 75)
Trane Service Provider
Forwards copies to TCPN
Coordinator
A. Signed Work Orders
B. Invoice for Services
STOP
Trane Service Provider performs repair and/or replacement
Trane Project Manager reviews invoice and work orders
Included in consolidated monthly invoice to TCPN

27. Describe how your company tracks completion of repairs and what information is required to be submitted by the service center prior to payment.
ANSWER:
The Project Manager/Administrator will follow up with the service provider the next business day (weekends excluded) to verify call response and call status. This information will then be posted to TCPN ComfortSite. Prior to paying the service provider, the Project Manager’s Team will review the invoice and work ticket for accuracy and reasonableness.
28. Describe how your company manages services calls on a not to exceed amount. Is your company willing to accept a not to exceed amount specified by the government entity or does your company operate with a minimum amount not to exceed; if so, what is that amount?
ANSWER:
Trane does not have preset limit established with our service providers. We recommend that we work with government entities to establish a reasonable dollar limit to ensure that most minor repairs could be completed on the initial call. The intent being, this allows
Trane the opportunity to review the cost of major repairs and give guidance to the customer regarding the appropriate response whether to repair or replace.
29. Indicate if your company is willing to spread the cost of the PM’s over the entire year and bill the government entity monthly.
ANSWER:
Yes, we are willing to bill this way. We are also willing to submit an EXCEL spreadsheet breaking out all this information on occurrence. Signed service reports stating the work that was performed are used to reconcile the invoices, etc. including any recommendation for repairs that need to be performed.
30. Indicate the implementation steps and time frames needed to implement a HVAC
Repair and Maintenance Program with your company.
ANSWER:
1. Facility request service via 1-800 number (immediate)
2. Confirm details of the request and calls the service provider for the specific site (10 minutes)
3. Tech arrives at facility requesting service (if urgent tech arrives between 2-4 hours)
4. Service problem is diagnosed (time varies – most can be diagnosed within 2 hours)
5. Project administrator is made aware of problem (notified by service provider immediately)
6. Project administrator makes decision to repair or consult first with your customer depending on dollar amount (30 minutes)
7. Repair is authorized and made (authorization is either immediate, or delayed until your customer makes a decision depending on the dollar amount)
8. Service ticket reconciled against PO (2-3 days)
9. Invoice sent to customer (3-5 days)
10. Service request closed out and posted on ComfortSite (5-7 days)

31. Discuss your company’s current computer systems architecture. How does your company’s computer system guarantee government entities receive consistent service support and call processing, pricing, HVAC responsibility verification, and inquiry and management reporting?
ANSWER:
Technicians: Trane employs over 2500 technicians nationwide. Information concerning capabilities, skills, certificates of insurance, etc., is stored in our Technicians Database.
The La Crosse Technical Training Group maintains the database regarding technician class attendance and grades levels. Periodically, corporate performs a Service
Technician Listening tour to obtain feedback on their needs in the field. Several new improvement projects were completed as a direct result of the Listening Tour. We also involve our service technicians in product improvement meetings to help understand and improve the serviceability of our products. We also maintain an on-line “Quality Alert” feedback system to allow service technicians direct access to quality issues. Several of our Service Agreement customers are randomly selected to measure Trane’s service delivery process.
Request for Service: All requests for service, outside of Scheduled Service, via telephone or ComfortSite, are handled by our Communication Centers. The information is recorded in ComfortSite after a technician has been dispatched. It is Fulfillment’s responsibility to follow-up and ensure that the service is performed as efficiently and cost effective as possible, and then recording the resulting information into ComfortSite.
32. List your company’s current capabilities for energy management system monitoring.
Discuss the process involved when resolving a problem associated with an HVAC unit or system where an energy management system is installed.
ANSWER:
Energy management systems can be monitored 24/7 if the customer chooses to select this service. A customer must have a dedicated modem line connected to their building automation system with the modem number supplied to Trane or if a BCU (Building
Control Unit) is on the network (mandatory if connecting BCU's to Tracer ES system), then remote access to BCU's (usually via a VPN connection) is required. This will enable the system to page the Trane technicians who can respond to the call. A designated technician will then connect to the automation system by remote computer. If the problem can be repaired without a site visit, the technician will do so at this time. If the problem requires a visit to the site, the customer will be contacted for approval to do so.
Upon completion of either repair, the customer will be notified of the service performed.
33. List the number of sites your company currently monitors Energy Management
Systems (EMS).
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
We have Hunton SMART® Services contracts on 5 sites where we monitor 24/7 and provide reports of energy waste or comfort issues on a monthly basis.
We have 13 other sites where monitor alarms via pager and respond to the alarms immediately.

Zone 2 Dallas
Service has 3 and Contracting for Measurement & Verification has 2
Zone 3 San Antonio
There are no remote monitored systems in our district.
Zone 4 Shreveport
23 customers multiple buildings
Zone 5 El Paso
80 sites
Zone 6 Arizona
16 sites
Zone 7 Arkansas
85 sites
Zone 8 New Mexico
As of right now we monitoring about 45 sites
Zone 9 Oklahoma
Oklahoma City and Tulsa monitor over 100 sites statewide
Zone 10 Wichita
1 customer
Zone 11 Kansas City
6 sites
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour-Trane actively monitors and does performance reporting for 103 sites.
Zone 13 Tennessee
10 sites
Zone 14 Portland
currently monitors 20 sites

Zone 15 Washington
Our office has 3 sites signed up for monitoring through Trane Remote Services
Zone 16 San Francisco
We currently have no sites/EMS systems being monitored remotely. We perform maintenance on over fifty sites/EMS control systems.
Zone 17 Wilmington
16 customers
Zone 18 Gulf South
5 customers
Zone 19 Des Moines
Although we have many EMS under contract, we do not have any sites that we are actively monitoring (alarms, pages, etc. go directly to the customer). We are able to perform this function, if desired by our customers.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
9 customers
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Currently, we monitor (5) five sites through software and installed kW meters, collecting data regarding their energy usage.
Zone 22 Greensboro
20 customers
Zone 23 Virginia
70 sites
Zone 24 Flint
40 customers
Zone 25 Charlotte
5 sites
Zone 26 Sacramento
There are no remote monitored systems in our district.

Zone 27 Atlanta
26 customers
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
34. List the functions or parameters your company is monitoring or receiving alarms on for the sites where EMS is monitored.
ANSWER:
We receive alarms on Trane mechanical units, such as chillers, air handlers, fan coil units and VAV boxes. On equipment where the unit can be reset remotely we reset the unit and monitor it for the alarm to return. If the alarm returns we will issue a service call for a technician to check out the unit. We also monitor high temperature alarms and track the problem whether it is at the VAV box serving the area or the AHU. If we can fix it remotely we do, otherwise we issue a service call.
35. List your company capabilities regarding system changes and repairs to EMS systems.
ANSWER:
Another service that is available is hot and cold call response. With this we receive a call from your customer stating that a specific area is hot/cold. We call up the system and adjust the set point for the area or the AHU controlling the area and alleviate your customer comfort complaint. If we find that the area in question has a mechanical problem we will issue a service call and send a technician.
36. List the reporting capabilities your company has for EMS system parameters.
ANSWER:
The automation system can generate a number of reports. Any point that is monitored on the EMS system can be added to a report. Reports can be set up to save automatically. On sites where chillers are present we have the ability to set up a report that will record pertinent data on the chiller once a minute and when the chiller trips on a manual reset the report will stop. This gives a recorded history of what the chiller was doing 30 minutes prior to the manual reset. This information will help the technician to determine the cause of the diagnostic.
37. Respondents must be able to maintain and repair/replace EMS in-house (self perform) to include monitoring, alarm resolution, repairs and adjustments on all government entities. Describe, in general, your ability to accomplish this.
ANSWER:
We have a staff of EMS Technicians that have been factory trained on Trane controls and are fully capable of maintaining, repairing, or replacing any and all Trane controls.
They are proficient at diagnosing problems and setting up trends or reports to facilitate the diagnosis process. Their knowledge in Trane controls allows them to work on other vendors control systems.

38. Describe your process for trouble shooting a problem (HVAC, lighting, etc.) at a site with an EMS system. How does repair get escalated for service?
ANSWER:
Initially, we assume this site is being monitored. The monitoring center providing they receive an alarm would begin the process to trouble shoot and reset the system if possible. If the system cannot be reset, the Project Manager would be contacted. The
Project Manager would then contact the facility to assess the situation and determine it’s an emergency service or if next day service would be appropriate.
39. List the total dollar volume your company completes in HVAC retrofits annually.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
$3,424,048
Zone 2 Dallas
$16 MM
Zone 3 San Antonio
$125,000
Zone 4 Shreveport
$1.8 MM
Zone 5 El Paso
$1.5 MM
Zone 6 Arizona
$1.3 Million
Zone 7 Arkansas
$6.5 MM
Zone 8 New Mexico
$5 Million
Zone 9 Oklahoma
$1.5 Million
Zone 10 Wichita

$2MM
Zone 11 Kansas City
$1.1 MM
Zone 12 Philadelphia
$1.5 MM
Zone 14 Portland
$1.2MM
Zone 15 Washington
$15 MM
Zone 16 San Francisco
Our turnkey contracting group performs between $5 and $9 million dollars per year in
HVAC equipment replacements.
Zone 17 Wilmington
$1.5 MM
Zone 18 Gulf States
$4 MM
Zone 19 Des Moines
$500,000
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
$5 MM
Zone 21 Las Vegas
$2.5 MM
Zone 22 Greensboro
$5 MM
Zone 23 Virginia
$25 MM

Zone 24 Flint
$5 MM
Zone 25 Charlotte
$2 MM
Zone 26 Sacramento
$6 MM
Zone 27 Atlanta
$2 MM
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
40. List the other functions your company can provide regarding unit replacement to offer a turnkey project (ex. electrical, sheet metal work, EMS system connection and programming, etc.)
ANSWER:
Trane has the capability to provide and coordinate turnkey replacements of HVAC equipment on a nationwide basis. Many of the Trane service providers have many, if not all, of the skill sets necessary to perform a turnkey replacement installation. Where the skill sets are not in house, local strategic partner relationships are established to provide the turnkey capability to perform complete retrofits
41. Describe your company capabilities regarding HVAC system inspections and for energy upgrades and equipment repair/replacement.
ANSWER:
This is a core competency of Trane . Trane utilizes Graduate Engineers, Certified
Energy Engineers, Field Service Technicians and other Trane resources to provide the survey analysis and design evaluations. Every office has Trane Sales Engineers that are graduate engineers with concentrated training in HVAC design and applications. We maintain numerous site survey forms that can be utilized to address TCPN’s customers’ survey requirements. In addition, Trane has developed sophisticated energy analysis tools such as TRACE 700 and System Analyzer that can readily analyze paybacks and energy savings by modeling existing buildings.
42. Explain how your company evaluates unit replacements in determining when to repair vs. replace and when replacements are required. How does your company evaluate the proper tonnage, unit/system type, and controls?
ANSWER:

Zone 1 Houston
A dedicated Project Manager will review all service repairs in excess of $500 (or the limit your customer establishes). The Project Managers have extensive experience in contracting and service maintenance and are well qualified to “flag” instances where equipment replacement may be economically justified. Furthermore, the Project
Manager will rely on the ComfortSite database to review equipment repair history when making repair/replace decisions. Where necessary, Trane will employ resources such as Trane Load Express and System Analyzer in order to evaluate required cooling/heating loads or to compare system alternatives.
Zone 2 Dallas
Whenever permissible, account managers are engaged with owners to help assist in the decision process. Analytical tools are employed to evaluate repair costs, operating costs, replacement costs and life cycle analysis. The evaluations are conducted on a project by project basis.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Look at existing equipment and determine condtion and age. Do a quick cost of operation per unit considering overall factors: age, condition, type refrigerant, annual repair cost including # of calls for unit not working properly and then calculate new unit, more efficient, 410A, warranty, and rebates. Basically D/x 10 - 15 years you should be looking at replacing. Second question is engineer first for load and tonnage if not available use like for like replacement unless space requirement has changed. Older
Building Controls working do not change because savings will not justify but if units are running 24/7 need to look at upgrading controls.
Zone 4 Shreveport
We evaluate the cost of repair compared the unit's condition and service life, efficiency, and performed. If the cost/ benefit for replacement is justified, we will propose a replacement for consideration. The replacement unit, most often, conforms to the previous tonnage, and unit/system type because that is usually the most cost effective solution. We propose state of the art controls to improve operating efficiency.
Zone 5 El Paso
We utilize several value and engineering based tools to evaluate the ROI on both options of repair or replacement of equipment and/or systems. Depending on the size ad complexity of the job we will walk the job site or can do it by just having the equipment model and serial numbers along with run times and any other pertinent information. We have selection programs around selecting the proper piece of equipment for direct replacement but we also utilize computer programs to size the systems to any changes in the building since original design.
Zone 6 Arizona
See answer to Zone 5

Zone 7 Arkansas
Depending upon the customers’ wants and needs and financial position, a plan is developed for equipment and system replacement. Maintenance history, equipment age, comfort, use, staff capabilities and budget are some of the considerations.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer to Zone 5
Zone 9 Oklahoma
Technician contacts Existing Building Sales (EBS) account manager and gives him the diagnosis information. Account manager is then responsible for sizing, engineering and proposal of unit replacements.
Zone 10 Wichita
There is a lot of variables that go into this equation. We work with the customer to give them all the different solutions that meet their needs. Usually it comes down to the budget. It depends on if they want to replace it versus fix it, warranty and extended warranty figure in as well. We give them all the facts, the pro’s and cons on either fix or replace and help them in the decision that meets their needs, for the short or long term.
Zone 11 Kansas City
Account Managers and Service Technicians use the following factors to determine when to repair or replace: Equipment age, deterioration, cost benefit, energy efficiency,
Internal Rate of Return, Life Cycle Payback, and energy rebate availability. Trane evaluates the proper tonnage, unit/system type and controls based the following factors:
Building type, construction, load analysis, usage, climate zone, personnel, maintenance capabilities, and finances.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
The decision is best made by informed clients. On all major repairs to equipment, the client is offered an alternative quote for a replacement unit. This quote includes an energy cost assessment to enable payback analysis and an informed choice.
Zone 13 Tennessee
The repair vs. replace decision is based on actual customer input and an assessment of customer needs. Typically, any repair that exceeds 60% of the replacement costs should be evaluated against replacement costs. In some cases, it may be in the customer’s best interest to repair vs. replace or vice versa.
Facility design, total life cycle costs, and energy usage are additional factors that should be considered when weighing repair vs. replace options. These factors along with the actual costs are reviewed with the customer in order to determine the best path/best fit for a particular customer’s need.

In terms of proper tonnage, unit system type & controls, we evaluate the customers’ needs by analyzing current system design, customer specifications, engineering standards, life cycle costs, first costs, heat load sources, air quality requirements, energy usage requirements, and local codes and standards to determine our best option or options for the customer. We typically review these options with the customer in order to determine their preferences and rank the importance of each decision factor.
Options are discussed with the customer in order to make sure they understand the variables involved and the impact that one variable may have on the others. (First cost vs. life cycle costs for instance – First costs may limit unit options but generate higher life cycle costs)
Zone 14 Portland
TraneOregon has a dedicated, experienced sales engineer that is responsible for working with our local customers to evaluate their entire system needs and options, including replacement and repair. He evaluates the unit on dollar value of repair, versus life of equipment and cost of replacement. These options also can include a detailed energy study that TraneOregon can provide to our customers.
Zone 15 Washington
We look at all larger repairs over a few thousand dollars or over 50% of a new replacement units cost and consider new vs. repair. We bring the owner or manager of the property into the decision making process. Many other factors play into unit repair or replacement. Just a few of the criteria we consider are:
Age of the equipment.
Dollar amount
Energy efficiency of old vs. new
Potential energy savings and rebate dollars
Capacity vs. load
Customer input or direction
Difficulty of repairs vs. difficulty of replacement/Total installed cost
Reliability of old vs. new
Degradation of non-maintainable components like drain pans and heat exchangers
Ability to warrant unit or replacement parts
Proper tonnage is determined many ways customer interview, load calculations, engineering study, future use plans.
Zone 16 San Francisco
This is a complex question with lots of variables. Typically a survey will be performed of the equipment to determine the state of all major components. The age of the equipment will be compared to the equipment life expectancy tables that ASHRAE publishes. We will determine if there is a viable upgrade path such as the Trane
R’Newal program and the multitude of Trane chiller upgrades. Then with all of this information, we will work with the customer to develop a repair/replacement plan.
Zone 17 Wilmington
It depends on many factors:

•
Efficiency and age of existing equipment
•
Cost of new equipment less installation versus repair.
•
History of repairs
•
Is equipment serving a critical area that can’t be down
•
Can a rental give us time to replace
•
Does the customer have different monies for repairs and replacements
•
How does your company evaluate the proper tonnage, unit/system type, and controls?
•
Our Energy Services Group will evaluate the application and develop a scope addressing the solution based on the current use and customers input.
Zone 18 Gulf States
System replacement is evaluated based on the ratio of repair cost:replacement cost and life cycle evaluation. The systems salesperson on the project develops the appropriate design.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Each project is considered individually, looking at the cost of repair and replacement, as well as the operational costs differences (energy costs, maintenance costs, etc.) to evaluate the best course of action. This information is presented to the owner for discussion and decision. For complex turnkey solutions, we partner with local contractors and engineering firms to do detailed engineering analysis on the application to calculate required capacities, as well evaluating systems / controls design.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
If a unit has experienced a major component failure (compressor, heat exchanger, tube failure etc) and is at or close to the expected life, a cost versus replacement proposal is generally presented to the customer. A further evaluation may be completed that includes potential energy savings, utility rebates and other factors into consideration.
The attached ASHRAE Expected Service Life is usually included in the information presented to the customer. A recommendation may be included to possibly change the capacity (tonnage) based upon input from the customer, log sheets, consulting engineer, etc. Trane utilizes software programs that can calculate the necessary loads for an application and make the recommendation to keep the same capacity or possibly change to a smaller or larger unit. A recommendation may include adding the unit to the existing building control system or installing a control system for the building. At times, a programmable set back thermostat is recommended.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane is involved in the evaluation of existing rooftop air conditioners in many ways. We receive direct calls from customers asking for their units to be replaced. We received direct calls from customers asking for their units to be repaired. We also have a service agreement book of business in which we regularly view rooftop equipment and make judgments on their needs to maintain efficient operational performance.

Typically a customer will receive options from our company. One option would be the price to repair the equipment. Depending on their current needs (critical use area served by equipment, lead time of new equipment, access space for replacement, etc…), this may be the best choice. Another option would be a price along with a return on investment, or payback, for choosing replacement. Some customers require quicker payback periods than others. If the existing unit is more than ten years old, experiences a compressor failure, and the current technology is at least 2 EER better than the existing, then replacement may be the best alternative.
Zone 22 Greensboro
We ascertain a full history of the unit(s); items such as the model number, serial number, original sales order, service history, age, refrigerant used, etc. and do a work up on repair vs. replacement cost. The owner is then shown the results and options plus the energy and rebate aspects.
Zone 23 Virginia
The Virginia district has a contracting group called ERG the "Engineered Replacement
Group" that handles these types of solutions. When we recognize an area of focus we utilize a specialized team to evaluate the problem and engineer a solution that best matches the specific need of the customer. This is when we do a system analysis and offer multiple solutions that fit within the needs of the customer.
Zone 24 Flint
Our company looks at equipment type, equipment load, repair costs, replacement costs, energy savings, installed cost and equipment life. We use these figures for our financial analysis.
We rely strongly on our new equipment sales engineers for system sizing , the controls dept. for their expertise in using the right controls, and the overall pricing of the project versus the repairs and what type of a life expectancy will the equipment provide.
Zone 25 Charlotte:
See answer for Zone 13
Zone 26 Sacramento
Sacramento evaluates repair vs replace scenarios on a case-by-case basis. The account manager/ team will utilize in house engineers, solicit service technician advise and also energy analysis tools. We have all the expertise in house to engineer the replacement including all design work.
Zone 27 Atlanta:
See answer for Zone 13
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.

43. Explain how your company would propose a planned unit replacement program including how units would be identified for replacement and how pricing would be addressed.
ANSWER:
Based on ongoing discussions with TCPN’s customers’ facilities staff, we would jointly develop a matrix for evaluating the existing inventory of equipment. By doing an assessment with Service Technicians we would identify units that have exceeded their economic lifecycle. The matrix would consider variables such as equipment age vs.
ASHRAE recommended economic life, lease-end dates where applicable; repair costing history and operational critical units.
Once identified, Trane would propose a phased replacement program using TCPN contract equipment discounts and labor rates with RS Means labor hours. If budget dollars are not available, financing and lease options would also be proposed through
Government Capital (our financing partner). Leases can be structured as capital leases or off-balance sheet operating leases depending on the customer’s financial abilities and desires.
44. Describe your company’s startup and system checkout responsibilities
ANSWER:
Factory-authorized technicians perform equipment startups. A startup consists of a technician visiting the jobsite, checking all the unit installation requirements as well as unit operation. The unit is then started and the technician will perform a full systems check as well as documenting unit operation. Operational log sheets will be filled out and signed by an owner representative. The units startup paperwork is sent to the factory to activate warranty coverage.
45. Describe your company’s post-installation and warranty support
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane’ s Service and Maintenance Department is second to none. Trane provides ongoing service and maintenance with over 2,500 highly trained, in-house, truck-based technicians. This is a substantial differentiator for Trane in the contracting market place because it is long after the installation phase is completed that actual energy savings are realized. It is expert service and maintenance that ensures the expected savings come about.
Trane technicians can support TCPN’s customers in whatever ways they wish, either as extensions of their facilities department, or as a full outsourced resource. Our district offices have service teams that have the factory training, tools and technical information to ensure they are well qualified to perform all advanced service activities. Trane will work closely with government entities to customize an approach to service and maintenance that can be provided by the customer’s in-house personnel, or third party contractors as necessary to meet the requirements of the equipment and systems installed as a part of the program. He customer’s in-house personnel can conduct as much of the maintenance as desired and Trane will gladly provide training on an ongoing basis to ensure that skills align with programmed maintenance needs.

To keep their buildings running reliably and efficiently throughout their life cycle, Trane offers a range of services unmatched by any other company, including maintenance and repair, energy services, contingency and emergency planning, and continual technology improvements.
Known for our factory-trained maintenance and repair expertise, our personnel use their thorough understanding of industry technology to address each customer's unique needs. We offer maintenance and repair services for not only Trane equipment, but all types of HVAC comfort and process systems. Services range from routine equipment inspections to complete system overhaul. Our radio-dispatched personnel are strategically located throughout the United States such that they can quickly and efficiently respond to our customer needs.
Regular maintenance is important to maintain the reliability and original operating efficiency of your customer’s building systems. This is especially true in a performance contracting / comprehensive energy services relationship where the outcomes of the systems installed (both financial and operational) are central to the fundamental purpose of the program. In other words, ongoing and regular maintenance of the systems and components installed as a part of this program will ensure both optimal indoor environments and efficient operation for the long term. Trane is uniquely organized to support government entities for the length of the program.
Commercial HVAC Building Services
Trane Building Services helps government entities to their HVAC investment and facility management through high performance building design and the selection of systems, operating conditions, maintenance, and upgrade procedures throughout the life of the building. Trane Building Services provide solutions to environmental control and facility management problems for our customers with a building-wide solutions focus.
Optimizing HVAC System
To help you ensure that the government entities’ new system is properly installed and operating at maximum efficiency during the critical first years of operations, Trane
Building Services provides startup services with comprehensive HVAC Startup Services and HVAC warranty service agreements.
HVAC warranty service agreements
Trane provides a variety of extended warranties to allow customers another opportunity to manage their ongoing costs of operations. The nature of Trane HVAC equipment, and truly any mechanical equipment, means that it requires service as it operates. While they receive a standard parts warranty as the original purchaser, our extended warranties help them project their costs and protect their business against increases in material and/or labor costs.
Operating and Maintaining Building
Trane offers HVAC unit repair services that assure continued efficient operation of equipment. Trane can also provide proactive HVAC service plans with scheduled service, select service, and extended warranties to help reduce unplanned repair expenses and to reduce the risk of catastrophic system failure.
Upgrade and Improve Existing System

Compressor and control renewal options offered by Trane Building Services can help bring older chiller systems up to current standards. You can also upgrade chillers with the latest Trane HVAC upgrades. Add value to buildings by addressing energy management, environmental impact, compliance issues, and building lifetime planning through commercial HVAC contracting services and solutions. For temporary or special occasion cooling needs, Trane Building Services provides temporary chillers and rental options. We can also set up cooling contingency plans as part of an overall emergency preparedness plans for scheduled or emergency outages in buildings.
Building Services Commitment
The service professionals of Trane Building Services are committed to ensuring the equipment functions at its highest level of efficiency. With over a century of experience in the industry, Trane Building Services has a clear understanding of how facility management needs change as business and as technology changes. You can always trust Trane Building Services to deliver on promises and provide the highest level of industry knowledge and service for the government entities’ equipment.
First year parts and labor warranty support is offered by the Trane service group on
Centrifugal chillers and water-cooled Rotary Chillers. All other equipment has a oneyear parts warranty (unless extended warranties are purchased) and a labor warranty by
Trane as part of the standard contract terms with TCPN. Optional extended parts and labor warranties are offered and must be purchased prior to the units being started.
A customer will receive a standard 12/18 warranty on new equipment (basically a parts only warranty). The Terms and Conditions for this policy are in Appendix 4.
Government entities can buy two different types of warranties thru Trane after the equipment has been shipped:
Option 1: EXTENDED SERVICE WARRANTY
•
Warranty: All parts and labor warranty from Trane factory.
•
Requirements: Trane Affiliated Service Company must do a minimum of four inspections.
•
Eligible equipment: Trane equipment that is still at least 2 months within standard
12/18 warranty with no major failures. Warranty must be purchased within 6 months of startup but not later than 16 months from shipment
•
Labor (and refrigerant) warranties must be purchased prior to initial unit startup
Option 2: EXTENDED SERVICE WARRANTY- EXPANDED
•
Warranty: Parts warranty from Trane factory and Labor warranty from Trane
Affiliated Service Company (good for the 2nd-5th year or 6th-10th year extended warranties).
•
Requirements: Trane Affiliated Service Company must do a minimum of six inspections.
•
Eligible equipment: Trane equipment that is either just out of the standard 12/18 month warranty OR will soon be out of an extended warranty (for example 2nd-
5th year extended parts warranty). Warranty must be purchased within 6 months of startup but not later than 16 months from shipment
•
Labor (and refrigerant) warranties must be purchased prior to initial unit startup
Hussmann

Hussmann warranty varies by product line. A complete schedule of our warranty coverage can be seen on Appendix #4. Our products carry a 1 year parts and labor warranty and an extended four years on the original compressor ( part only). Most other products are 1 year parts. We support our warranty nationally thru our factory service branches and a network of contract service agents.
46. Describe your company’s steps for system analysis.
ANSWER:
Critical to designing the right HVAC system is the initial analysis that ensures a basis for system and equipment combinations and how they will perform together. The basic steps during the analysis phase are to 1) Develop the design criteria and determine relative importance of each; 2) Determine potential HVAC alternatives; 3) Performance modeling and comparisons. Key elements to this analysis are weather information, building type/usage, system integration, equipment, utilities, and life-cycle equipment costs. Each of these components will factor into various reports (Design, Systems,
Energy, Economics) which are utilized for design comparisons.
47. Provide the procedure on how your company determines the system design.
ANSWER:
Trane has been an innovator in HVAC system design. TRACE® became the first industry computer program of its type to complete load, system, energy and economic modeling. Trane’ s EarthWise™ System is a design philosophy and set of tools that reduces first cost, lowers operating costs, and is substantially quieter than traditional applied systems. Central characteristics of this design are low flow, low temperature, and high efficiency for waterside systems, along with optimized control algorithms for sustained performance.
EarthWise™ is the process of designing the optimum HVAC system – a system that is not only good for our customers like your customer, but also one that is inherently more environmentally friendly! From your customer’s perspective, this design concept reduces the installed system first cost, delivers lower on-going operating costs, and delivers enhanced comfort and reliability over traditional system designs. Key chiller strategies that have significant cost saving possibilities include reduced condenser design flow rates, reduced HVAC flow rate and temperature, and control condenser water temperature. Key DX strategies include reduced leaving air temperatures and demand optimization controls.
Again, Trane ’s design team utilizes these sophisticated modeling programs and other data to ensure a cost effect HVAC system that meets your customer’s performance criteria.
48. Describe what project scheduling tools your company use to track projects during construction
ANSWER:

Trane
SureTrak Project Management Software is the current selection of Trane.
With
SureTrak, you can create schedules graphically, and point and click to create relationships between activities. Updates are fast; SureTrak provides a graphical to-do list to help you record progress. No matter how you decide to look at your project,
SureTrak can provide the new view you need instantly. Data pivoting lets you see your project from every prospective, beyond outlining and Work Breakdown Structures. It allows you to update, analyze and forecast easily and has streamlined analysis, web reporting and graphics.
Zone 1 Houston
Microsoft Project Software is the current selection of Hunton Trane Services . With
Microsoft Project, you can create schedules graphically, and point and click to create relationships between activities. Updates are fast; Microsoft Project provides a graphical to-do list to help you record progress. No matter how you decide to look at your project,
Microsoft Project can provide the new view you need instantly. Data pivoting lets you see your project from every perspective, beyond outlining and Work Breakdown
Structures. It allows you to update, analyze and forecast easily and has streamlined analysis, web reporting and graphics.
Zone 2 Dallas
See answer for Trane for Zone 2
Zone 3 San Antonio
See answer for Trane for Zone 3
Zone 4 Shreveport
See answer for Trane for Zone 4
Zone 5 El Paso
See answer for Trane for Zone 5
Zone 6 Arizona
See answer for Trane for Zone 6
Zone 7 Arkansas
Trane Arkansas project managers utilize Microsoft Project for all project scheduling
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer for Trane for Zone 8
Zone 9 Oklahoma

See answer for Trane for Zone 9
Zone 10 Wichita
We have our own system that we use to track our projects.
Zone 11 Kansas City
See answer for Trane for Zone 11
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Tozour-Trane manages its service business through a system called, Dispatch-Me-Now.
It is a wireless, web-based system that tracks all service contract obligations, quoted work and emergency service. All service routines performed (including refrigerant used) are documented in the system and transmitted to clients electronically. The service records are maintained in a Tozour-Trane secure server and are accessible via a password protected service website.
The project work like retrofits and Controls projects are controlled using Microsoft
Projects software. This enables multiple networked project participants to see each other’s commitments and performance.
Zone 13 Tennessee
See answer for Trane for Zone 13
Zone 14 Portland
See answer for Trane for Zone 14
Zone 15 Washington
See answer for Trane for Zone 15
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Trane Service (PCTS) utilizes Microsoft Project to schedule and track jobs.
We also use Primavera SureTrack on some jobs, depending on the customers’ needs.
Internally all work, time, billing. Etc., is tracked on our office management system, Time
Management Systems (TMS).
Zone 17 Wilmington
SureTrak Project Management Software is the current selection of Seiberlich Trane
Zone 18 Gulf South
See answer for Trane for Zone 18

Zone 19 Des Moines
We use Microsoft Project for our Project Management software.
Microsoft Project (or MSP) is a project management software program developed and sold by Microsoft which is designed to assist project managers in developing plans, assigning resources to tasks, tracking progress, managing budgets and analyzing workloads. The application creates critical path schedules which can be resource leveled, and chains are visualized in a Gantt chart. Additionally, Project can recognize different classes of users, and objects such as calendars, views, tables, filters and fields are stored in an enterprise global which is shared by all users.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
See answer for Trane for Zone 20
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane does not have a formal project scheduling tool at this time. However, we are investigating utilizing SureTrak in the future.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Microsoft Solomon paired with Microsoft Project is the current project management software of choice for Brady Services . Real time job cost data is smoothly and easily integrated with resource projections to not only provide us with up to estimated vs. actual job cost information, but it allows us to project our future resource needs in order to make wiser bidding decisions and anticipate our manpower needs
Zone 23 Virginia
See answer for Trane for Zone 23
Zone 24 Flint
We use Microsoft Projects
Zone 25 Charlotte
See answer for Trane for Zone 25
Zone 26 Sacramento
See answer for Trane for Zone 26
Zone 27 Atlanta
See answer for Trane for Zone 27

Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
On longer term installation projects Hussmann uses Microsoft Project Pro to track progress of the project.
49. How does your company make the proper equipment selection on a turnkey or energy retrofit contract project?
ANSWER:
Trane is about much more than heating and cooling. Using a systematic approach, Trane examines all forms of energy consumption in new and existing facilities to create high performance buildings: HVAC, mechanical, plumbing, lighting and more. We take into consideration not only the type of systems we offer ourselves, but those offered by other suppliers as well. To maximize the environmental improvements and cost benefits, all of these key systems must be considered starting at the beginning of the planning process.
The first step is a thorough analysis of the organization’s buildings. A comprehensive preliminary study may be conducted to help the customer’s leadership teams identify and prioritize opportunities to improve key outcomes and reduce cost. A development study may then be conducted to analyze the technical opportunities. The resulting data guides the Trane proposal for improvements. Trane advisors devise a unique plan—substantiated by predictive modeling—to optimize conditions within the various building spaces.
During a preliminary audit by Trane , the goal is to understand the opportunities that exist for the organization to improve building performance based on the organizational goals as well as infrastructure needs. We search for potential areas of improvement that can lead to cost savings and improved environmental conditions. During the preliminary study, Trane conducts an initial energy performance analysis of each building and its operating costs, in which we learn about:
•
Current cost of operation
•
Current building utilization vs. original design intent
•
Infrastructure issues
•
Financial evaluation criteria
After gathering this information, Trane conducts a preliminary analysis of the operation and usage of the buildings. Each facility is reviewed for its use of electricity, gas, water and other utilities. We identify any unusual trends in consumption, demand, cost or rates and compare current usage with data from other facilities that are similar in size, purpose and location. The objective of this study is to identify areas where Trane can implement improvements that will yield the greatest benefits.
A lifecycle cost analysis enables the organization to make fact-based decisions regarding which steps to implement first—and which to save for later—to initiate a sustainable and scalable improvement plan that, moving forward, is wholly or substantially self funding.
Finally, the plan is implemented by Trane professionals.
Throughout the entire process, Trane works in concert with the organization to deliver solutions that align with its goals and objectives.

50. Describe your company’s performance maintenance system on turnkey projects.
ANSWER:
After we complete the upgrades and construction for a Turnkey Contracting Services project, Trane will deliver the documentation needed to keep the investment working properly. We will provide one preliminary copy of as-built drawings—floor plans showing the actual building layouts—and an advance copy of the Operations & Maintenance
(O&M) manual. Once these deliverables are reviewed and approved, Trane will submit two copies of final O&M documents, including:
•
As-built system or installation drawings (or both)
•
Equipment submittals
•
Service and maintenance procedure manuals
•
User and technical manuals
The more knowledgeable your staff members are about system concepts and equipment, the more beneficial these systems will be—and the better your building systems will perform.
O&M Summary
Trane eliminates confusion and complexity about who is responsible for maintenance, repair and monitoring by clearly defining in the contract which responsibilities belong to
Trane and which rest with the customer. As a large global company, we have the leverage to keep costs down for replacement parts—our own and those of other manufacturers. Our integrated approach means that Trane engineers and technicians are trained to work with many brands of equipment, and our extensive network ensures that we have resources close to your building.
At the same time, we have local expertise throughout the country – people who understand the climate, economy, utilities and issues your organization faces. They are your most valuable advisors.
Long-Term Operations and Maintenance Support
Upgraded building systems are meant to save money on energy and cost less to maintain for many, many years. Trane stands by customers to help keep systems working at top efficiency, reduce the chances of equipment failure, and give facilities management the expertise to reach new levels of efficiency. Trane offers a variety of ongoing support opportunities, including training in the optimal operation of HVAC systems. Trane can also provide remote systems monitoring and performance reporting.
Our Commitment to LEED
Trane offers solutions that contribute points toward Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design (LEED®) building certification requirements under the categories of Energy & Atmosphere and Indoor Environmental Quality.
Trane is a corporate member of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC), and our employees participate in a number Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
(LEED®) committees. In addition to a strong corporate commitment, local Trane sales offices are also aligned with local USGB chapters to better service building owners.

Currently, over 800 Trane employees have earned LEED certification, and the number continues to rise.
In 2010, the Trane St. Paul, Minn., facility was awarded LEED Gold Certification for
Existing Buildings. The Trane San Antonio regional office has been certified as LEED
Silver under the LEED Commercial Interior Program. Several additional Trane buildings are registered and getting ready for LEED certification.
In addition, Trane is now considered a USGBC Education Provider. Trane courses approved by the USGBC can count toward GBCI Continuing Education (CE) hours for
LEED Accredited Professionals and LEED Green Associates.
51. Describe how your company handles site development and project permitting process.
ANSWER:
Another specific task that requires in depth knowledge of the local conditions is the approach to site development and project permitting process. Trane is responsible for preparing and pursuing final issuance of permits from the appropriate regulatory agency.
This is a routine function of our team for design and construction related permits. There are three general phases of project permitting that relate to the commencement of site work and construction and construction activities, building construction activities, and facility occupancy and equipment operations approvals.
The first phase of permitting involves your customer and the state’s Department of
Environmental Protection. The second phase of permitting includes review and approval from your customer and Fire Marshal’s Office. The final phase of permitting involves the
US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for facility operation and equipment operation. The project will require the review and approval of the customer’s Design
Review Committee.
The required approvals for beginning site work and construction activities include the
City Public Works Department Engineering Plan Review. Review and approval will be required for storm water management issues. Also during this phase, the US
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) will review water and sanitary sewer utilities for the project. Prior to commencement of site work, the National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination System (NPDES) Notice of Intent (NOI) to construct will need to be submitted to US EPA.
Building related approvals include the review and approval of the City Building Division and the City Fire Marshal’s Office. The City Building Division will issue the building permit for the project, and the Fire Marshal will review fire protection and life safety issues.
There are regulatory activities specifically related to the operational aspects of a proposed facility. Air emissions from facility operations may require an air quality permit from the City Regulatory and Environmental Services Department

52. Describe your company’s design-build quality control guidelines for design, construction and review on a turnkey or energy retrofit contract project.
ANSWER:
Today’s Trane is about much more than heating and cooling. Using a systematic approach, Trane examines all forms of energy consumption in new and existing facilities to create high performance buildings: HVAC, mechanical, plumbing, lighting and more.
We take into consideration not only the type of systems we offer ourselves, but those offered by other suppliers as well. To maximize the environmental improvements and cost benefits, all of these key systems must be considered starting at the beginning of the planning process.
The first step is a thorough analysis of the organization’s buildings. A comprehensive preliminary study may be conducted to help the customer’s leadership teams identify and prioritize opportunities to improve key outcomes and reduce cost. A development study may then be conducted to analyze the technical opportunities. The resulting data guides the Trane proposal for improvements. Trane advisors devise a unique plan – substantiated by predictive modeling – to optimize conditions within the various building spaces.
A lifecycle cost analysis enables the organization to make fact-based decisions regarding which steps to implement first – and which to save for later – to initiate a sustainable and scalable improvement plan that, moving forward, is wholly or substantially self funding. Finally, the plan is implemented by Trane professionals.
Throughout the entire process, Trane works in a partnership with the organization to deliver solutions that align with its goals and objectives.
Team Approach
Trane assembles teams of professionals with specialized expertise for Turnkey
Contracting Services projects. Teams blend the deep engineering resources of Trane with local expertise delivered through field offices and pre-qualified subcontractors.
Subcontract Management
Trane methodically selects experienced subcontractors. Following selection, Trane monitors their performance and maintains project controls to ensure sub-contractors adhere to the same high standards as we do. Weekly progress reviews promote timely, safe, high-quality and cost-effective project execution.
Environmental, Health and Safety
Trane employees and our on-site contractors are responsible for integrating sound
Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) practices into their everyday activities, and for acting in a manner that is protective of the environment and human health and safety.
We comply with or exceed requirements of global, national, state and local statutes, regulations and standards.
Responsible Contractor Selection
Trane maintains a vibrant and diverse business community, based on subcontractor relationships with minority-owned Small Business Enterprises (SBEs), Historically
Underutilized Business Zone Small Businesses (HZSBs), Small Disadvantaged

Businesses (SDBs), Women-Owned Small Businesses (WOSBs), Veteran-Owned Small
Businesses (VOSBs) and Service Disabled Veteran-Owned Small Businesses
(SDVOSBs).
During a preliminary audit by Trane , the goal is to understand the opportunities that exist for your organization to improve building performance based on your organizational goals as well as your infrastructure needs. We search for potential areas of improvement that can lead to cost savings and improved environmental conditions. During the preliminary study, Trane conducts an initial energy performance analysis of each building and its operating costs, in which we learn about:
•
Current costs of operation
•
Current building utilization vs. original design intent
•
Infrastructure issues
•
Financial evaluation criteria
After gathering this information, Trane conducts a preliminary analysis of the operation and usage of your buildings. Each facility is reviewed for its use of electricity, gas, water and other utilities. We identify any unusual trends in consumption, demand, cost or rates and compare current usage with data from other facilities that are similar in size, purpose and location. The objective of this study is to identify areas where Trane can implement improvements that will yield the greatest benefits.
A collaborative approach
Every Turnkey Contracting Services project begins with an in-depth conversation. We take time to understand the mission-level goals of your organization. Struggling to reduce overall operational costs? A broad upgrade of all buildings may help achieve that objective. How Trane proceeds depends on the overall financial, operational and performance outlook of your organization.
Site review
Trane technical representatives will study building plans and walk through your buildings. Age, structure and future use of individual buildings are identified, as well as potential cost savings and areas of risk. Serving in a consultative role, Trane will share everything we learn from this research with you, and the information will be used in calculating preliminary savings estimates. The resulting project plan will recommend ways to make necessary capital improvements, based on your financial evaluation criteria and leveraging potential energy and operational savings.
Our specific recommendations will clearly demonstrate opportunities to improve building performance and reduce costs. At Trane , the objective is to become your advisor in all matters relating to advanced energy efficiency and financially sound infrastructure management.
Turnkey analysis
Trane examines all forms of energy consumption in existing buildings: heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC), mechanical, plumbing, lighting and more. We take into consideration not only the type of systems we offer ourselves, but those offered by other suppliers, as well. To maximize both the environmental and cost benefits, all of

these key systems must be considered together, starting at the beginning of the planning process.
Performance auditing
The next step is to conduct a thorough audit of each building to establish baselines, determine project scope and forecast results. As part of the audit, Trane compares the current performance of your buildings against a large industry database of similar facilities using a proprietary analysis tool called TRACE™ 700.
The preliminary audit process provides practical information that supports the decision process. For example, all models are calibrated to your actual, current utility rates.
Analysis is dynamic, meaning Trane can evaluate the many interrelated effects of complex building upgrade projects.
Phase 1: Project Definition
Audit Team formation and objectives definition
Representatives from Trane and the customer organization come together to conduct the preliminary opportunity analysis. Generally, team members from the organization represent the interests of operations or facilities management and finance. This joint team is charged with establishing the desired goals and outcomes of the projects. Team members work together to collect baseline information and define the contract’s technical and financial objectives.
Preliminary Audit
A preliminary audit allows the team to determine potential cost savings related to energy, water, and wastewater use, as well as overall building systems operations and maintenance. The audit studies energy use, comfort requirements, environmental performance and operating efficiency. This initial study defines the savings potential of the project, and provides an estimate of the costs to undertake recommended savings measures. The information developed during this initial phase should provide enough data for us to make an informed decision together regarding which energy conservation measures (ECMs) should be researched further in more advanced audit phases.
Preliminary Project Verification
The initial phase of project development involves frequent team meetings and communications to accurately define and confirm the project’s scope and direction.
Team members from Trane will seek verification and agreement in key areas: general direction and goals of the project; the scope of Energy Conservation Measures (ECMs) and savings strategies; baseline utility and operating cost profiles and the funding and financial approach.
Preliminary Report/Proposal
Based on the audit findings, Trane prepares practical documentation describing the proposed deliverables. The preliminary project proposal documentation is provided in hard copy or electronic form.
Phase 2: Development study
Once Trane receives a letter of commitment from the customer organization, the
Development Study and analysis begin. Working with the organization, Trane uses the

TRACE™ 700 and Energy Analyzer™ programs to create complete building surveys and analysis, and then delivers the final turnkey project proposal.
A primary focus for Trane team members will be to investigate retrofit options.
Information analyzed in this phase includes:
•
Data loggers and meters for historical analysis and energy consumption modeling
•
Hours of operation to verify when building equipment is actually running
•
Lighting systems, including quantities, wattages and lighting system types
•
Building occupancy statistics to determine actual rather than theoretical usage
•
Operation and maintenance needs for all building equipment, including controls
•
Utility bills for identifying trends in resource consumption
•
Occupant surveys regarding the facilities and indoor environments
The joint team brings together all the information that has been gathered and begins to evaluate and design new energy conservation measures (ECMs) and related work.
Team objectives during this stage include validating and expanding on the preliminary survey scope, developing designs, and gathering detailed building and equipment information.
Consulting Engineer
In the Development Study phase, Trane may bring in a third-party consulting engineer, registered to provide independent professional engineering services, and licensed in the state where the building is located. Working with a third-party engineer is common practice, and Trane believes it can serve the customer’s best interest. As an outside expert, the engineer provides independent validation of the design work during the preliminary phase, and confirms the accuracy of the savings measures and estimates identified. Studies will generally include a detailed building survey, utility bill analysis, energy use analysis, report generation and technical site analysis.
53. What is your company’s design approach and philosophy for a turnkey or energy retrofit contract project?
ANSWER:
In the Development Study phase, Trane may bring in a third-party consulting engineer, registered to provide independent professional engineering services, and licensed in the state where the building is located. Working with a third-party engineer is common practice, and Trane believes it can serve the customer’s best interest. As an outside expert, the engineer provides independent validation of the design work during the preliminary phase, and confirms the accuracy of the savings measures and estimates identified. Studies will generally include a detailed building survey, utility bill analysis, energy use analysis, report generation and technical site analysis.
54. Describe your company’s construction management plan.
ANSWER:
It will be extremely important that the project team work closely with your customer’s staff throughout the entire duration of the project. The key to successful implementation

of a design/build project is to understand your customer’s expectations. The Trane
Team has combined the local knowledge with the information provided in these work products, and has developed an excellent understanding of what your customer expects for their project. Our team has delivered several design-build projects with all the requirements and objectives identified by your customer, and can deliver the same quality result for any project.
The Trane Team knows from experience that to maximize project value to your customer we must meet your customer’s “unstated expectations”, as well as the stated ones. In the design-build process, the full extent of the project is not fully defined at the proposal stage. The design-build team must work closely with your customer managers, engineers and operations staff to gain an understanding of these “unstated expectations” and to ensure that they are incorporated in the project. This requires a high degree of communication with your customer. We know that your customer desires a high level of quality in a project and wants assurances that it will be provided. We feel that our approach to this project will provide your customer with the assurances that their expectations for their project will be addressed to your satisfaction. We have been successful in delivering design/build projects to satisfied clients for hundreds of projects and feel that our approach detailed herein is proven and will be an asset to the your customer as a project moves forward to the final stages of implementation. To more fully explain our approach, we have prepared the following discussion.
A common thread throughout the management approach we use is integration and open communication and the need for teamwork. A lot of attention has been paid recently to the use of “Partnering” on projects to create this teamwork. On some projects this has taken the form of very formal programs to conduct workshops and follow-up sessions throughout the course of the project, while on others, this has been more of an informal process. Regardless of what approach is taken, it always comes down to the extreme importance of developing a team that can communicate effectively and work together for the common good of the project. This “team” must include your customer’s project staff, the regulatory agencies, the members of The Trane Team, plus major subcontractors and suppliers.
With your customer’s concurrence, we propose to use an informal partnering program to develop the teamwork necessary to support the success of a project. As you review the following management approach discussion, keep in mind that we will be developing this extended team to work together to meet their expectations for a project.
The successful implementation of a design build project requires the involvement of an experienced team of design and construction professionals. The Trane Team is staffed with an integrated team of engineers and construction managers with a tremendous depth of HVAC system design-build experience. The key components of our management of the construction and the overall project are provided in the remainder of this section.
The Trane Team recognizes the initial phases of a design-build project require careful planning to ensure the project scope, schedule and cost are clearly understood by everyone involved. Your customer will be fully involved in this effort to finalize the project’s quality, budget and schedule objectives. Flexibility in both design and construction is required to encourage creativity, ingenuity and the best total value for your customer. The planning starting point for our management team is the project’s preliminary design and a detailed CPM schedule and budget for all elements of the

design, procurement, and construction work. These tools provide the guidance the team will need to review project requirements and simultaneously design and construct the new facilities.
The CPM schedule will integrate design/ permitting /procurement / construction activities that will start with the preliminary and final design milestones and end with project startup and your customer’s staff training. The schedule will include interface points with your customer. The result of the team’s efforts on the projects, schedule, budget and requirements analysis, plus information received from equipment suppliers and input from the subcontractors, forms the basis of the design-build project plan.
We understand your customer’s desire to complete the project as quickly as possible. To accomplish this objective, an effective schedule tracking and reporting system is critical.
We propose to use SureTrak scheduling software to schedule all project work activities.
The Trane Team has been successfully scheduling and executing projects using this tool and believes it to be the right software for any project.
As previously discussed, an integrated engineering, procurement, construction, testing, and startup schedule that identifies the most efficient method for meeting the schedule requirements for a job will be developed. The project will start with a milestone schedule that will quickly evolve into a schedule that contains detailed design, permitting procurement and submittal information. As design progresses the details of the construction plan will be expanded so that all construction activities are included.
Project Controls Staff will track progress against the project schedule and budget and will advise the key managers of the status of the project versus the project plan. The
Project Director and key direct reports will meet weekly to review status and make adjustments as needed to follow the project plan. Your customer will be routinely advised of the status of the project.
The Trane Team believes strongly in bi-weekly project progress meetings with your customer for the purpose of coordination and general project review. We feel this is the best way to keep project communications active and expedite progress on a design-build project. For each meeting an agenda will be prepared by the project team to cover overall project issues such as schedule, cost, general issues, coordination, etc. as well as detailed design and construction issues. Presentations will be made to the group and input requested as appropriate. If your customer’s representatives can give direction, then work activities will proceed accordingly. If direction at a higher level is needed, a target date will be set and assignments made for seeking and acquiring that input in such a way that the project schedule can be maintained.
The agenda for these meetings will be issued in advance so that your customer will know what issues are to be discussed and can arrange for the appropriate customer’s staff to attend. The necessary key design and construction team members will be present at these meetings.
The review meetings will be one of the forums used to distribute information to your customer for review. A schedule report will be prepared and distributed at each scheduled meeting. The report will include an overview of activities completed during the previous period and activities forecasted for the upcoming period. Critical items that need the immediate attention of one or more of the project participants including your

customer or Trane will be identified and discussed to determine the appropriate plan of action.
On a monthly basis a project progress report will be generated that includes the following information:
•
Current month’s progress
•
Next month’s planned activities
•
Equipment procurement status
•
Schedule status
•
Cash flow projections
•
Issues requiring resolution
As noted above, the monthly progress report will contain a separate section dedicated to the project schedule. The schedule will identify the status of critical activities throughout the design, equipment procurement, construction and startup phases. Project schedule updates will be provided at all progress meetings and more frequent updates will be provided to your customer if required.
The format of the monthly report will be discussed in advance with your customer to ensure information is presented in a manner that is consistent with their expectations.
Detailed discussions of each category identified above will allow your customer to better understand the status of all phases of the project.
In addition to progress review meetings and reports, project communications for our project team will be expedited through the use of electronic mail. Computers with modems will be located at our field office, and at the major subcontractors’ and suppliers’ offices to allow electronic communication with all of Trane Team resources, and with your customer’s staff. These electronic links will be the most critical element in the transfer of information between the team members.
Information will be routinely distributed to the all team members, including updated schedules, cost reports, engineering status reports, equipment status reports, construction status reports, and progress reports.
One of the greatest strengths of the Trane Team is in the area of cost control and reporting. Because we have been providing design-build services to school and municipal clients for over 35 years, your customer will be the beneficiary of the experience that has been developed on these past projects.
Through cost engineering, we will provide the systems and tools needed to deliver a project within budget. A cost trend system will be initiated after notice to proceed. A trend occurs when there is a significant deviation from the “trend base” that affects engineering and/or the construction bid budget or schedule. The trend system will be used to identify, evaluate, and resolve changes that occur during design development and rapidly have them evaluated by Trane and your customer. This action helps control our own budget, document your customer directed changes, and reconcile cost and schedule changes that occur during the project design and construction process.
Our understanding of financial controls to forecast engineering, equipment, and construction costs ensures your customer that they will have the latest information to accurately track the financial progress of the project throughout the course of the work.

We have established monthly reporting procedures to assist the project team in the review and evaluation of project budgets and forecasts. These procedures will provide a breakdown of the bid into manageable subcategories. Each month we will report the status of the project in the following format:
•
Bid Budget - The bid will be subdivided into categories of cost as presented on the schedule of values included in our cost proposal. The budget will be adjusted as necessary to reflect any change orders issued by your customer.
•
Commitments – Trane controls staff will track monthly the status of project commitments including subcontracts, engineered equipment, and self-performed labor and materials. This information will provide the current status of how much of the bid has been committed at any point in time and the value of outstanding commitments.
•
Forecasts - Probably the category of most interest to your customer is the cash flow forecast. Each month we will compare bid versus commitments to determine the financial position of the project. A cash flow forecast will provide your customer with a barometer to measure the project progress on a monthly basis.
The good reputation that the Trane Team has earned by treating local subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers fairly and equitably enables us to receive strong support from them in the performance of our projects. Our team includes qualified subcontractors recognized for their ability to deliver quality projects, on time and within budget. We have a history of promoting M/WBE development and utilization on our projects.
Each of Trane’ s subcontractors and vendors will be involved during the design phase to provide design and construction reviews, and to identify value engineering options. All subcontractors and suppliers will be called upon during the execution of the work to continue to provide these services. Our team has a track record on other design-build projects of providing cost savings back to our clients and our team plans to offer the same benefits to your customer.
During contract negotiations for this work, we will fully present the basis of our design to your customer. We want to make sure that your customer fully understands the basis of our proposal and to make sure that we fully understand your customer’s expectations.
We believe that this will eliminate the need for design and construction changes during project execution.
The team’s design approach will remain flexible to incorporating project scope changes that your customer may require. Examples of this might be enhancements of products not available at bid time, additional special features requested by your customer’s staff, and additional scope of work items added to the project by your customer, not envisioned at bid time.
As your customer identifies any such issues, Trane will immediately develop complete scope of work, cost and schedule impact information for your customer’s review. If your customer is in agreement that the work needs to be performed, a field order can be issued as an interim measure to authorize the work until such time as a formal change order can be negotiated and executed.
This approach will apply to both extra work involving work increases to the project as well as Trane’s proposed reductions to the project scope that will result in cost savings.

It is our intent to continually value engineer this project to identify ways to reduce project costs. These proposals will be reviewed with your customer for their concurrence before they are implemented. Many of these ideas will surface during the design activities with input from the construction management team members, including subcontractors and suppliers.
The concepts will be presented to your customer during the review meetings.
One of the biggest benefits to your customer in the selection of Trane for this project is the ability of a single entity to process and review submittals and shop drawings in an expeditious manner. Many project failures are directly attributable to the inability of the team to prepare, review, and approve submittals within the time frame to support the construction schedule.
As part of our efforts to prepare a complete and thorough proposal for your customer’s project, we will identify critical items that would ultimately impact the project schedule. All engineering, procurement, and construction activities will be reviewed closely with the members of the project team to identify items that would require the immediate attention of all project participants. We will incorporate these items into the project schedule and will be prepared to immediately discuss them with your customer. These critical submittals will be included with the initial design package submitted to your customer for review.
We will work closely with your customer in order to obtain final approvals on long leadtime equipment items. Other submittals that could have an impact to the start of construction activities will also need to be reviewed and approved in an expeditious manner.
Other submittals will closely follow as part of the design review process. We work closely with our subcontractors to communicate the design intent of the project to help streamline the submittal process. We believe this communication will pay dividends during the shop drawing review cycle because technical details have already been thoroughly discussed internally within the project team.
We recognize that there are also numerous submittals with which your customer wants to be directly involved during technical review. It is our intent to discuss the extent of this involvement prior to contract execution so that both parties understand each other’s expectations. We believe your customer is selecting a design-builder to help minimize the number of shop drawings and submittals with which they will be directly involved during the review cycle. Our project team will be organized to review many of these submittals to help keep the project on track. These submittals will always be available for your customer to review in our office and at the project site.
55. Describe your company’s safety program during construction.
ANSWER:
Trane
The Trane Team has a comprehensive Health and Safety Program. Our full-time Safety
Managers will develop a project Health and Safety manual that meets or exceeds all of your customer’s safety program requirements. This manual will be coordinated with your

customer to ensure it complies with all your customer safety standards. The Project
Superintendent has had intensive safety training and will manage the construction site safety program. His efforts will be reviewed during monthly site safety visits completed by the Safety Manager. All subcontractors are required to comply with The Trane
Team’s safety program as a condition of the their subcontract agreements. Site safety equipment will be provided to comply with all OSHA and safety program requirements.
Our health and safety program is guided by the belief that our people are our greatest asset and that their health and safety must receive top priority and support from each and every employee. Prevention of occupationally related injuries and illnesses is an integral part of the company’s goals for quality service to clients. Trane will provide the appropriate supervision, training, and protective equipment to keep our employees and the public safe.
Upon receipt of the scope of work and prior to the start of work, Trane will have a clearly defined (site specific) written safety program, which includes environmental management and is specific to the scope/work that will be executed.
Hussmann
The Hussmann Team has a comprehensive Health and Safety Program. Our full-time
Safety Managers will develop a project Health and Safety manual that meets or exceeds all of your customer’s safety program requirements. This manual will be coordinated with your customer to ensure it complies with all your customer safety standards. The Project
Superintendent has had intensive safety training and will manage the construction site safety program. His efforts will be reviewed during monthly site safety visits completed by the Safety Manager. All subcontractors are required to comply with The Hussmann
Team’s safety program as a condition of the their subcontract agreements. Site safety equipment will be provided to comply with all OSHA and safety program requirements.
Our health and safety program is guided by the belief that our people are our greatest asset and that their health and safety must receive top priority and support from each and every employee. Prevention of occupationally related injuries and illnesses is an integral part of the company’s goals for quality service to clients. Hussmann will provide the appropriate supervision, training, and protective equipment to keep our employees and the public safe.
56. Indicate your company’s ability to provide temporary cooling when needed.
ANSWER:
Trane has a dedicated rental division (ChillerSource), which provides rental heating and cooling units of various sizes and configurations. These are strategically located across the USA.
The Trane Team has a comprehensive Health and Safety Program. Our full-time Safety
Managers will develop a project Health and Safety manual that meets or exceeds all of your customer’s safety program requirements. This manual will be coordinated with your customer to ensure it complies with all your customer safety standards. The Project
Superintendent has had intensive safety training and will manage the construction site safety program. His efforts will be reviewed during monthly site safety visits completed by the Safety Manager. All subcontractors are required to comply with The Trane

Team’s safety program as a condition of the their subcontract agreements. Site safety equipment will be provided to comply with all OSHA and safety program requirements.
Upon receipt of the scope of work and prior to the start of work, Trane will have a clearly defined (site specific) written safety program, which includes environmental management and is specific to the scope/work that will be executed.
Our health and safety program is guided by the belief that our people are our greatest asset and that their health and safety must receive top priority and support from each and every employee. Prevention of occupationally related injuries and illnesses is an integral part of the company’s goals for quality service to clients. Trane will provide the appropriate supervision, training, and protective equipment to keep our employees and the public safe.
57. Provide your company’s administrative support resources
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane uses standard documentation and maintains administrative support staff that produces standard documentation such as proposals, contract, terms and condition formats, insurance and indemnity documents, submittals, jobsite parameter reports, project management documents, sub-contractor documents, risk assignments and responsibility matrices.
Hussmann
Hussmann uses standard documentation including proposals, terms and conditions formats, insurance documents and submittals.
58. Provide who will provide the administrative support services including the person (s) title, phone number (s), fax number(s), e-mail(s)
ANSWER:
Trane
Contact Person: To be determined if we are awarded the contract
Title: TCPN Project Administrator
Phone: (713) 861- 9171
Fax: (713) 803-6514
Email: To be determined if we are awarded the contract
Zone 1 Houston
Hunton Trane
Jon Symko
Strategic Account Executive
Tel 713-255-3900 ext 3765
Fax 713-266-7011
E-mail jsymko@huntongroup.com

Zone 2 Dallas
Texas Trane
Greg S. Spencer
Dallas Sales Leader gsspencer@trane.com
Office: 972-406-6090
Cell: 469-442-6055
Fax: 972-243-1398
Zone 3 San Antonio
Trane San Antonio
Michael Price – District Operations Manager
E-mail: meprice@trane.com
Frank Tuttle – Safety & Service Manager
E:mail: ftuttle@trane.com
Tel 210-657-0901 Fax: 210-657-0627
Zone 4 Shreveport
Storer Equipment Company
Craig Storer
Toll free: (800) 844-4822 ext 453 Fax:(318) 861-8481
Email: chstorer@trane.com
Zone 5 El Paso
Mario Ruiz – Project Manager Equipment
El Paso
Phone: 915-593-3484
Fax: 915-593-3490
E-mail: mruiz@trane.com
Norma Marquez Account Manager
915-593-3484
F: 915-593-0027 nmarquez@trane.com
Zone 6 Arizona
Audrey Laffan – Project Manager Equipment
Zone 7 Arkansas
Trane Arkansas
Todd Castleberry, Inside Sales Engineer
Office: 501-661-0621, ext 3237
Cell: 501-539-0626
Fax: 501-661-9109

Toll: 800-983-6055 tdholman@trane.com
Kerry Jones, Project Manager
Office: 501-661-0621, ext 3281
Cell: 501-539-0629
Fax: 501-661-9109
Toll: 800-983-6055
Kjones2@trane.com
Zone 8 New Mexico
Audrey Laffan
EquipmentFufillment Team Leader
Tel 602-258-9600 ext 2883
Fax 62-253-3801 alaffan@trane.com
Zone 9 Oklahoma
Admin support services for Oklahoma;
OKC; Service dispatch is Rhonda Going (405-787-2237) in
OKC and Cyndi Hammons (918-250-5522) for Tulsa.
Fax for OKC IS 405-789-0887 Tulsa is 918-317-3170 rgoing@trane.com clhammons@trane.com
Sales admin support for Oklahoma;
OKC-Cathy Suffridge, Equipment Project Manager, (405-717-7612)
Fax is 405-789-0887 Email- csuffridge@trane.com
Tulsa- Lori Anderson, Equipment Project Manager, (918-317-3168)
Fax is 918-317-3170 Email- laanderson@trane.com
Zone 10 Wichita
Brett Miller
Business Development
(316) 265-9655
Fax # (316) 265-1974
Bmiller4@trane.com
Zone 11 Kansas City
Larry Jabara, District Financial Leader,
913-599-4664,
913-99-4669, ljabara@trane.com
Zone 12 Philadelphia

Eve Fay Service Business Supervisor
610-962-1693, fax 610-962-0138, efay@tozourtrane.com
Zone 13 Tennessee
Vicki Morgan
Lead Service PA
(615)565-9468
(615)234-2360 vlmorgan@trane.com
Zone 14 Portland
TraneOregon administrative support person.
Amanda Crabtree
Contracting Support phone 503-431-2512 fax 503-639-1454 email azcrabtree@trane.com
Zone 15 Washington
Administrative Contact is Tina Mlay – Contracting Project Administrator –
425 643 4310- Fax – 425-643-4314 – TMlay@trane.com
Zone 16 San Francisco
Donald Thomas
Pacific Coast Trane Service
EBS Sales Manager
Phone: (408) 481-3700
Email: dthomas@trane.com
David Gaus
Pacific Coast Trane Service
Office Manager
Phone: (408) 481-3700
Email: dagaus@trane.com
Zone 17 Wilmington
Pamela Kinley, Marketing & Business Development Leader, Ph: 302-395-0200, Fx: 302-
395-0700, EM: pamela.kinley@seiberlich.com
Zone 18 Gulf South
Judy Gifford, Project Administrator,
PH. 504-731-0810
F: 504-731-0839

JGifford@trane.com
Zone 19 Des Moines
Alison Collette
Contract Administrator
515-270-0007 PHN
515-270-3835 FAX acollette@trane.com
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Patrick Prewitt, Inside Account Manager,
Phone 970-490-1052
Fax 970-490-1191
PPrewitt@trane.com
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane
3036 S. Valley View Blvd.
Las Vegas, NV 89102
Jackie Finley
Service Administration
(702) 876-5255 phone
(702) 876-5106 fax
Jackie.Finley@trane.com
Zone 22 Greensboro
Administrative support will be provided by the inside sales support person of the individual sales person involved in the transaction.
Lead person in each office is:
Greensboro:
Brenda Smith: Ph(336-378-0670), F(336-274-7487), bfsmith@trane.com
Raleigh:
Regina Chayer: Ph(919-781-8458, F(919-791-9195), rchayer@trane.com
Wilimington:
Susanne Cox: Ph(910-792-0339, F(910-792-0466), scox@trane.com
Toll Free Number: 800-849-1915
Zone 23 Virginia
Sheryl L. Hoyt
Customer Service Office Manager
Trane Commercial Systems
Ingersoll Rand
2343 Highland Farm Road

Roanoke, VA 24017
Office: +1.540.563.2828
Email: slhoyt@trane.com
Zone 24 Flint
Kathryn Radeback
Nelson Trane
5335 Hill 23 Drive
Flint, MI 48507
Phone 810-767-7800, Fax 810-767-9058, KRadeback@trane.com
Zone 25 Charlotte
Necole Ortega
Project Manager nortega@trane.com
704-525-9600
704-525-8582 Fax
Zone 26 Sacramento
Connie Iacano
Project Administrator – Service
P: 916 577 1111
F: 916 577 1175
CIacono@Trane.com
Zone 27 Atlanta
Candy Davis phone 404 836-2142
Fax 678 553-2994 e-mail cdavis2@trane.com
Cynthia Herrmann phone 404 836-2765
Fax 678 553-2994 e-mail cherrmann@trane.com
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann customer service in our Bridgeton, MO corporate offices will support TCPN projects with order entry, factory acknowledgements and other administrative support.
The main contact is Kelly McCombs. Her information is located below:
McCombs, Kelly (Sales Coordinator)

Direct # 314-298-5707
Fax# 314-298-4757 kelly_mccombs@irco.com
59. What support documents does your company provide to the government entity after purchase?
ANSWER:
If equipment is purchased only, Trane provides equipment submittal data for owner’s approval, equipment warranty information, startup and commissioning log sheets if startup is included in the proposal, owner’s training if it is included in the proposal and copies of operation and maintenance manuals as requested by the customer.
If the project is a turnkey, energy retrofit or maintenance, then Trane provides additional items such as certified as-built drawings, labor and subcontractor warranties and information, project walk-through and acceptance forms, lien releases and any refrigerant management services required.
60. Describe what technical resources your company will provide to support the government entities’ projects.
ANSWER:
•
Design, Application and Support Engineers at the manufacturing facilities
•
Literature Database on our website
•
Trane Service Technicians
•
TraneNet – the Trane intra-net
•
Rapid Parts Identification System on-line Parts identification
•
Local expertise of the Trane salesman project manager and supervisor
•
Engineering Selection programs
•
System Analyzer and TRACE 700 Load Program
61. What equipment/system support documents will your company provide?
ANSWER:
Trane
•
•
•
•
Submittals
Installation-Operation-Maintenance manuals
HVAC system start-up report
Service Bulletins
Hussmann
•
•
Submittals
Installation and Operating Manuals
62. Describe the measurement options your company intends on providing the government entities.
ANSWER:

Trane can provide the government entities quarterly reports on all new equipment/systems and labor-based services ordered through the TCPN Program.
These reports can provide the listing of all purchase order numbers received, total dollar volume of all orders, all equipment shipment dates, progress billings and the location for which it was ordered.
Trane can also conduct quarterly meetings with the government entities to evaluate the effectiveness and quality of the business solution processes utilized during that quarter.
The methods for obtaining these measurements can be described in Implementation
Guides, which can be issued subsequent to any Agreement between Trane and the government entity.
The following categories of information can be used to assess the value of any Business
Solution Agreement and its impact on the government entity:
•
On time equipment deliveries
•
Timely and Complete Warranty Support
•
Submittals
•
Design Support
•
Technical Training
•
Pricing Consistency
•
HVAC Equipment
•
Operating Costs
•
Training programs
•
Problem Resolution
63. Indicate if your company will accept all forms of purchase orders.
ANSWER:
Trane
Trane ’s minimum acceptable elements of a customer purchase order are: a). The Company name & address clearly identified. b). Signed by a person authorized to purchase material or service. c). Purchase amount must be clearly stated and must not include any applicable sales use tax unless clearly indicated on the P.O. d). If purchase is exempt from sales or use tax, an acceptable exemption certificate must be provided (unless on file). e). Identification of the equipment or service to be provided by Trane must be clearly stated. f). It must be dated and should be issued to “Trane”, as indicated on the Trane’s proposal. g). The TCPN project proposal number.
.
Hussmann h). Terms of payment must be Net 30 days (unless Anticipated Discount is applied)
Hussmann minimum acceptable elements of a customer purchase order are:

a). The Company name & address clearly identified. b). Signed by a person authorized to purchase material or service. c). Purchase amount must be clearly stated and must not include any applicable sales use tax unless clearly indicated on the P.O. d). If purchase is exempt from sales or use tax, an acceptable exemption certificate must be provided (unless on file). e). Identification of the equipment or service to be provided by Hussmann must be clearly stated. f). It must be dated and should be issued to “Hussmann, g). The TCPN project proposal number. h). Terms of payment must be Net 30 days
64. What credit requirements are needed by the government entity in order for your company to accept a purchase order.
ANSWER:
Credit requirements vary depending on the project risk and size, but they may include purchase order and customer completed credit supplement sheet (listing all parties in the contract chain – name and addresses).
65. Identify the process of receiving a purchase order to the ordering of equipment.
ANSWER:

School Facility request proposal for equipment
Trane Company generates proposal and sends to School
Facility
Submittals are generated for approval
Equipment is ordered upon receipt of approved submittals
Equipment ships to specified jobsite address
Trane Invoices
School Facility
School Facility issues
P.P. to Trane and sends to TCPN
TCPN sends P.O.
to Trane company
Contractor inspects and installs
Trane Job
Coordinator inspects final job
Trane
Company pays 2% fee to TCPN
TCPN – Order Process Chart
Trane Company inputs
Warranty information in
Comfortsite

66. Identify the process of receiving a purchase order to the providing of a service contract.
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
Once a purchase order for a contract is received, the contract and all associated paperwork is turned over to the billing coordinator for set up in the system. At the same time a copy is given to a Field Supervisor to review. The Field supervisor will assign two technicians to each contract. This is to ensure that at least two technicians will be completely familiar with the customer’s contract and all requirements. These will be the first two technicians who will be used for all service work upon this site. The Field
Supervisor will then get with the customer to determine the months that are best for the customer to have our technicians on site to perform the agreed upon scheduled visits.
This information is then passed to the billing coordinator who will enter the schedule and the assigned technicians into the computer system. A coordination meeting is then held with the Field Supervisors, an assigned salesman, the two assigned technicians, the billing coordinator, a service coordinator and the Operations Manager. All parties receive a copy of the contract and will review and discuss the contract to make sure everyone understands all aspects and agreed upon work that are covered under the contract. All new contracts are discussed in the main monthly technician meetings with all technicians in order to introduce the new customer contract and give everyone a basic understanding of its requirements.
Zone 2 Dallas
The selling Account Manager provides a copy of the Customer P.O. / Signed Agreement to Service Fulfillment Project Manager with a copy of all relevant project information
(take-off, estimate, plans, specs, etc., equipment information). The Service Project
Manager and his administrative assistant set up the project in Trane’s PM scheduling tool (WennSoft) and then contacts the Customer for a service agreement kickoff meeting. At the kickoff meeting, Trane will have on hand the Account Manager,
Fulfillment Project Manager and his Resource Coordinator (dispatcher). The Customer should bring everyone who will “Own” the service contract for the Customer – typically, this includes Supervisory and Building HVAC technical staff. At the meeting, the scope of services is discussed and agreed to, along with logistics and access questions.
Beginning the first week after successful conclusion of the kickoff meeting, work commences.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Once a purchase order for a contract is received, the contract and all associated paperwork are turned over to the billing coordinator for set up in the system. At the same time a copy is given to a Field Supervisor to review. The Field supervisor will assign two technicians to each contract. This is to ensure that at least two technicians will be completely familiar with the customer's contract and all requirements. These will be the first two technicians who will be used for all service work upon this site. The Field
Supervisor will then get with the customer to determine the months that are best for the customer to have our technicians on site to perform the agreed up on scheduled visits.
This information is then passed on to the billing coordinator who will enter the schedule and the assigned technicians into the computer system. A coordination meeting is then

held with the Field Supervisors, an assigned salesman, the two assigned technicians, the billing coordinator, a service coordinator and the Operations Manager. All parties receive a copy of the contract and will review and discuss the contract to make sure everyone understands all aspects and agreed upon work to be covered under the contract. All new contracts are discussed in the main monthly technician meetings with all technicians in order to introduce the new customer contract and give everyone a basic understanding of its requirements.
Zone 4 Shreveport
Once a purchase order for a contract is received, the contract and all associated paperwork is turned over to the billing coordinator for set up in the system. At the same time a copy is given to a Field Supervisor to review. The Field supervisor will assign two technicians to each contract. This is to ensure that at least two technicians will be completely familiar with the customer’s contract and all requirements. These will be the first two technicians who will be used for all service work upon this site. The Field
Supervisor will then get with the customer to determine the months that are best for the customer to have our technicians on site to perform the agreed upon scheduled visits.
This information is then passed to the billing coordinator who will enter the schedule and the assigned technicians into the computer system. A coordination meeting is then held with the Field Supervisors, an assigned salesman, the two assigned technicians, the billing coordinator, a service coordinator and the Operations Manager. All parties receive a copy of the contract and will review and discuss the contract to make sure everyone understands all aspects and agreed upon work that are covered under the contract. All new contracts are discussed in the main monthly technician meetings with all technicians in order to introduce the new customer contract and give everyone a basic understanding of its requirements
Zone 5 El Paso
When a purchase order is received for a service contract, the contract is set up right away through a hand off meeting between the salesman, the service coordinator and the
Administrative Assistant. The maintenance schedule is then coordinated with the customer. A technician packet is setup with the proper paper work outlining the maintenance the technician is required to perform on that particular contract.
Zone 6 Arizona
For purchase order receipt to service agreement, the following process is followed:
1. Once the service agreement is accepted by the customer, the Service
Account Manager (Acquisition) prepares a detailed information package to the Service Operations Group (Fulfillment) for execution. A meeting is orchestrated to review and discuss the scope of work along with a list of project contacts and their various roles in the process.
2. The service agreement is broken down into a series of scheduled calls reflecting the work packages to be completed. For quality purposes, and highly qualified Area Service Manager or Service Foreman assists in matching personnel with appropriate skills and tooling to the job assignment.
3. The service technician is dispatched to the project and makes an assessment of the work to be performed including a jobsite safety assessment.

4. After the work is completed, service technicians prepare daily activity reports that are not only kept in the master project file, but are reviewed by their supervisors to help insure the project activity is complete and in compliance with the work order.
5. All project cost data, labor and material purchases, are recorded in our
Service business system (Wennsoft). These costs are reviewed by the
Service Coordinator (Service Project Manager) prior to scheduling billings.
6. For service agreements, service call schedules are developed at the inception of the agreement, and inspection compliance reports are run on a monthly basis to monitor progress of service activities that have been committed to customers.
7. Additionally, to assist in achieving premier customer service ratings from customers and minimizing the risk of errors on jobs, detailed training records are kept on each technician to help insure the tasks are being performed by technicians who have not only been trained, but can demonstrate proficiency in various areas of HVAC service.
Zone 7 Arkansas
When the customers accepts a Trane Arkansas proposal for service by signing the proposal or issuing a purchase order, the Trane Arkansas salesperson schedules a transition meeting with sales and operations in attendance. The agenda is focused on meeting customer expectations and communicating a plan for fulfillment. The project is assigned to a service team leader. After the transition meeting, sales and the service team leader meet on-site with the owner to confirm expectations. While on site, a survey it taken by the service team leader to ensure that all project requirements are understood. The project is assigned to a service technician(s) for fulfillment. The technician generates a report and submits a copy to the owner before leaving the premises. A memo billing that reflects the value of the work is sent to the customer, included with it are copies of the service report.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See Answer for Zone 6
Zone 9 Oklahoma
See Answer for Zone 2
Zone 10 Wichita
We have a summary letter with our payment terms that the customer signs and sends back to us.
Zone 11 Kansas City
Once the purchase order is received via phone or fax it is reviewed by the account managers. Then the account manager processes the service order to the project administrators & dispatcher. Aftter which the project administrators process service technician's requirements to fulfill service order. Then the dispatcher assigns and coordinates service technician's schedule to fulfill service contract. Material is then

received for service technician to be dispatched to site with the material to complete service contract.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
Purchase orders for service contracts are all received and processed by the Service
Business Administrator. The contract tasking is entered in our wireless “Dispatch Me
Now” software to be sure all work committed is scheduled and performed. The periodic billing information is entered in our COINS enterprise financial software. If the contract is a new one, a “turnover” meeting is scheduled between Sales and Operations to make sure the execution team understands the scope of services sold and that any special requirements are understood.
Zone 13 Tennessee
See answer for Zone 27
Zone 14 Portland
When a purchase order is received by either the account manager or resource coordinator a turnover meeting is scheduled. This meeting includes the account manager, lead technician and resource coordinator. The scope and schedule are reviewed and agreed upon. The Resource Coordinator then contacts the customer to determine the appropriate visit schedule and job site requirements. Once done, the contract is set-up in our service/accounting system.
Zone 15 Washington
Once a purchase order for a contract is received, the contract and all associated paperwork is turned over to the billing coordinator for set up in the system. At the same time a copy is given to a Field Supervisor to review. The Field supervisor will assign two technicians to each contract. This is to ensure that at least two technicians will be completely familiar with the customer’s contract and all requirements. These will be the first two technicians who will be used for all service work upon this site. The Field
Supervisor will then get with the customer to determine the months that are best for the customer to have our technicians on site to perform the agreed upon scheduled visits.
This information is then passed to the billing coordinator who will enter the schedule and the assigned technicians into the computer system. A coordination meeting is then held with the Field Supervisors, an assigned salesman, the two assigned technicians, the billing coordinator, a service coordinator and the Operations Manager. All parties receive a copy of the contract and will review and discuss the contract to make sure everyone understands all aspects and agreed upon work that are covered under the contract. All new contracts are discussed in the main monthly technician meetings with all technicians in order to introduce the new customer contract and give everyone a basic understanding of its requirements.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Each service contract opportunity is assigned a lead number in our office management system for tracking. The lead number is assigned by our contract administrator. The

account manager uses this lead number in all correspondences, including the service agreement. All contract documentation is scanned and saved into our office management system as well.
When a purchase order is received, the account manager will work with our contract administrator to transition the lead into a maintenance contract. All terms of the maintenance contract as well as the equipment being serviced is then loaded into our office management system.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Once the purchase order is received, it is forwarded to the sales person responsible for the account. The sales person completes the job input sheet on the service contract estimator sheet. A copy of the completed service contract estimator and a copy of the contract word document are printed and given to the service estimator for entry in the
EBS job board. The documents are then forwarded to the sales assistant for entry into
Project 3 sales register for job sales tracking, commissions, etc. The sales assistant creates a contract folder for the service department and places a paper copy of the contract estimator, contract word document, and the purchase order in the job file and gives it to the service billing assistant for processing. The sales assistant also forwards an electronic copy of the service contract estimator and word document to the service team leaders, service billing assistants, and accounting clerk for assignment of technician(s), input into Wennsoft/MobileTech and invoicing. Once the contract information is entered into Mobile Tech, the service coordinator schedules the assigned technician(2) to perform the required service.
Zone 18 Gulf South
Once a purchase order for a contract is received, the contract and all associated paperwork is turned over to the billing coordinator for set up in the system. At the same time a copy is given to a Field Supervisor to review. The Field supervisor will assign two technicians to each contract. This is to ensure that at least two technicians will be completely familiar with the customer’s contract and all requirements. These will be the first two technicians who will be used for all service work upon this site. The Field
Supervisor will then get with the customer to determine the months that are best for the customer to have our technicians on site to perform the agreed upon scheduled visits.
This information is then passed to the billing coordinator who will enter the schedule and the assigned technicians into the computer system. A coordination meeting is then held with the Field Supervisors, an assigned salesman, the two assigned technicians, the billing coordinator, a service coordinator and the Operations Manager. All parties receive a copy of the contract and will review and discuss the contract to make sure everyone understands all aspects and agreed upon work that are covered under the contract. All new contracts are discussed in the main monthly technician meetings with all technicians in order to introduce the new customer contract and give everyone a basic understanding of its requirements.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Purchase orders come in and are handled by our contract administrator. She verifies the purchase order relative to the quotation, and identifies the customer of any concerns.
The order is entered into our accounting / dispatching system, and initial schedules are

developed based on the scope of the contract. The dispatcher contacts the customer based on the initial schedule, and establishes contract dispatching times / days according to the customer’s schedule and the contract scope. Technicians are then dispatched according to the schedule.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Once a purchase order or signed agreement is received, a turnover meeting is scheduled with the owner representative and our staff per the attached document. This ensures the service agreement is set up and executed per the customers requirements.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
When a purchase order is received by sales a turnover meeting is scheduled. This meeting includes the account manager, lead technician and service coordinator. The scope and schedule are reviewed and agreed upon. The service Coordinator then contacts the customer to determine the appropriate visit schedule and job site requirements. Once done, the contract is set-up in our service/accounting system.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Once the purchase order s received the service agreement is written up in a master agreement form and entered into our service software system. All of the equipment is entered into the system under the contract and will have the required service intervals noted. The service representative will then schedule a job turnover meeting with the customer and the assigned service technician to review the scope of work on the job and to walk the job to identify all covered equipment. The resources manager will then have responsibility for the execution of the service agreement and the associated billing and required documentation. Each service agreement will then be reviewed prior to the anniversary date.
Zone 23 Virginia
Once purchase order is received, contract is closed in CRM, estimate is transitioned in
Job Center, Contract is Transmitted in Job Center and then set up in WennSoft. If necessary, an internal and/or on site meeting is held.
Zone 24 Flint
Once the purchase order for a service contract is received there are 6 steps.
1. The contract price is compared with the PO amount and the information is retrieved from Job Center, including how the contract was estimated.
2. It is assigned to 2 technicians in that area, based on availability in the tech’s schedule and the experience working on specific equipment on the agreement. One technician is the lead on the contract and will handle all the maintenance work. The second technician is the backup who also must familiarize himself with the site and equipment.
A copy of the agreement is given to both techs.
3. The agreement is formally setup and a job number assigned. We return a signed copy to the customer, with a letter instructing them who to contact is they need anything, who their technicians will be, and what to do in an event of an after hours emergency.
The technician is notified how many hours he has to complete the maintenance work on

the agreement, when to go to the site, how many times a year and if any material is included.
4. It is setup in our system for billing, based on the requirements of the PO or as stated on the contract. Contract billing is checked
quarterly to ensure all billings are going out on schedule.
5. Contract reviews are performed quarterly and the technicians, service team leaders, service manager and account managers are notified
the status.
6. When the contract is up for renewal we have the technician assigned to the agreement complete and form letting us know if any changes need to be made to the contract. For example, more hours added, equipment that could be added to expand the agreement, change in contact person, etc.
Zone 25 Charlotte
The account manager fills out the Tip package with all associated information. We have an internal turn over meeting to that all parties understand the contract. Two techs are identified at that time.
We then have a site turn over meeting with the customer in attendance.
Zone 26 Sacramento
Upon receipt of PO, the account manager initiates a TIP process that hands over all the pertinent info to the fulfillment team. The TIP is an internal process that details each required step to transition from acquisition of the PO to the fulfillment of the work. The fulfillment team will then set up the job with the appropriate tasking and manpower requirements.
Zone 27 Atlanta
When a purchase order is received it is forwarded to the account manager for implementation. He matches it to his proposal and the work is booked/transitioned.
An account manager identifies a service contract opportunity and visits the owner to inventory the equipment and to understand the needs and desires of the owner. The opportunity is estimated and proposed to the owner. Once approved the agreement is booked and transitioned and a new customer kick off meeting is scheduled. The account manager, service dispatcher and the area service manger as well as the lead technician attend the meeting.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Hussmann accepts Purchase orders thru our customer service department in Bridgeton,
MO. The P.O’s are processed either thru our on hand inventory or thru our factories for engineered/non-stock products, special colors, etc.. Once the equipment is defined customers can work with our local branches or contract service providers to define a customer specific service agreement for ongoing service requirements, installation, preventative maintenance agreements, etc.

67. Identify the process of receiving a purchase order and implementing a turnkey installation project.
ANSWER:
Upon receiving a purchase order for a turnkey installation project, a Project Manager is assigned. The Project Manager will schedule a meeting with all subcontractors and office personnel who will be involved in the project. A detailed scope of work will be given to each subcontractor. Subcontractors will then be given any necessary equipment submittals and any other details in order to provide bids on project. Once bids are received and approved, a project-scheduling meeting will be held. The complete project will be scheduled and a schedule set up in a project tracking software. A copy of the schedule is then sent to the customer for review. If customer agrees to the schedule the project is begun.
68. Identify the process of receiving a purchase order and implementing an energy retrofit contract.
ANSWER:
Upon receiving a purchase order from the Customer for a turnkey installation project, a
Project Manager is assigned to the project by the Contracting Solutions Manager. The
Project Manager is sent the project’s scope of work, construction schedule, and the required quotations from suppliers and contractors. The Project Manager reviews these documents and develops an unvalidated project budget. The Sales Team then schedules a meeting to answer any questions of the Project Manager and the Fulfillment team. If all the Project Manager’s question are answered the projects final budget can be validated. The project budget is now booked in the financial system and installation period begins
69. Does your company require Tax Exempt Forms be provided by government entities for each purchase order?
ANSWER:
If government entity wants all purchases to be exempt from tax, Trane will require taxexempt form at time of first purchase and, typically yearly.
70. Does your company offer an Internet ordering solution? If so, provide detailed information related to the features and benefits related to your solution. Is there a dedicated staff to address any issues with the system or access?
ANSWER:
Trane
Developed 10 years ago, ComfortSite requires a login and password (provided to a customer by a local Trane Parts location) and provides free access to technical tools and information, literature, parts identification tools, online ordering and online warranty and credit request entry. Our parts identification tool has search options for model, serial, part, vendor part, description and more. Information returned includes parts lists, graphics, where used information, supersede information, literature, warranty information and sales order information. Literature and graphics can easily be printed or emailed,

and parts lists exported to Excel. Customer pricing and availability is also in the tool, and items can be added to the cart with one click. Orders submitted online flow to the local
Parts location for fulfillment.
Hussmann
At this time we do not have internet order capabilities. All orders are received by e-mail, fax or mail.
71. Describe how your company will invoice the government entity. Include a process map.
ANSWER:
Customer will send purchase order to Trane via TCPN for equipment and/or labor based solutions. Customer will identify the original Trane proposal number on their purchase order. By cross referencing, we will assign the purchase order to the correct Zone contact to complete the transaction by ordering equipment or by providing the labor based solution. An invoice will be generated when the equipment is shipped. With the labor based solutions, monthly progress billing invoices will be generated. When the job is complete, final invoices will be processed.
School Issues
PO
PO received by
TCPN
PO sent to Trane
Labor based solutions are begun
Monthly progress billing invoices to customer
Equipment is ordered
Unit is shipped
Final billing to customer
Trane invoices customer
72. Is your company able to send quotes in electronic format via email including specific information (such as number of units, nature of repair, how repair was identified
,etc.)
ANSWER:

Yes, we have found that our projects run best with our TCPN customers when we use email in lieu of other forms of communication.
73. Discuss the invoicing options your company offers and the payment terms for each.
ANSWER:
Trane
Equipment is invoiced at time of shipment. Payment is due Net 30 days from time of shipment.
Hussmann
Standard Hussmann terms are net 30 days to customers with approved credit. We either provide invoicing by mail or electronically based on customer requests.
74. Is your company capable of handling Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) payment? If so, what EFT formats (CTX, CPT, etc.) do you currently support?
ANSWER:
Trane
Yes, we accept EFT in CTX format.
Hussmann
Hussmann is capable of accepting EFT. We currently support CTX.
75. What is the average time frame associated with receiving an invoice following completion of a repair or replacement?
ANSWER:
Zone1 Houston
Average time frame for invoicing after repair or replacement is 10 business days.
Hunton Trane Services would be billing to adhere to a cut-off time frame for invoices not received in 120 days. Hunton Trane Services has established and strictly adheres to
Project Management practices that ensure accurate and timely completion of projects and invoicing.
Zone 2 Dallas
Average invoice time is 10-15 days from work completion.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Average time frame for invoicing after repair or replacement is 10 days. Trane San
Antonio would be billing to adhere to a cut-off time frame for invoices not received in 120 days. Trane San Antonio has established and strictly adheres to Project Management practices that ensure accurate and timely completion of projects and invoicing.

Zone 4 Shreveport
10 days billing cycle for 2010
Zone 5 El Paso
Average time frame for invoicing after repair or replacement is 7 days.
Zone 6 Arizona
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 7 Arkansas
Trane Arkansas averages 7-10 days.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 9 Oklahoma
See answer for Zone 2
Zone 10 Wichita
14 to 21 days
Zone 11 Kansas City
8 days
Zone 12 Philadelphia
The “average” would fall between 7-10 days from time of repair completion.
Zone 13 Tennessee
Our Days to Bill across the Southeast at less than 8 days from the last date of labor posting to the workorder.
Zone 14 Portland
A customer can expect to receive an invoice from TraneOregon within 10 days of completion of repair or replacement.
Zone 15 Washington
For all service work the average days to bill is 11 to 12 days plus time for US Mail
(approximately 4 days). For contracting projects, all invoices are sent out on the 15th of the month regardless of the date in which the work was performed.

Zone 16 San Francisco
Invoices can be generated the day after a call has been completed. Typical turn around would be two weeks.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Average time is 36 days, median time is 14 days
Zone 18 Gulf States
12 days
Zone 19 Des Moines
Typically our average time from complete to invoicing runs between 5 to 6 working days.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
Typically the invoice is mailed two-three days after completion and should be received no later than one week.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
The average time the customer will receive and invoice from the date of completion of our work is 7 days.
Zone 22 Greensboro
Our goal is a two day turnaround but we average five days.
Zone 23 Virginia
7 days for Virginia
Zone 24 Flint
After the job is complete the technician turns in his signed work orders to the service coordinator who then checks for any material invoices, processes and invoices the customer. Turn over is approximately one week.
Zone 25 Charlotte
See answer for Zone 13
Zone 26 Sacramento
One week
Zone 27 Atlanta

3-10 business days
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
After completion of a repair or replacement the service technician submits his signed completed service ticket to the Service Center and an invoice is typically generated within 5 business days.
76. Is your company willing to accept a cut off of invoices not submitted within a 90-day period or 120 day period?
ANSWER:
Trane
No, as projects may last longer than this time frame. Trane expects payment of the agreed upon purchase price amount regardless of when invoiced.
Hussmann
No. Hussmann makes every effort to bill in a timely manner with all information per P.O..
Projects that are delayed or incur additional costs will be billed as promptly as is possible.
77. What does your company do to ensure bills are received from service centers within a reasonable time frame and issued to government entities for payment?
ANSWER:
Zone 1 Houston
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows-up with the service provider or sub-contractors to determine their percent of completion as indicated in the Microsoft Project Management software planning schedule. If the project is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.
Zone 2 Dallas
All billing in generated locally by individual Project Administrators assigned to
Customers. All billing is done on a semi-monthly basis for all revenue streams -
Equipment, Contracting, Service and Parts.
Zone 3 San Antonio
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows up with the service provider or sub-contractor to determine their percent of completion as indicated in the SureTrak Project Management software planning schedule. If the project is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.

Zone 4 Shreveport
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows-up with the service provider or sub-contractors to determine their percent of completion as indicated in the Microsoft Project Management software planning schedule. If the project is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.
Zone 5 El Paso
The days to bill data is reviewed on a monthly basis on all completed calls to help insure timely billings. All work in process is reviewed on a job by job basis at least 2 times per month to make sure service calls are closed out appropriately.
Zone 6 Arizona
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 7 Arkansas
Trane Arkansas reviews the unbilled register two times per month.
Zone 8 New Mexico
See answer for Zone 5
Zone 9 Oklahoma
See answer for Zone 2
Zone 10 Wichita
Project Manager is tracking project and as a result vendor invoices are requested and matched on a timely basis with PO and customer/end user is invoiced.
Zone 11 Kansas City
Internal processes requiring billing to be completed within 3 days.
Internal WIP Measurements versus goals.
Zone 12 Philadelphia
The service administration team reviews the unbilled jobs weekly to determine what is required to complete the service invoicing. If parts costs are not received yet, they expedite the billing in order to complete the record and get the billing complete. For jobs requiring certified payroll, the IT group provides the needed backup paperwork. One week before the end of the month, the service administration team meets with accounting and service management to review all open billings in order to get work complete and billed as they are able.

Zone 13 Tennessee
See Answer for Zone 23
Zone 14 Portland
All service calls are reviewed on a weekly basis for open invoices. Our system allows us to easily see costs that have been identified and assigned to a job that we have not received an invoice for. We then call the appropriate vendor/customer to obtain the invoice. Our goal is to have all invoices received into our system within 7 days of job completion.
Zone 15 Washington
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows-up with the service provider or sub-contractors to determine their percent of completion as indicated in the Microsoft Project Management software planning schedule. If the project is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.
Zone 16 San Francisco
Pacific Coast Trane Service uses an integrated office management software suite called
Time Management Systems (TMS). This software suite completely integrates our dispatch, purchasing, payroll accounts receivable and accounts payable.
When a job is completed, a dispatcher marks the job as closed and immediately a billing coordinator is flagged. The billing coordinator checks for open purchase orders, consolidates costs and generates an invoice. Outstanding issues are flagged and dealt with as soon as possible to ensure timely billings.
Zone 17 Wilmington
Seiberlich Trane utilizes WennSoft Mobile Tech software for all of our service technicians. Technicians complete work order paperwork while on the customers’ jobsites. The information is then electronically transmitted to both the customer and our office. Our parts department, Seiberlich Trane HVAC Parts & Supplies, is also notified on a daily basis which parts have been utilized on a job. Parts associates make daily updates to the Mobile Tech system with parts costs for each work order.
Daily, technician paperwork and parts costs are received in our office, and the customer is invoiced. Occasionally, invoices will be held until a project is complete if the project involves multiple technician jobsite visits. Our invoices are processed at a median timeframe of 14 days.
Zone 18 Gulf States
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows-up with the service provider or sub-contractors to determine their percent of completion as indicated in the PeopleSoft Project Management Tool planning schedule. If the project

is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.
Zone 19 Des Moines
Halvorson Trane utilizes electronic work orders which are completed and digitally signed by the customer, which are emailed directly to our billing administrator as well as a copy to the customer. Work orders and time sheets are tracked to ensure that billing is done promptly for our customers.
Zone 20 Rocky Mountain
All of our locations conduct invoicing individually. Typically the invoice is mailed twothree days after job completion and should be received by the customer no later than one week.
Zone 21 Las Vegas
Lawyer Trane field technicians are supplied with hand-held electronic devices. The technicians input the service call details into their hand-held devices prior to leaving the jobsite. This allows immediate transmission of job status. It also enables service administration to process and provide timely service invoices with detail to our customers. The average time the customer will receive an invoice from the date of completion of our work is 7 days.
Zone 22 Greensboro
All service activities go through a centralized location (Greensboro) and are initiated within two days in the case of payment requests.
Zone 23 Virginia
Technician informs Project Administrator (PA) that the scope is complete and sends in supporting paperwork for the job. The PA then bills the job via mail for the job. The goal is to bill the job within the 30 days.
Zone 24 Flint
Each month the project manager updates percentage complete on jobs, along with forecasting completion dates by using either Microsoft Project or a Gant chart. The jobs are progressed billed monthly based on estimated percentage complete at the end of the billing period. All projects are reviewed monthly for accuracy.
Zone 25 Charlotte
We are measured on Day-to-bill (DTB) and we are currently running at 4.5 days. We have a PA charged with this function.
Zone 26 Sacramento

Accounts Payable department runs daily days-to-bill reports to ensure timely billing cycles.
Zone 27 Atlanta
Our company Days to Bill is less than 8 days and has been for several years running.
Always is the top few % of all Trane districts.
Refer to Appendix #5 for Zone Maps which outlines the Zones’ counties and states territory.
Hussmann
Every month, prior to submitting a progress billing, the Project manager follows-up with the service provider or sub-contractors to determine their percent of completion based on the initial schedule. If the project is either behind or accelerated, the project schedule is revised. Billings are adjusted accordingly.
78. What states would your company not honor pricing and services for this contract, in the event that this contract is made available to all states?
ANSWER:
Trane will honor all product and services pricing listed in this RFP Response. Trane and
Hussmann are Global Suppliers and we will honor any states that TCPN is allowed to conduct business by state statute.

Green Initiatives
•
We're committed to helping to build a cleaner future!
According to the U.S. Census Bureau, the world population is expanding at a mind-boggling rate. The world reached 1 billion people in 1800; 2 billion by 1922; and over 6 billion by 2000. It is estimated that the population will swell to over 9 billion by 2050. That means that if the world’s natural resources were evenly distributed, people in 2050 will only have 25% of the resources per capita that people in 1950 had.
The world has a fixed amount of natural resources - some of which are already depleted. So as population growth greatly strains our finite resources, there are fewer resources available. If we intend to leave our children and grandchildren with the same standard of living we have enjoyed, we must preserve the foundation of that standard of living. We save for college educations, orthodontia, and weddings, but what about saving clean air, water, fuel sources and soil for future generations?
As our business grows, we want to make sure we minimize our impact on the Earth's climate. So we’re taking every step we can to implement innovative and responsible environmental practices throughout
TCPN to reduce our carbon footprint , reduce waste, energy conservation, ensure efficient computing and much more. To that effort, we ask respondents to provide their companies environmental policy and/or green initiative.
Vendor Certifications (if applicable)
•
Provide a copy of all current licenses, registrations and certifications issued by federal, state and local agencies, and any other licenses, registrations or certifications from any other governmental entity with jurisdiction, allowing respondent to perform the covered services including, but not limited to licenses, registrations or certifications. Certifications can include applicable M/WBE, HUB, and manufacturer certifications for sales and service.
Page 20 of 103

Provide a minimum of ten (10) customer references for product and/or services of similar scope dating within the past 3 years. Please try to provide an equal number of references for K12, Higher Education,
Airports, and City/County entities. Provide the following information for each reference:
•
Entity Name
•
Contact Name and Title
•
City and State
•
Phone Number
•
Years Serviced
•
Description of Services
•
Annual Volume
Page 21 of 103

Product
HVAC Refrigeration
Packaged Central Plant
FORM A
PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
Type (e.g., Rotary, Centrifugal, Scroll, Reciprocating., Absorption)
Cooling medium (e.g., air, water)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (tons)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Range of Efficiencies (KW/Ton)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (Cooling, Heating, Cooling/Heating)
Type of Equipment/Components (e.g Chillers, Boilers, etc.)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (tons)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Range of Full Load Efficiencies for entire Plant (KW/Ton)
Detailed Features & Benefits
Type ie. Medium Temperature, low temperature, remote Cataloged & Engineered Medium
& Low Temperature Refrigeration
Indoor Air Quality Products and
Devices
Unitary
Brand Name (s)
Capacity Range (HP)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detailed Features & Benefits
Type (Active polarization, non-ionizing, electronic air cleaning systems intended to replace passive filtration.)
Brand Name
Capacity Range
Standard Warranty
Estimated Lead Time
Location of Manufacturing
Estimated Market Share in North America
Range of Efficiencies
Features & Benefits
Type (e.g., rooftops, splits, package, HPs, PTACs, water-source, mini-splits)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (tons)
Heating Medium (Electric, Gas, Steam, Hot Water)
Cooling Medium (DX, Chilled Water)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Page 22 of 103

Air Handlers
Evaporative Process Cooling
Air Terminal Devices and Heating
Products
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Range of Efficiencies (EER, SEER, COP)
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (e.g. central station, makeup air, fan, filter, coil sections)
Brand Name(s)
Fan Types (e.g. Backward incline, Forward curve, airfoil)
Capacity Range (CFM)
Heating Medium (Hot Water, electric heat, steam, gas)
Cooling Medium (chilled water, DX)
Standard Warranty (Parts and Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead / Delivery time
Location of Manufacturing City (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share
Detail Features and Benefits
Type: (Core components, devices, controls)
Brand Name (s)
Product(s) Usage
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detailed Features & Benefits
Type (VAV, Fan Coils, Unit Ventilators, Unit Heaters, Fin Tube
Radiation/Convectors)
Brand Name(s)
DDC Controls
Heating Medium (Electric, Gas, Steam, Hot Water)
Cooling Medium (DX, Chilled Water)
Capacity Range (cfm)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Range of Efficiencies (EER, SEER, COP)
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (core components, end devices, lighting, panels)
Brand Name(s)
Standard. Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Cooling Towers
System Protocol (BACnet, LonWorks, Proprietary or Combo)
LAN Communication Structure (Peer-to-peer, Polling)
Human Machine Interface (HMI) types (PC, Notebooks, Handheld terminals)
Third party interface (Drivers and Gateways)
Remote alarm and message capabilities
Type (open, closed, evaporative)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (tons)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Estimated Lead/Delivery Time
Page 23 of 103

Pumps
Invertors
HVAC Specialty Products
Boilers & Water Heaters
Dust Collectors
Training, Skill Building,
Educational
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Range of Efficiencies
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (single stage, split case, end suction, inline, circulator, turbines)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (GPM)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (HP)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (modular, outside/inside, S&T Heat Recovery, Humidity Control, Heat
Wheel, Heat Pipe, Heat Exchangers)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (CFM and/or MBH)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Heating Medium (Electric, Gas, Steam, Hot Water)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (MBH)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Estimated Market Share (North America)
Detail Features & Benefits
Type (Intermittent Duty Shaker, Continuous Duty Pulse-Jet, Mist, Modular
Mediafilter, Weld Fume)
Brand Name(s)
Capacity Range (CFM)
Standard Warranty (Parts & Labor)
Optional Warranty (components covered & Labor)
Location of Manufacturing (City, State or Country)
Detail Features & Benefits
Services
Off Site Courses
Description of course
Frequency
Length
Instructor qualifications
Cost
Course content
Target audience
Page 24 of 103

Startup & Commissioning
Services
Installation and Turnkey
Contracting
Financial Services
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Services
With Coverage
Plumbing Services
Warranty Services
CEU credit
Certification issued
Class Size
Features and Benefits
On Site Training
Description
Frequency
Length
Instructor qualifications
Cost
Course content
Target audience
Class Size
Features and Benefits
Type (Equipment, System, Controls, Air/Water Balance)
Personnel or Factory Rep
Certifications or Associations
Description
Features and Benefits
Licensing
Bonding Capabilities
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Description
Features and Benefits
Type (leasing, prompt and pre-payment discounts, guaranteed savings)
Funding Sources
Project References
Description
Features and Benefits
Type (oil, refrigerant, vibration, chemical analysis)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
Type (Annuals, Full Maintenance, Preventative Maintenance, Emergency
Service)
Man-in-attendance, regulatory compliance, duct cleaning)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
Type (Annuals, Full Maintenance Preventative Maintenance, Emergency
Service)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
Type (Extended parts & labor up to 10 years, delayed start-up)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Page 25 of 103

Site Surveys
Features and Benefits
Type (Equipment, system analysis, operational, architectural)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Energy Services
Equipment Rentals
Project References
Features and Benefits
Type (Energy Tracking, Energy Analysis, Evaluation of Potential Upgrades)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Certifications or Associations
Features and Benefits
Professional Services
Type (chillers, pumps, transformers, cooling towers, rooftop)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
Type (Engineering, Design, Drafting, Architectural, Data Management)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
Statewide Parts Program Type (manufactured parts, emergency parts service, miscellaneous material)
Description
Personnel (employed or subcontractor)
Project References
Features and Benefits
NOTES:
1. Provide pricing discount schedules on separate page by product type as shown in this product and
services matrix.
2. Provide submittal data on each example product along with weights, dimensions, electrical and
capacity information
3. Provide scheduled labor rates as shown in FORM XXXII for services. All services provided will be
priced by labor rate only and no mark-up. Any miscellaneous materials mark-up shall be shown on
FORM XXXII.
4. Provide your coefficient for any bench marked program such as RS Means for your labor hours
5. Use this matrix as a template to describe your product and services offerings.
Page 26 of 103

FORM I
RESPONDENT’S LIST PRICING EXAMPLE FORMAT
Product Module/Option Description or Part Number:
List
Base Unit List Price: $
List Price options $
Net options: $
Vendor Pricing:
(Manufacturer, Part #, Description) $
$
Net
Unadjusted Grand Total
Less Discount or Mult.(1-0.00) 0.00
Total Net Selling Price $ +
$
Exceptions to Specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard “No Cost” Items to Specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comments:
0.00
$ $
NOTES:
1. Use this form for all pricing examples listed in the following forms
2. Form II thru XL describes examples to be used.
Order Code or Category
Page 27 of 103

FORM II
PRICING EXAMPLE: REFRIGERATION/Centrifugal Chiller
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
References
-
ARI Standard 550/590-2003
-
ASHRAE Standard 34,90.1 & 15-2001
-
ASME Section VIII
•
Warranty and Start-up
-
Provide one(1) year parts and labor warranty on entire unit including refrigerant
-
Provide 10 year and labor warranty, including refrigerant
-
Price equipment as F.O.B. jobsite
-
Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer to start the unit
-
Provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging of unit
2. Products
•
Compressor & Motor
-
Compressor shall be centrifugal
-
Motor shall be hermetic and either suction or liquid refrigerant cooled.
•
Evaporator and Condenser
-
The evaporator and condenser shall be built in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-2001
-
Water piping connections shall be grooved Victaulic
-
Tubes shall be internally and externally enhanced. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.028 inches in the evaporator and 0.035 inches in condenser.
-
Provide ¾ inch Armaflex insulation on the cold surfaces i.e. evaporator, suction elbow, and evap. water boxes.
•
Purge and pump-out System
-
The manufacturers of low pressure machines must provide a high efficiency purge system.
-
Purge must be ARI standard 580 listed.
-
The Purge shall be capable of operating when the chiller is idle in accordance with ASHRAE Std 147.
-
The manufacturer of medium-high pressure machines shall provide a pump-out refrigerant recovery system and rupture discs in conjunction with their valves per ASHRAE std 147
•
Controls
-
The chiller shall be controlled by a stand-alone direct Digital Control (DDC) System. A dedicated chiller microprocessor touch sensitive LCD control panel is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer.
•
Starter
-
Motor Starter shall be a Star-Delta Closed Transition and shall have NEMA 1A gasketed enclosure
-
Provide circuit breaker type disconnect, with 65,000 AIC circuit breaker and 65,000 short circuit
rating.
3. Performance
Cooling Capacity…………………840 tons
Max KW/TON……………………0.55
Min NPLV…………………………0.44
Evaporator:
EnT/Lvg Temp………………….54/42 °F
Flow Rate…………………………1680 GPM
Max WPD………………………….26.0 ft.
FF………………………………0.00010 hr-sq ft-deg F/BTU
Condenser
Ent/LWT Temp………………………54/96 °F
Flow Rate……………………………..2520 GPM
Max WPD………………………………...16 Ft.
FF…………………………………..0.00010 hr-sq ft-deg F/BTU
Electrical………………………….460/60/3
Page 28 of 103

FORM III
PRICING EXAMPLE: REFRIGERTATION/Water-Cooled Screw Chiller
Pricing the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example.
Description
•
General o References
- ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD 15
- ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
- ANSI/ARI 550/590-98 o Factory testing
- The chiller shall be factory performance tested under full load conditions in an ARI certified test facility. The manufacture shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified.
Proper ARI certification documents for the test loop shall be made available upon request from the manufacture inspection. The performance test shall be conducted in accordance with ARI Standard
550/590 procedures and tolerances.
- The factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the manufactures company.
Preprinted certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original.
- Equipment manufacture shall not invoice for the chillers(s) until successful completion of the performance test and acceptance by owner. o Warranty and Start-up
- Provide a one year whole unit parts, labor and refrigerant warranty. The warranty shall be provided by the manufacture only.
- Additionally, the motor/compressor/drive assembly shall have a four year extended manufacturer’s parts-only warranty.
- Equipment shall be F.O.B. jobsite.
- Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer to start the unit.
- Provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging of unit.
•
Products o Compressor & Motor
- The unit is equipped with two semi-hermetic, direct-drive,3600 rpm 60 Hz (3000 rpm 50 Hz) rotary compressors that include a load/unload valve, rolling element bearings, oil filtration device and heater.
The motor is a suction gas-cooled, hermetically sealed, two-pole squirrel cage induction motor. Oil separator device is provided separate from the compressor. Check valves in the compressor discharge and lube oil system and a solenoid valve in the lube system are also provided.
- Manufacturers with speed increasing transmissions compressor speeds shall include labor to inspect the gears and bearings annually. A report shall be forwarded to the owner each year over the first five years to confirm completion of the inspection.
- Rotors shall be on high grade steel alloy.
- Chiller sound levels shall be 83 dBA or less. o Evaporator
- Dual circuited, shell and tube falling film evaporator design is used. Seamless internally finned, copper tubes are mechanically expanded into tubes sheets and mechanically fastened to tube supports. Evaporator tubes are 1.0 inch(25>4mm) diameter in standard efficiency chillers and 0.75 inch (19.05mm ) diameter on high and premium efficiency chillers. All tubes can be individually replaced.
- Shells and tubes sheets are made of carbon steel. Designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with
ASME code. The evaporator is designed for refrigerant-side/working-side pressure of 200 psig (13.8 bars).
- All water pass arrangements are available with grooved connections with 150 psig (10.5 bars) waterside working pressure. Waterside shall be hydrostatically tested at 225 psig (15.5 bars). o Condenser
- Dual circuited, shell and tube condenser designed with seamless internally/externally finned tubes expanded into tube sheets and mechanically fastened to tube supports. Condenser tubes are 1.0 inch (25.4mm) diameter on standard efficiency chillers and 0.75 inch (19.05mm) diameter on high and premium efficiency chillers. All tubes can be individually replaced.
- Shells and tubes sheets are made of carbon steel. Designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with
ASME code. The condenser is designed for refrigerant-side/working-side pressure of 300 psig (20.7 bars).
Page 29 of 103

- Water side has single inlet and outlet piping connection. All water pass arrangements are available with grooved connections with 150 psig (10.5 bars)/ waterside working pressure. Waterside shall be hydrostatically tested at 225psig (15.5 bars).
- Standard temperature condenser allow for leaving condenser water temperature up to 105°F (40.6°C) and for entering condenser water temperature up to 95°F (35°C). o Controls
- The microprocessor-based control panel is factory-installed and factory-tested. The control system is powered by pre-wired control power transformer, and will turn on and off compressor to meet the load.
Microprocessor-based chilled water reset based on return water is standard.
- The Trane CH530 microprocessor automatically acts to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with low evaporator refrigerant temperature and high condensing temperature. If abnormal operating condition continues and the protective limit is reached, the machine will shut down.
- The panel included machine protection for the following conditions:
•
Low evaporator refrigerant temperature and pressure
•
High condenser refrigerant pressure
•
Low Oil Flow
•
Critical sensor or detection circuit faults
•
Motor Current overload
•
High compressor discharge temperature
•
Lost communication between modules
•
Electrical distribution faults: phase reversal or over temperature protection
•
External and local emergency stop
•
Starter transition failure
The panel also includes machine protection shutdown with automatic reset for the following correctable conditions
•
Monument power loss
•
Under/over voltage
•
Loss of evaporator or condenser water flow
-
When a fault is detected, the control system conducts more than 100 diagnostic checks and displays results. The display will identify the fault, indicate date, time, and operating mode at a time of occurrence, and provide type of reset required and a help message.
Clear Language Display Panel
Factory-mounted to the control panel door, the operator interface has an LCD touch-screen display for operator input and information output. This interface provides access to the following information: evaporator report, condenser report, compressor report, ASHRAE guidelines 3 report, operator settings, service settings, service tests, and diagnostics. All diagnostics and messages are displayed in clear uncoded language.
Data contained in available reports includes:
•
Water and air temperature
•
Refrigerant pressure and temperatures
•
Oil pressure
•
Flow switch status
•
EXV position
•
Head pressure control command
•
Compressor starts and run-time
•
Line phase percent RLA, amps, and volts
All necessary settings and setpoints are programmed into the microprocessor-based controller via the operator interface. The controller is capable of receiving signals simultaneously from a varity of control sources, in any combination, and priority order of control sources can be programmed. The control source with priority determines active setpoints via the signal it sends to the control panel. Control sources may be:
•
Local operator interface (standard)
•
Hard-wired 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc signal from an external source ( interface optional: control source not supplies)
•
Time of day scheduling (optional capability available from local operator interface)
Page 30 of 103

•
Lon Talk LCI-C (interface optional, control source not supplied) o Starter
The unit is supplied with a UL 1995 indoor type enclosure with top power-wiring access and three-phase, overload protection. The starter is available in a wye-delta or across-the –line configuration, factorymounted and fully pre-wired to the compressor motor and control panel. A factory-installed, factory-wired
820 VA control power transformer provides all unit control power (120 Vac secondary) and Trane CH530 module power (24 Vac secondary). Optional starter features include circuit breaker, high fault panel with circuit breaker, or mechanical, non-fused disconnect. o Options
- Insulation
The evaporator, water boxes, and motor housing are covered with factory installed 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) insulation. Factory installed foam insulation is used on the suction line, liquid level sensor, oil return system assembly (with its associated piping).
- Electrical
Wye-Delta starter
This option provides a reduced-inrush, unit mounted starter with a UL 1995 gasketed enclosure.
Wye-delta starters are standard with 200-300 V machines.
- Non-Fused Disconnect
A non-fused molded case disconnect switch, factory pre-wired with terminal block power connections and equipped with a lockable external operator handle, is available to disconnect the chiller from main power.
3.Performance
Cooling Capacity…………….230 tons
MaxkWT/input………………160.9
EER…….………………….…..17.1
Evaporator
LWT……………………42 DEG F
Flow Rate……………460 GPM
Max WPD……….…….20 Ft
FF…………….…..0.0001
Condenser
EWT…………….…….85 DEG F
Flow Rate…………...690 GPM
Max WPD…………….15 Ft
FF………………0.00025
Electrical………………….460/3/60 V/Ph/Hz
Page 31 of 103

FORM IV
PRICING EXAMPLE: REFRIGERATION/Air-Cooled Screw Chiller
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
-
References
-
ANSI/ARI 550/590
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 15
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
2. Warranty and Start-up
-
Chiller manufacture to provide a one year parts and labor warranty on entire unit including refrigerant
-
Provide an extended four year parts-only warranty for the refrigeration compressor and motor.
-
Price equipment as F.O.B. jobsite
-
Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer to start the unit.
-
Provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging of unit.
3. Product
•
Compressors
-
The rotary screw compressor shall be semi-hermetic, direct drive, 3600 rpm, 60 Hz with capacity control slide valve, a load/unload valve, rolling element bearings, differential refrigerant pressure oil pump and oil heater.
-
The motor shall be suction gas cooled hermetically sealed, two-pole squirrel cage induction motor.
-
Oil separator and filtration devices shall be provided separate from the compressor.
-
Check valves in the compressor discharge and lube oil system and a solenoid valve in the lube system shall also be provided.
•
Evaporator
-
The evaporator shall be a tube-in-shell heat exchanger design with internally and externally finned copper tubes roller expanded into the tube sheet.
-
The evaporator shall be designed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME for a refrigerant side working pressure of 200 psig.
-
The evaporator shall be designed for a water side working pressure of 150 psig.
-
Water connections shall be grooved pipe.
-
Each shell shall include a vent, a drain and fittings for temperature control sensors and shall be insulated with ¾-inch equal insulation (K=0.26).
-
Evaporator heaters with thermostats shall be provided to help protect the evaporator from freezing at ambient temperature down to -20°F.
•
Condenser Coils and Fans
-
Air-cooled condenser coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally finned seamless copper tubing.
-
The condenser coil shall have an integral subcooling circuit.
-
Condensers shall be factory proof and leak tested at 506 psig.
-
Direct-drive vertical discharge condenser fans shall be dynamically balanced.
-
Three-phase condenser fan motors with permanently lubricating ball bearings and internal thermal overload protection shall be provided.
-
Standard units shall start and operate between 25 to 115°F ambient.
•
Casing/Enclosures
-
Units shall be leak and pressure tested at 390 psig high side, 250 psig low side, then evacuated and charged.
-
Unit shall be factory tested prior to shipment.
-
Unit shall ship with a full operating charge of oil and refrigerant.
-
Unit panels, structural elements and control boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel and mounted on a welded structural steel base.
-
Unit panels and control boxes shall be finished with a baked on powder paint, and the structural base with air dry
paint.
Page 32 of 103

•
Refrigerant Circuit
-
Each unit shall have two refrigerant circuits, with one or two rotary screw compressors per circuit.
-
Each refrigerant circuit shall include a compressor suction and discharge service valve, liquid line shutoff valve, removable core filter, liquid line sight glass with moisture indicator, charging port and an electronic expansion valve.
•
Control Panel
-
All unit controls shall be housed in an outdoor rated weather tight enclosure with removable plates to allow for customer connection of power wiring and remote interlocks.
-
All controls, including sensors, shall be factory mounted and tested prior to shipment.
-
Microcomputer controls shall provide all control functions including start-up and shut-down, leaving chilled water temperature control, compressor and electronic expansion valve modulation, fan sequencing, anti-recycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load limiting.
-
Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator freezing, loss of refrigerant pressure, high refrigerant pressure, and reverse rotation, compressor starting and running over current, phase loss, phase imbalance, phase reversal, and loss of oil flow.
-
A digital display shall indicate chilled water setpoint and leaving chilled water temperature as standard.
While current limit setpoint, evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressures, and electrical information are an option.
-
Both standard and optional displays shall be viewed on the unit without opening any control panel doors.
-
Standard power connections shall include main three phase power to the compressors, condensers fans and control power transformer and optional connections shall be available for the 115 volt/60Hz single phase power for freeze protection on the evaporator heaters.
Performance
Cooling Capacity….… .229 Tons
Efficiency........................9.5 EER
LWT………… …………..42 DegF
Flow rate…………......458 GPM
Max WPD……………….20 Ft
FF……………..……0.0001
Ambient…………………95 DegF
Electrical…………460/3/60 V/Ph/Hz
Page 33 of 103

FORM V Omitted
FORM VI
PRICING EXAMPLE: REFRIGERATION/Air-Cooled Scroll Chiller
Price the product based on the following description, Use Form1 for this pricing example
Description:
•
General o Reference
-
ARI Standard 590-92
-
ASME SEC 8
-
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-1994
-
Warranty & Start-up
1. Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant
2. Provide five (5) year parts only warranty on compressor
3. Price equipment as F.O.B. jobsite
4. Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
5. Provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging of unit.
•
Product o Compressors
-
The unit shall be equipped with two or more hermetic, direct-drive, 3600rpm 60 Hz suction gas-cooled scroll compressors.
-
Overload protection shall be internal to the compressor.
-
The compressor shall have compressor heaters installed and properly sized to minimize the amount of liquid refrigerant present in the oil sump during off cycles. o Evaporator
-
Braze plate heat exchanger shall be made of stainless steel with copper as the braze material.
-
It shall be designed to withstand a refrigerant side working pressure of 430 psig and a waterside working pressure of 150 psig.
-
Evaporator shall be tested at 1.1 time’s maximum allowable refrigerant side working pressure and 1.5 times maximum allowable water side working pressure.
-
It shall be one water pass.
-
Immersion heaters are to be provided to protect the evaporator to an ambient of -20°F.
-
The evaporator shall be covered with factory-installed 0.75 inch Armaflex II or equal (k=0.28) Insulation.
Foam insulation can be used on the suction line.
-
Water pipe extensions shall have insulation to go from the evaporator to the edge of the unit. o Condenser
-
Air-cooled condenser coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally-finned copper tubing. The condenser coil shall have an integral subcooling circuit.
-
The maximum allowable working pressure of the condenser shall be 650 psig.
-
Condensers shall be factory proof and leak tested at 715 psig
-
Direct-drive vertical discharge condenser fans shall be balanced.
-
Three=phase condenser fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings and external thermal overload protection shall be provided.
-
Units star and operate from 0°F to 125°F. o Enclosures
-
House components in 12-14 gauge welded galvanized steel frame with minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel panels and weather resistant access doors, phosphatized and finished with air dry paint.
-
Unit paint finish shall be capable of withstanding over 600 consecutive hours of salt spray resistance in accordance with ASTM B117 test method. o Refrigerant Circuit and Capacity Modulation
Page 34 of 103

-
Unit shall have dual refrigerant circuits.
-
Each refrigerant circuit shall have scroll compressors piped in parallel with a passive oil management system.
-
Each refrigerant circuit shall include filter drier, electronic expansion valve, and liquid line and discharge service valves.
-
Capacity modulation shall be achieved by turning compressors on and off.
-
The unit shall have minimum of six capacity stages. o Controls
- The microprocessor-based control panel shall be factory-installed and factory-tested.
-
The control system shall be powered by pre-wired control power transformer, and will turn on and off compressor to meet the load.
-
Microprocessor-based chilled water reset based on return water shall be standard.
- The unit microprocessor shall automatically act to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with low evaporator refrigerant temperature and high condensing temperature. If abnormal operating condition continues and the protective limit is reached, the machine shall shut down.
- The panel shall include machine protection for the following conditions:
•
Low evaporator refrigerant temperature and pressure
•
High condenser refrigerant pressure
•
Critical sensor or detection circuit faults
•
High compressor discharge temperature (with low temp evaporator)
•
Lost communication between modules
•
Electrical distribution faults: phase reversal or over temperature protection
•
External and local emergency stop
•
Loss of evaporator water flow
-
When a fault is detected, the control system shall conduct more than 100 diagnostic checks and displays results. The display will identify the fault, indicate date, time, and operating mode at a time of occurrence, and provide type of reset required and a help message.
-
Provide a factory-mounted control panel door
-
The operator interface shall have an LCD touch-screen display for operator input and information output. This interface shall provide access to the following information: evaporator report, condenser report, compressor report, ASHRAE guidelines 3 report, operator settings, service settings, service tests, and diagnostics. All diagnostics and messages are displayed in “clear language.” Data contained in available reports includes:
•
Water and air temperature
•
Refrigerant pressure and temperatures
•
Flow switch status
•
EXV position
•
Compressor starts and run-time
-
All necessary settings and setpoints shall be programmed into the microprocessor-based controller via the operator interface.
-
The controller shall be capable of receiving signals simultaneously from a varity of control sources, in any combination, and priority order of control sources can be programmed. The control source with priority determines active setpoints via the signal it sends to the control panel. Control sources may be:
•
Local operator interface (standard)
•
Hard-wired 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc signal from an external source ( interface optional: control source not supplies)
•
Time of day scheduling (optional capability available from local operator interface)
•
Lon Talk LCI-C (interface optional, control source not supplied)
•
BACNet (interface optional; control source not supplied)
•
Trane Tracer Summit system (interface optional; control source not supplied)
Performance
Cooling Capacity………..119.2 Tons
Page 35 of 103

Efficiency………………….10.3 EER
LWT…………………………..42 Deg F
EWT…………………………..54 Deg F
Max WPD…………………….10 Ft
FF………………………..0.0001
Ambient………………………95 DEG F
Electrical………………460/3/60 V/Ph/Hz
FORM VII
PRICING EXAMPLE: REFRIGERATION/Packaged Central Plant
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
1. GENERAL a. The following specifications details the minimum requirements for equipment and structure for a complete factoryassembled Packaged Central Plant. b. The Packaged Central Plant shall be factory-fabricated, tested, and delivered to the jobsite by the manufacturer as a complete unit (or in individual modules for field-reassembly) containing all of the items listed below. Field fabrication of the
Packaged Central Plant is not acceptable. c. The packaged Central Plant manufacturer shall utilize an adaptive control logic that optimizes central plant performance while minimizing power (kW) input. The manufacturer shall assume control and unit responsibility to include the following. i) Sequence chillers and cooling towers ii) iii)
Sequence chilled water pumps and control pump speed via Variable Frequency Drives.
Control cooling tower fan speed via Variable Frequency Drives. iv) Control chilled water and cooling tower bypass valves.(optional-depending on ambient design conditions).
2 . PROPOSAL REQUIRMENTS a. The successful packaged central plan manufacturer shall have the following minimum subtotals included with the proposal. If these items are not provided with the proposal, then the proposal may be rejected. i ) Chiller Selection(s) Rated in Accordance with ARI 550/590. Acceptable Refrigerants on which chiller performance is based are: HCFC-123, HFC-134a. All proposals for chiller performance must include an ARI approved selection method for the specified refrigerants. ii) Electric Load List displaying the kW Constructed by Each Package Component and the total System Efficiency
Expressed in kW/ton (including packaged and distributed CHW pumping loads). iii) iv) v)
Packaged Footprint & Elevation Dimensions
Equipment Delivery Schedule
Complete List of Exceptions to Specifications vi) Complete Description of Package Capability & Any Applicable performance guarantees
3 . EQUIPMENT SCOPE OF SUPPLY
a. The packaged central Plant shall be design for the refrigeration capacity, temperature, flow rates, and total
dynamic head as required. i) STRUCTURAL STEEL BASE
(1) The steel base shall consist of a structural steel perimeter with intermediate structural steel members at a minimum height of 8”.
(2) Skid (base of the industrial grade enclosure) shall be constructed of structural steel members sized by structural design calculations and reinforced to meet or exceed specified loads. Structural steel skid members shall be located to facilitate the mounting of the plant major equipment. Mounting of plant major equipment to deck plate is not permitted.
(3) Skid base shall have four (4) lifting trunions( per plant module) designed to lift the plant modules with the maximum bending moment of a simply supported beam to based on L/240. Trunions shall be located to maintain each plant module within fifteen (15) degrees of horizontal when lifted with a single spreader bar on a single crane hook point. These trunions shall be designed in accordance with ASME B30.20, the latest edition.
(4) Each outside longitudinal structural steel skid member shall have a minimum of one (1) jack bolt per anchor bolt hole. The jack bolt shall be used for leveling the Plant on the Purchaser concrete slab (or structure).
(5) Floor shall be minimum of ¼ steel diamond plate. All interior floors are to be factory coated.
(6) Standard Coating System Steel surfaces shall be prepared free of sharp edges, burrs, weld spatter, and indentations prior to surface preparation by grit blasting. For standard service, the surface shall be cleaned and blasted to man SSPC-SP-6 Commercial blast with steel grit or appropriate media which prevents residue
Page 36 of 103

remaining on the steel. The blast shall produce an anchor profile of no less than 1.0 mil, preferably 1.5 to 2.5 mils.
No coating shall be permitted to be applied over scale, rust, oil, grit, or other foreign matter. One (1) coat of Ameron
PSX70 Siloxane Epoxy coating shall be applied within four hours of the surface preparation. Coating application shall be such that the total Dry Film Thickness of the system shall be an average of 4-6 mils (max 7). Manufacturer’s instructions for coating conditions (temperature/humidity) and drying time shall be strictly adhered to.
Repair and touch –up of coating damage shall be completed by cleaning of the area to be prepared surface and feathering the secured coating surface for application of fresh coating. A fresh coating of Ameron PSX700 Siloxane ii)
Epoxy shall be applied to the prepared area with a brush or roller.
INDUSTRIAL GRADE ENCLOSURE
(1) As much mechanical and electrical equipment as feasible, without compromising reasonable maintenance access, shall be housed inside a factory fabricated industrial grade enclosure. The enclosure shall be assembled from prefabricated panels on a fabricated support structured by the dame manufacturer as the steel base, pipe work, and pipe supports to ensure structural integrity of the entire Packaged Central Plant.
Future removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the enclosure and shall not require flame and/ or saw cutting. The enclosure systems shall also provide all utilities required to support the various functions and services of the plant including: o Overhead Light fixtures indoor and outdoor (as required) and convenience power outlets o Air conditioning (as required),heating(as required) & ventilation system (per ASHRAE Standard 15) for safety and environmental control o Service support devices and equipment including: monorail and hoist blocks to lift pump motors and other components for replacement or service. o Access doors, panels and ladders as required. o Safety devices including: fair extinguisher, emergency lights, refrigerant leak detection/ alarm system.
The enclosure shall be designed such that after factory completion of fabrication of assembly splitting the enclosure to its main modular subassemblies shall involve breaking bolted structural joints, wire connections at junction boxes and/ or piping connections and fangled or grooved joints.
(2) Wall & Roof Structural Framing Designed and Fabrication
Wall and roof framing shall be constructed of welded structural steel members designed to meet or exceed specified loads. Structural members shall be located to avoid interference with the plant equipment, fixtures and piping.
Framing shall be able to withstand a wind loading , earthquake load, and snow load prescribed above.
(3) Prefabricated Roofing & Exterior Wall Panels
(a) Roof panels
Roof paneling material shall be insulated, minimum 1.5 – inch thick.
(b) Exterior wall panels
Exterior wall paneling material shall be insulated, minimum 2- inch thick 26 Ga. interior and exterior metal facers.
Insulation “R – value” shall be no less than 16.0.
(C) Panel Design
(I) The panels shall be completely prefabricated in the factory using pre-coated, precision roll-formed steel faces chemically bonded to foamed in place rigid modified foam core.
(ii) The panel joint shall be concealed fastener design with an offset shiplap or tongue-in-groove joint that allows both panel faces to be mechanically attached to supports as required.
(iii) Trim and flashing shall be formed sheet metal that is equal in thickness and finish to that furnished for the panel faces. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel, stainless steel clad, aluminum or cast zinc-aluminum alloy painted to match adjacent colors.
(iv) Weather sealants shall be a silicone based material with excellent adhesion and cohesion properties and shall have a service temperature range of -80° F to 300°F.
(v) Field applied vapor barrier sealant in the panel joints shall be a butyl-based material that is non-skinning, non-drying, resealable, and shall have a service temperature range of -60° F to 250°F.
(vi) Panels clips shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel and concealed in the panel joint.
(4) All interiors and exterior panels are to be factory painted. Enclosure paint shall have weather resistant finish that will withstand 500-hour exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117.
(5) Ventilation louver and damper: install stationary, storm proof louver and motorized damper for forced ventilations of the enclosure as shown on the drawings. Louver shall be 6 inch deep with extruded aluminum blades and frame
Page 37 of 103

and 19 gauge galvanized 1/2” X ½” bird screen. Damper blades shall be 4 inches deep, thermally broken with high- density polyurethane CFC injected insulation. Air leakage through a 48” X 48” damper shall not exceed 10.5 cfm/ft2 against 4” w.g. differential static pressure @ standard air. Operating temperature range shall be - 40°F to +200° F. supply an actuator to modulate the damper open or close.
(6) Exhaust fan: install exhaust fans for forced ventilation of the enclosure as shown on the drawing sized in accordance with the requirements of ASHARAE Standard 15 for refrigerant evacuation and interlock with the refrigerant monitoring/ alarm panel and the ventilation damper actuator. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fastness. Fan shall be enclosed in minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel wall housing with factory installed shutter and inlet guard.
(7) Air-Conditioning: the plant shall be fully Air-Conditioned (Cooling and Healing) based on package load requirements, consisting of a one-piece wall-mounted, factory-assembled, pre-charged, prewired, tested and ready
–to-operate air conditioner unit(s). The units shall be approved and listed by UL/CUL for installation on combustible surfaces fir zero-clearance between the unit and wall. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI
Standard 210/240-94 for Unitary Air-conditioners or latest standard
(8) Refrigerant Leak Monitoring System iii)
(a) Follow minimum standards for refrigeration systems as required by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15, especially requirements for air monitoring, ventilation, and for leak detection.
(b) Install local exhaust at relief device discharge headers and purge units. Route exhaust to the outside of the building and away from all air intakes,
(c) Install a refrigerant monitor that is calibrated for refrigerant, capable of detecting concentrations for low-level leak detection and for insuring the safety of operators.
(d) Refrigerant Monitor concentration output shall be integrated into the central plant control system.
(e) Install suitable audible and/or visual alarm that activate well below the Acceptable Exposure Level (AEL), of the refrigerant and alert persons inside and outside of the equipment room that a leak condition exists.
(f) Floor drains & Drip Lip- Floor drains shall be sized to conform to the information indicated on the Drawings or contained elsewhere in these Specifications. Extreme care shall be used to set the elevation of the drain to meet the low point elevation of the finished floor. Provide hard-piped drains to the exterior of the skid, where such drains can be routed to facility waste system.
(g) Service ladders- Service ladders shall be fabricated and installed to enable access to elevated equipment within the Plant enclosure. In addition, Manufacture to furnish and install catwalks as required for servicing and inspecting elevated equipment. Catwalks shall be constructed of galvanized steel grating
(h) Access Panels-Access panels or hatches shall be provide to enable inspection and maintenance of difficult to reach items such as oil pumps, oil filters, etc.
(i) Service Hoists and Davits- A structural steel monorail shall be provide above all pumps. A minimum of one
“chain fall” per plant shall be provided that it is sized for the maximum anticipation service load (and not less than ½ ton).
(j) Fire Extinguishers-Manufacturer shall supply and install inside the plant enclosure one (1) 15 lb portable fire extinguisher at the entry and egress point of the Plant.
WATER COOLED CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER SPECIFICATION
(1) Centrifugal Chiller Specifications
(a) SECTION INCLUDES
(I) Chiller package
(ii) Charge of refrigerant and oil
(iii) Controls and control connections
(iv) Chilled water connections
(v) Condenser water connections
(vi) Auxiliary water connections
(vii) Starters
(Viii) Electrical power connections
Page 38 of 103

(d)
(b)
(ix) Heat recovery
(x) free cooling
REFERENCES
(i) ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD 15-1994-safty Code for mechanical Refrigeration.
(ii) ANSI/ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
(iii) ASME SEC VII-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
(iv) ANSI/ UL 465-Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
(v) ARI STANDARD 550/590-2003-Centrifugal, helical rotary, scroll, and reciprocating
water chillers.
(vi) ARI Standard 575-94 Sound
(vii) AFBMA 9 –Load Ratings and Fatigue Life of Roller Bearings.
(c)
(viii) ASHRAE STANDARD 34- Number designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants
VARIABLE EVAPORATION FLOW CAPABILITY
(i) All chillers applied in a variable evaporator flow (VPF) shall be able to withstand a chilled water flow rate-of – change of twenty five percent (25%) per minute while maintaining plus or minus two (+/-2) of design supply chilled water temperature and fifty percent (50%) per minute at any load above the compressor minimum without cycling off on low load (low leaving water temperature) or evaporator refrigerant temperature limit.
(ii) The chiller manufacturer shall be responsible to validate through an operating demonstrate chiller operational stability to the facility owner or his agent with flows varying up to 30% per minute during chiller system commissioning. The chiller manufacturer shall have a chiller technician present along with the owner agent and control system representative during this testing. If the chiller does not pass the validation it shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor and chiller manufacturer to modify the chiller and/ or chiller system to provide reliable operation with system flow rates- of- exchange of up to 30% per minute.
(iii) As in alternative to on-site verification the chiller shall be equipped from the chiller manufacturer with flow monitoring that shall provide feed-forward and auto-tuning control input to the chiller compressor capacity control. As flow changes are detected, the feed- forward logic shall work in concert with the water temperature control algorithms to initiate change and compressor capacity proportional to the flow and resultant load change.
In addition the change in flow shall cause the capacity controller to tune its control loop PID loop gains for best accuracy and stability.
REGULATORY REQUIRMENTS
(I) Conform to ARI Standard 550/590-98 Code for rating and testing of water chillers
(ii) Conform to UL 1995 for Safety for Heating and Cooling Equipment.
(iii) Conform to ANSI/ASME SECTION VIII Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of
centrifugal chiller as applicable.
(iv) Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD 15-1994 code for construction and operation of centrifugal
chillers.
Page 39 of 103

(g)
(e)
(v) Unit shall bear the ARA Certification Label for Water Chillers as applicable.
COMPRESSOR AND MOTOR
(i) The compressor shall centrifugal
(ii) Chiller should be able to unload to 20% of design tonnage with constant entering water temperature.
(iii) Compressor assembly shall be run-tested at the factory. Vibration shall not exceed 0.15 inches per
second. The test data shall be recorded and provided to the customer in report form for approval.
(iv) The motor shall be hermetic and either suction or liquid refrigerant cooled.
(v) The impellers shall be fully shrouded and made oaf high strength aluminum alloy. Impellers shall be
(f)
dynamically balanced and over speed test at 1.25 times impeller shaft speed.
EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER
(i) The evaporator and condenser shall be built in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigerant. The water piping connections shall be Victaulic-grooved.
(ii) Evaporator and condenser tubes shall be internally enhanced. The minimum tube wall thickness shall be
025”.
(iii) Units with multi-stage compressors shall incorporate an inter-stage flash vessel “economizer” All units with single stage compressors shall have the condensers circuited for liquid sub cooling and be provided with a thermometer well to monitor the amount of sub cooling.
(iv) Supply and return head water boxes shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi and shall be factory hydrostatic pressure tested at 150 percent of the design pressure. Provide drain and vent connections in water boxes.
(v) if marine water boxes are required, side connections shall provide such that the water piping of both the entering and leaving sides shall not be disconnected for mechanical cleaning. The water piping connections shall not be in a direction perpendicular to the shells to allow full unblocked access to the tubes.
(vi) Insulation will be 3/4” Armaflex insulation and cover all low temperature surfaces to include the evaporator, water, boxes, and suction elbow. Economizer is insulated with 3/8” Armaflex insulation.
PURGE SYSTEM
(i) The manufactures of low pressure machines, must provide a purge system.
(ii) The purge efficiency must meet ASHRAE Guidelines 3-1996 paragraph 4.4.1.1.
Page 40 of 103

(h)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(iii) The purge shall be capable of operating when the chiller is idle in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 3-
1996, paragraph 4.4.1.2.
CHILLER CONTROLS
(i) The chiller shall be controlled by a stand-alone direct PLC System. A dedicated chiller microprocessor control panels is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer.
(ii) The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller modules, sensors, actuators, relays and switches and shall include control to safety and efficiency operate the chiller.
(iii) Safeties- the chiller control panel shall monitor the following safeties: start running time between compressor/motor starts, low chilled water temperature, low evaporator refrigerant temperature or pressure, high condenser refrigerant pressure, evaporator and condenser water flow status, low oil pressure, low oil temperature, high oil temperature, high motor winding temperatures, sensor faults, and proper operation of unit controls.
1. To monitor bearing temperatures, all of the compressor and motor bearing, (including high speed, low speed, and thrust bearing) shall have factory installed separate temperature sensors installed in the bearing of the oil return lines of each bearing. If any oil temperature reaches or exceeds a set value, the chiller control panels shall shut down the chiller, display the diagnostic, and activate the front panel alarm indicator.
2. The chiller control panel or starter shall incorporate advanced motor protection to safeguard the motor throughout the starting ad running cycles from the adverse effects of:
3. Current Phase Loss
4. Current Phase Unbalance
5. Current Phase reversal
6. Under/Over voltage
7. Motor current overload
8. Momentary power loss protection with auto restart consisting of three-phase current sensing devices that monitor the status of the current.
9. Starter contractor fault protection
10. Starter transition failure
The chillier control panel shall be capable of displaying system data in English or metric units.
The chiller control panel is to be provided with a starts counter and running time counter.
The front of the chiller control panel shall display the following in clear language, without the use of codes, look-up tables, or gauges:
1. Entering and Leaving evaporator water temperatures
2. Entering and Leaving condenser water temperatures
3. Compressor motor Winding Temperature 1,2,3
4. Saturated evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures
5. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressure
6. Oil temperature
7. Oil Tank pressure
8. Oil pump discharge pressure
9. Differential oil pressure
10. Compressor motor starts and running hours
11. Compressor motor current, by phase
12. Compressor motor percent RLA
Page 41 of 103

Iv
13. Chilled water set point and set point source
14. Purge operating mode
15. Purge operating status
16. Time until next purge run
17. Daily pump-out 24 hours
18. Avg. daily pumpout- 7 Days
19. Chiller on - 7 Days
20. Pumpout Chiller on 7-Days
21. Pumpout Chiller off-7 Days
22. Pumpout – Life
23. Refrigeration- Life
24. Purge Refrigerant Compressor Suction Temp
25. Purge Liquid Temp (Chiller Con Sat Rfgt Temp)
26. Pumpout Time Since Last Regeneration
27. Purge carbon tank temperature
28. Time at last Regeneration
29. Pumpout Total at Last Regeneration
30. Daily Pumpout limit/Alarm
31. Absorptive capacity
32. Carbon Regen Cycles
33. Electrical current limit set point and set point source
34. Current chiller operating mode
35. Equipment room refrigerant monitor ppm levels
36. Compressor motor voltage, by phase, KW, power factor
(vii) The chiller control panel shall provide evaporator freeze protection and low limit control to avoid low evaporator refrigerant temperature trip-outs during critical periods of chiller operation. Whenever this control is in effect, the panel will automatically indicate that the chiller is in adaptive mode and if the condition exists for more than 30 seconds, a limit warning alarm relay shall energize.
(viii) The chiller control panel shall provide individual relay outputs to start/stop the evaporator and condenser water pumps. The condenser water pump relay output can be used to enable the cooling tower temperature controls.
(ix) The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output that shall energize whenever the compressor is running.
(x) The chiller control panel shall provide an alarm relay output that shall energize whenever a fault requiring manual reset is detected by the panel.
(xi) The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output that shall energize whenever the chiller id operating at maximum capacity.
(xii) The chiller control panel shall provide a head relief request relay output to indicate that the chiller is in condenser limit mode and thereby requesting condenser water temperature relief.
(xiii) The Chiller control panel shall provide an analog output signal that shall indicate the Compressor motor Percent RLA.
(xiv) The chiller control panel shall provide an analog output signal that shall indicate the condenser refrigerant pressure or condenser/evaporator differential refrigerant pressure.
(xv) The chiller control panel shall provide condenser limit control to include a pressure transducer and interconnecting piping and wiring. This control shall be used to avoid high condenser refrigerant pressure tripouts. The control shall take action in response to the condenser refrigerant pressure. Whenever this control is in effect, the panel will automatically indicate that the chiller is in adaptive mode and if the condition exists for more than 30 seconds, a limit warning alarm relay shall energize.
(xvi) As standard, the chiller control panel shall provide leaving chilled water temperature reset based upon return water temperature.
COOLING TOWER
Galvanized, Induced Draft, Counter flow Tower
Page 42 of 103

(a)The Package Central Plant manufacturer shall furnish a factory assembled and tested, open circuit, induced draft counterflow cooling tower per the design conditions on the performance schedule.
(b) Submittals
(i) Certified drawings of the cooling tower, sound data, recommended steel support indicating weight loadings, wiring diagrams, installation instructions, operation and maintenance instructions, and thermal performance guarantee by the manufacturer.
(c)Quality Assurance
(i) Verification of performance
1. Test and certify cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI Standard 201.
2. Test and certify cooling tower sound performance according to CTI ATC-128.
(ii) Meet or Exceed energy efficiency per ASHRAE 90.1.
(d) Warranty
(i)
(ii)
Motor/Drive System: Five (5) year compressive warranty against materials and workmanship including motor, fan bearings mechanical support, sheaves, bushings and belt.
Unit: one (1) year from start-up, not to exceed eighteen (18) months from shipment on the unit.
(e) Materials
(i) Galvanized Sheet Steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653/M and having g-235 designation.
(f) Induce-Draft. Counterflow Cooling Towers
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Description: Factory assembled and tested, induced draft counterflow cooling tower complete with fill, louvers, accessories, and rigging supports.
Cooling Tower Characteristics and Capacities: Refer to the Cooling Tower schedule.
Fan(s):
(iv)
1. Type and material: Axel propeller, individually adjustable wide chord blade extruded aluminum installed in a closely fitted cowl with venturi air inlet for maximum efficiency. Covered with a heavy gauge hot dipped galvanized fan guard.
2. Type and Material: Axial propeller, one piece heavy duty FRP hub and blade Construction. Galvanized steel closely fitted fan cowl with venture air inlet for maximum fan efficiency, covered with a heavy gauge hot dip galvanized steel fan guard.
Water distribution system-: Non corrosive material.
1. Evenly distribute of water over fill material with pressurized spray tree. a. Pipes: Scheduled 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Non-Corrosive Materials. b. Nozzles: Non-clogging, ABS Plastic, Threaded into branch piping.
(v) Collection Basin Material: Galvanized steel
1. Removable stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.
2. Joints: Bolted and sealed watertight or welded.
Page 43 of 103

V)
3. Overflow, makeup and slide drain connections
4. Flume plate between cells (for multiple-cell units) or Equalizer connection (for multiple-
(v) cooling-tower system).
Casing: galvanized steel
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
1. The casing panels shall totally encase the sides of the fill media to protect the fill from damage due to direct atmospheric contact.
2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistance equal to or better than materials being fastened.
3. Joints: sealed watertight.
4. Welded Connections: Connections and watertight.
Fill Media:PVC; resistant to rot, decay and biological attack; formed, cross fluted, bonded together for strength and durability in block format for easy removal and replacement; suitable for use as a working surface; self-extinguishing with flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-81a; able to withstand continuous operating temperature of 130 F; and fabricated, formed and installed by the manufacturer to ensure water breaks up into droplets.
Drift Eliminators: Same material as Fill. 0.001% draft rate.
Air Inlet Louver Screens: Formed PVC mounted in G-235 galvanized steel frames for easy removal; designed “Sight Tight” to completely block direct sunlight from entering and water from splashing out of the cooling tower.
Water Level Control: Brass mechanical makeup water valve and plastic float with an adjustable linkage. (ix)
(g) Motors and Drives
(i) Enclosure Type: TEAO or TEFC
(iv)
(ii) Motor Speed: VFD Duty, 2-speed
(ii) Drive: Power Band Belt designed for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower.
1. Belt: Multi-groove, solid back V-belt type neoprene reinforced with polyester cord.
2. Sheaves: Aluminum alloy if located inside the airstream.
3. Bearings: Heavy duty, self-aligning pillow block bearings with lubrication lines extended to side access door. Minimum L 10 life for bearing shall be 75,000 hours. Provide extended grease lines and fittings.
4. Vibration Cutout Switch: Mechanical switch to de-energize fan motors if excessive vibration in NEMA 4 enclosure.
Maintenance Access
(i)Internal Working/Service Platforms: Provide a complete internal working platform and ladder system for service of all drive components. A suitable working platform may be constructed of the fill media for counterflow cooling towers. If a crossflow tower is used to provide an internal walkway with ladder and elevated working platform to allow for service and maintenance to motor and drive assembly.
(ii)Handrails/Grabrails: Galvanized steel pip complying with 29 CFR 1910.23. If access to fan deck is required, supply a perimeter handrail with ladder from grade to fan deck.
(iii)Ladders: Aluminum, sloped “ship Type” with grab rail or vertical complying with 29 CFR 1910.27.
COOLING TOWER SUPPORT STRUCTURE
1. General
Page 44 of 103

Provide pre-engineered, prefabricated, heavy-duty, industrial grade steel structure to provide support, mounting and service platform to the cooling tower. The steel supporting structure for the cooling tower shall also support the cooling water piping loads to and from the tower. The structure shall include integral pipe supports for cooling tower piping as required.
Platform with grating shall be provided as minimum on one side of cooling tower. A caged ladder with self closing safety gates shall be provided (expected where stairs are provided). Personnel access egress shall be compliant with OSHA requirements.
Provide continuous decking between cooling towers so that a single climb will provide access to all cooling tower cells per site. All platforms more than 6 feet above grade shall be equipped with toe, knee, and hand rails. Provide at least one ladder per structure. Design and fabrication shall be in accordance with AISC 335 and/or 350.
2. Base plates and Anchor Rods
Base Plates shall be designed in accordance with AISC ASD. Each anchor rod shall be equipped with a leveling nut.
Provide minimum 2” grout space to allow for installing and “leveling nuts” under the base plate. Grouting of base plates shall be completed prior to placing loads on the structure. Anchor rods, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM F 1554
Grade 55. They shall be hot-dip galvanized in conformance with ASTM 153.
(3) Platform Framing
(a) The Steel structure supporting the cooling tower shall be designed according to the requirements of the latest editions of AISC, UBC, and ASCE.
(b) Design calculation shall be based on the operating loads supplied by cooling tower manufacturer and must include an allowance for wind and other lateral loads. For 3D-model generation, analysis and design shall use STAAD-Pro structural engineering software with appropriate code checking for each member. Complex parts and connections shall be designed using Finite Element Method (FEM).
(c) Fabrication tolerances for structural steel shall be held within limits established by ASTM A6, by Section 7, Code of
Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges, and by Standard Mill Practice – General Information (AISC ASD Manual,
Ninth Edition, Page 1-145 or LRFD manual, Second Edition, Page 1- 183)
(d) Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 Welds shall be made only by welders and welding operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in AWS D1.1 to perform type of work required.
(e) High-strength bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than proof load given in Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. Tightening shall be done with properly calibrated wrenches, by turn-of-nut method or by use of direct tension indicators (bolts or washers). Tighten bolts in connections identified as slip-critical using Direct Tension Indicators or the turn-of-the-nut method. Twist-off torque bolts are not an acceptable alternate fastener for slip critical connections.
(4) Platform Grating
1 ¼” x 3/16” galvanized grating shall be provided all around the cooling tower for maintenance and access. Galvanized angle iron handrails shall be provided.
(5) Finish
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for galvanizing according to
ASTM A 123.
VI) PUMPS AND MOTORS
(1) Furnish and install, as outlined on the equipment schedule and described in these specifications, a double suction vertical split-case centrifugal pump(s) designed to deliver the schedules flow rate at the specified total dynamic head
(in feet). Each pump is equipped with the following ancillaries
(a) Suction and Discharge Isolation Valve
Page 45 of 103

(b) Discharge Check Valve
(c) Suction and Discharge Pressure Gage w/Instrument Valve
(d) Suction Diffuser
(e) Drain & Vent Valves connected to skid package drain system
(f) . Located with a drip containment area
Expansion Tank vii)
The packaged central plant manufacturer shall furnished and install an adequately-sized ASME Pre-charged Bladder Expansion tank, stamped, 125 psi working pressure. Each tank will be supplied with a heavy duty butyl replaceable bladder. Tank shall be supplied with a ring base, lifting and NPT system connection. An air changing valve connection (standard tire valve) shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pressure to meet actual system conditions.
Viii) AIR SEPORATOR
(1) Primary Purpose- The System will remove unwanted solids from a cooling tower sump or remote basin using a centrifugal-action vortex separator. The liquid-solids separation system will help prevent particle fouling of the cooling system’s components reduce maintenance and servicing routines, maintain optimum energy efficiency of the heat exchange process, limit blow down & chemical use practices and control harmful bacteria growth in the basin/sump.
Fluid viscosity must be 100 SSU or less.
(2) Testing Requirements
(a) Each unit must be tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment to ensure it conforms to stand operating specifications.
(b) Independent Testing Laboratory-Performance of said products must be verified by published results from an independent and identified testing laboratory. Standard test protocol of upstream injection, downstream capture, and separator purge recovery is allowed with 50-200 mesh particles to enable effective, repeatable results.
Single pass test performance must not be less than 95% removal. Model tested must be of same flow-design as specified unit.
(3) Performance
(a) Pressure Loss- Shall be between 3-12 psi (.2 to .8 bar) remaining constant, varying only when the flow rate changes.
(b) Solids Removal Effectiveness
In a single pass through the separator. Given solids with a specific gravity of 2.6 and water at 1.0, performance is expected to be 98% of 74 microns and larger. Additionally, particles finer in size, heavier by specific gravity and some lighter by specific gravity will also be removed, resulting in an appreciable aggregate removal of particles
(up to 75%) as fine as 5 microns.
(c) Maximum working pressure: 100 psi (6.9 bar)
(d) Maximum operating temperature: 100°F (38°C).
(e) HydroBooster- Each Hydrobooster shall be capable of increasing its input flow, at 20psi (1.4 bar) or more, to six times greater output flow without abrasive wear to the HydroBooster, thereby providing the proper directed turbulence to prevent troublesome solids accumulation and induce separable solids to the separator package’s pump suction. Required submergence shall be as 2-3 inches (50-75mm).
(4) Construction
(a) The separator package-Shall provide for initial pre-straining prior to pump suction (except for side-stream applications), followed by direct pumping through a specific centrifugal-action solids-from –liquid separator and immediate return of flow to the Hydro Boosters (basin-cleaning applications) or system flow (side-stream applications). Separated solids shall be continuously bled from the separator’s collection chamber into the package’s Integral solids recovery vessel and solids collection bag Excess liquid shall pass through the bag and return to system flow via piping connected to the package’s pump suction line. Alternatively, the separated solids may be purged periodically to desired disposal with an automatic purge valve.
(b) Strainer- Cast-iron housing; manual-cleaning; 9/32-inch (7mm) minimum mesh rating; stainless steel basket.
(c) Pump- End-suction, single stage; TEFC motor, cast iron housing; iron impeller; bronze shaft sleeve; silicon carbide mechanical shaft seal; flooded suction required.
(d) Separator- Centrifugal-action design, incorporating a true tangential inlet and mutually tangential Swirlex internal accelerating slots, employed to promote the proper velocity necessary for the removal of the separable solids.
Page 46 of 103

(IX)
The internal accelerating slots shall be spiral-cut for optimum flow transfer, laminar action and particle influence into the separation barrel. The separator’s internal vortex shall allow this process to occur without wear to the accelerating slots. Separated particle matter shall spiral downward along the perimeter of the inner separation barrel, in a manner which does not promote wear of the separation barrel, and into the solids collection chamber, located below the vortex deflector plate. The separator shall be of unishell construction with SA-36, SA-53B or equivalent quality carbon steel, minimum thickness of .25 inches (6.35mm).
(e) Vortube- to ensure maximum particle removal characteristics at flow rates of 400 U.S. gpm (90m3/hr) or greater, the separator shall incorporate a vortex-induced pressure relief line (Vortube), drawing specific pressure and fluid from the separator’s extended solids collection chamber via the outlet flow’s vortex/venture effect. Thereby efficiently encouraging solids into the collection chamber. System fluid shall exit the separator by following the center vortex in the separation barrel and spiral upward to the separator outlet.
(f) Solids Collection Vessel-Housing shall be 304 stainless steel with stainless steel basket and coated carbon steel lid with air pressure relief valve; 25-micron fiber felt solids collection bag. Flow control orifice included. Solids capacity: 360 cubic inches (6 liters).
(g) Indicator Package- Shall, identify when the internal bag requires cleaning/replacement by sensing pressure differential through the solids recovery vessel.
(h) Inlet and Outlet- Shall be grooved couplings
(i) Purge Outlet- Shall be threaded with a screw-on flange
(j) Piping- Schedule 40 galvanized carbon steel; reinforced rubber hose to solids recovery vessel.
(k) Electrical Control- IEC starter with overload module; HOA selector switch; NEMA-4x enclosure; reset/disconnect/trip switch; 120 volt, single phase control voltage; CSA-approved. Power requirement:
208/230/460/575 volt. 3 phase. 60 Hz; or 380/415 volt. 3 phase. 50 Hz.
(l) Valves- Ball valves on purge line for isolation of solids-handling/purging equipment. Optimal inlet/outlet valve kit is available (globe valve on outlet of TCI-0065 only).
(m) Skid Plate- Stainless steel, 3/16-onch (5mm) minimum thickness, structural steel framework on TCI-0825 and larger units.
(n) Paint Coating-Shall be oil-based enamel.
(5) Purging and Solids Handling
(a) Evacuation of separated solids may be accomplished automatically, employing a motorized ball valve with integrally-equipped programming for controlling the frequency and duration of solids purging.
(b) As an alternative to automatic purging, separated solids may be continuously purged under controlled flow into a
Solids Recovery vessel equipped with a solids collection bag. Excess liquid shall pass through the bag and return to system flow via piping connected to the system pump’s suction line. The system shall include an air/pressure relief line for the vessel. System also includes manual isolation valves for use when servicing the collection bag; sight glasses for verification of flow through the vessel; annunciator for indicating when the collector bag needs cleaning/replacement; flow orifice to minimize fluid volume/velocity through the vessel and collector bag.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEM FOR CONDENDER WATER SYSTEM
(1) Scope- System will provide automatic chemical feed and blown down for a cooling tower system. Inhibitor to be fed automatically (4 methods) , Dual biocide timers, safety flow switch. pH, ORP control, 4 metering pumps ( inhibitor, 2 biocides and acid/alkali); activated relay for bleed.
(a) Components
((i) Controller
1. 4 inhibitor feed options: water meter contractor, % bleed, % time, feed and bleed.
2. pH control: -2 to 16pH units ( can be turned off if not needed)
3. Dual programmable Biocides
4. Communications: a. Ethernet for LAN connections b. USB plug-n-play for local laptop communications
Page 47 of 103

(x) c. Internal analog modem d. SMTP- email for sending alarms, reports or data logs e. Modbus TCP for seamless integration with building energy management, distributed control, process management and SCADA systems.
5. Safety flow switch to deactivate system on no-flow to controller
6. Enclosure: Fiberglass NEMA 4 enclosure with locking hasp
7. Power: 115 VAC, 50/60Hz, 60mA
8. Pressure rating: 100psi
9. Temperature range: 32°F-158°F
(ii) Electronic meeting Pumps
1. Flow Rate: 24gpd, manual speed adjustment form 1-360 spm
2. 3 each with VC end (manual air vent for priming)
3. 1 each with VC end (auto air vent for degassing head)
4. Pressure Rating: 105 psi ( except for one pump with auto air vent, rated at 80 psi)
5. Electrical: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 Watts avg/pump
6. Liquid End material: PVC
7. Temperature Range: 32°F-122°F
8. Tubing Provided: 3/8” polyethylene tubing discharge, 3/8” black UV stabilized suction tubing (10ft), with foot valves.
PIPE, PIPE SUPPORT, AND PIPING INSULATION
(1) All pipe used in the packaged central plant manufacturer shall be fabricated in accordance with this specification.
Grooved mechanical connections are acceptable for chiller piping connections and at package shipping splits in order to accommodate piping thermal growth, vibration isolation, and minor pipe offset.
(2)Unless otherwise indicated chilled water and condenser water shall be schedule 40 for pipe smaller than 12” and standard weight for 12” and larger. All pipes shall conform to Standard ASTM Designation A53 grade A53 or B. All weld fittings shall conform to ASME/ANSI B16.9, latest edition.
(3) Pipe welding shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.9 and ANSI/ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX. Ensure complete penetration of base metal with weld metal. Manufacture shall provide filler metal suitable for use with base metal. Keep inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal.
(4) In no cases shall Schedule 40 or standard weight pipe be welded with less than three passes including one stringer/root, one filler and one lacer.
(5) Each weld shall be uniform in width and size throughout its full length. In addition, the cover pass (final weld layer) shall be free of coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps, abrupt ridges and valleys/undercut. The surface smoothness of the finished weld shall be suitable for the proper interpretation of non-destructive examination of the weld.
(6) Each weld layer or pass shall be visually free of slag, inclusions, cracks, porosity and lack of fusion. Grinding to meet this criteria and elimination of defects and surface preparation of welds shall be done in a manner as not to gouge, groove, or reduce the adjacent base material thickness below the minimum required.
(7) All but welds shall be full penetration with uniform crown, with reinforcement blending smoothly into the base material.
Concavity on the root side of a single welded circumferential butt weld is permitted with the resulting thickness of the weld at least equal to the thickness of the thinner member of the sections being joined.
(8) Socket welds shall have a gap of approximately 1/16” minimum to 1/8” maximum between the bottom of the socket and the end of the pipe prior to welding.
Page 48 of 103

(9) Visually inspected all welds for compliance with this section. Welds found to be lacking penetration, or containing excess porosity or cracks must be removed and replaced with an original quality weld as specified herein.
(10) All screw joints shall be made with tapered NPT threads properly cut. Joints shall be made with Teflon or dope applied to the pipe threads only and not fittings. All threaded fittings shall conform to ASTM B16.3
(11) All chilled water pipe shall be red-primed (and insulated-see below) and all condenser water pipe (un-installed) shall be coated with Ameron PSX700 Siloxane Epoxy.
(12) Piping shall be installed to facilitate drainage and/or condensate management. Install drain valves at low points in piping. Install air vents at high points in each piping system.
(13) Pipe supports shall be designed to support pipe under all conditions of operation and prevent excessive stresses and vibration from being introduced into pipe work or connected equipment. Oversized U-bolts are acceptable on pipe sizes over 10” but must be complete with spacers to allow 2” insulation installed on site. Condenser water lines and gas lines may be supported using U bolts without insulation spacers for all the sizes.
(14) Piping Insulation- As required, piping shall be insulated to protect the material from surface corrosion due to condensation. Piping Insulation shall be Armaflex sheet with thickness per applicable codes. Insulate valves, fittings, flanges, and special items to the full thickness required for corresponding piping. Piping shall be labeled as a minimum, with flow arrows and designators for type of service (i.e. Chilled water Supply or return, Condenser water Supply or return).
(15)Piping Instrumentation- water-filled gauge shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of all major equipment as defined below:
(a) Chillers-Pressure and Temperature indication at inlet and outlet (both Evaporator and Condenser)
(b) Pumps- Pressure Indication at Suction and Discharge
(c) Chilled Water and Condenser Water headers- Temperature Indication at Supply and return Location(s).
VIBRATION ISOLATION (xi)
Vibration Isolation shall be installed and utilized as required by the equipment manufacturers (i.e. chillers, pumps, boilers, etc).
(XII) ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(1) The plant shall be fed with a single / multiple LV power feed (calculated per NEMA Section 225.30). These shall feed the main LV buss in the Electrical Distribution Panel.
(2) The Electrical Distribution Panel shall incorporate a master disconnect switch for all loads except lighting. The
Electrical Distribution Panel shall be secured to the packaged Central plant’s structural base or, where an enclosure is used, to the structural steel wall framework.
(3) The Electrical Distribution panel shall have indicating lights for equipment status and alarm. The color of the indicating lights shall be green for “Run” and red for “Stop”. Each load connected to the Electrical Distribution Panel shall have a disconnect accessible to the operator without opening the panel door.
(4) All installed lights and convince equipment (and other ancillary low voltage items) shall be wired to a common Low
Voltage Panel. The Low Voltage Panel shall have circuit breakers for each type of electrical device.
(5) The Electrical Distribution Panel and the Low Voltage panel enclosures will be NEMA-1G rated for indoor mounting.
Control cabinets will have a component mounting panel of 12-gage steel installed on threaded studs for easy removal. Exterior finish shall be ANSI 61 grey power paint. Demonstrate NEC clearances for all electrical panels.
(6) All wiring shall be sized and installed in accordance with NEC in galvanized steel conduit. Condit shall be ¾” minimum, sized as per NEC, and shall permit the easy removal of the conductors at any time. All connections to motors and vibrating equipment shall use liquid tight flexible metal conduit to a minimum length of 36’. Conduit shall be bent in such a manner as not to reduce the original diameter of the conduit. All conduits shall be mounted on “UNI-
STRUT” or equivalent channel type support.
(7) Ceiling lights shall be suitable for damp locations with a minimum of two 40 Watt. 48” fluorescent bulbs (T-5 lamps as a Voltage Panel).
(8) Light Switches and GFI receptacles shall have stainless steel plates and cast boxes. All GFI receptacles shall be wired to the Low Voltage Panel.
Page 49 of 103

(9) Provide the following for convince: Light switches mounted inside the main entrance doors of the enclosure and lighted exit signs at all unit entrance doors complete with battery operated emergency lights.
(10) All motor starters, control enclosures, and pilot devices shall be properly identified by nameplates. Nameplates will be white faced with black engraved lettering. All relays and panel components shall be identified on the component mounting plate.
(xiii) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(1) General
(a) This specification covers complete a variable frequency drives (VFDs) designed on the drawing schedule to be variable speed. All standard and optimal features shall be included within the VFD panel.
(b) The VFD shall be UL Type 1 or UL Type 12 as required on the schedule. The VFD shall have been evaluated by
UL and found acceptable for mounting in a plenum or other air handling compartment. Manufacturer shall supply a copy of the UL plenum evaluation upon request.
(2)
(c) The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied. When the VFDs are to be located in Canada, C-UL certifications shall apply. VFD shall be manufactured in ISO 9001, 2000 certified facilities.
(d) The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive.
(e) The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100kA and labeled with this rating.
(f) The VFD manufacturer shall supply the VFD and all necessary controls as herein specified. The Manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum for twenty years.
Products
(a) The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor de-rating. When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor’s service factor. VFDs utilizing sine weight/coded modulation
(with or without 3 rd
harmonic injection) must provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current during full load and full speed operation.
(b) The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental (displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
(c) The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor on the positive and negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD from power line transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that do not provide full harmonic filtering throughout the entire load range are not acceptable. VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC line reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full; load, where harmonic performance is most critical.
(d) The VFD’s full load output current rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 120% of rated torque for up to 0.5 seconds while starting.
(e) The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base speed while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow driving direct drive fans without high speed de-rating or low speed excessive magnetization, as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced speeds. Breakaway current of 160% shall be available.
(f) A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided standard in the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motor’s speed and load to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.
(g) The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct drive fans.
Page 50 of 103

(3)
(h) Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks or damage to the VFD.
(i) An automatic motor adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.
(j) VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the used of an adjustable carrier frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and VFD operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed frequency are not acceptable.
(k) All VFDs shall contain integral EMI filters to attenuate radio frequency interference conducted to the AC power line.
PROTECTIVE FEATURES
(a) A Minimum of Class 20 12t electronic motor overload protection for single motor applications shall be provided.
Overload protection shall automatically compensate for changes in motor speed.
(b) Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit, output ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.
(c) Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded speed. This function is independent of which input power phase is lost.
(d) Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as low as 90% of the nominal.
The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output, without faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal voltage.
(e) Protect from over voltage. The VFD shall continue to operate without faulting with a momentary input voltage as high as 130% of the nominal voltage.
(f) The VFD shall incorporate programmable motor preheat feature to keep the motor warm and prevent condensation build up in the motor when it is stopped in a damp environment by providing the motor stator with a controlled level of current.
(g) VFD shall include a “signal loss detection” algorithm with adjustable time delay to sense the loss of an analog input signal. It shall also include a programmable time delay to eliminate nuisance signal loss indications. The functions after detection shall be programmable.
(h) VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running. No warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad.
(i) VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed without VFD fault to component damage.
(j) Selectable over-voltage control shall be provided to protect the drive from power regenerated by the motor while maintain control of the driven load.
(k) VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure motor current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act as a motor overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
(l) If the temperature of the VFD’s heat sink rises to 80°C, the VFD shall automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall also be possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit valve if the VFD’s temperature becomes too high.
(m) In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed valve during periods of excessive load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without tripping.
Page 51 of 103

(4)
(n) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized losses, and increased fan life.
At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the fan(s) may be increased fan life. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the fan (s) may be off even when the VFD is running.
(o) The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the date and time of the alarm shall be recorded.
INTERFACE FEATURES
(a) Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided to start and stop the VFD and determine the source of the speed reference.
It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password protect them from undesired operation.
(b) There shall be an “Info” key on the keypad. The info key shall include “on-line” context sensitive assistance from programming and troubleshooting.
(c) The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the VFD is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System whenever the VFD is being controlled locally or by the Building
Automation System.
(d) Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against unauthorized parameter changes.
(e) All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be identical and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
(f) To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFD’s keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes It shall be possible to download from the keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall provide visual indication of copy status.
(g) Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English, Spanish, and French.
(h) A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.
(i) A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.
(j) A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.
(i) This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to automatically select either the maximum of the feedback signal as the controlling signal. It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as the average of all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.
(ii) The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.
(iii) For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall ne able to calculate the square root of any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure air flow.
(iv)The VFD’s PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.
(k) The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control damper and valve positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset.
(l) Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response to contact closures.
Page 52 of 103

(m) Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall include at a minimum, frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output energy, VFD temperature in degrees, among others.
(n) Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency drops below set “sleep” level for a specified time, when an external contact commands that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a noflow situation, the VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD detects a no-flow situation, The VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD’s speed is being controlled by its PID controller, it shall be possible to program a
“wake-up” feedback valve that will cause the VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, It shall be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a minimum slap time for the VFD.
(o) A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a “system ready” signal to ensure that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an output “run request” signal to indicate to the external equipment that the VFD has received a request to run.
(p) VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units. Such as inches of water column (in-wg) , pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (°F).
(q) VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and /or over the serial communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indicators, this feature must be based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof timer to keep brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
(r) Standard Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs
(i) Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the system control and safety interlock circuitry.
(ii) Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or additional digital inputs.
(iii) Two programmable outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for remote indication of VFD status.
1. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay/off delay time.
(iv) Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or reverse acting.
1. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or current signal.
2. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently scalable from 0 to 10V
and ) to 20 mA.
3. A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be included to compensate
for noise.
4, The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the valve of each analog
input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting.
(v) One programmable analog current output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback signal supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be possible to scale the minimum and maximum valves of this output.
(vi) It shall be possible through serial bus communications to read the status of all analog and digital inputs of the VFD.
(Vii) It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial communication bus.
Page 53 of 103

(w)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
Optional Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs
(i) It shall be possible to add optimal modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog and digital inputs and outputs.
(ii) These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD’s control card.
(iii) The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There shall be no need to manually configure the module.
(iv) Modules may include such items as:
1. Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs
2. Additional digital inputs
3. Additional analog outputs
4. Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs
(v) It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all optional analog and digital outputs of the VFD.
Standard programmable firefighter’s override mode allows a digital input to control the VFD and override all other local or remote commands. It shall be possible to program the VFD so that it will ignore most normal VFD safety circuits including motor overload. The VFD shall display FIRMODE whenever in firefighter’s override mode. Firemode shall allow selection of forward or reverse operation and the selection of a speed source or preset speed, as required to accommodate local fire codes, standards and conditions.
A real-time clock shall ne integral part of the VFD.
(i) It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the VFD’s display.
(ii) Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter setpoints and output relays is shall be possible to program unique events that occur only during normal work days, others that occur only on non-work days, and others that occur on specific days or dates. The manufacturer shall provide free PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.
(iii) All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.
(iv) It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD running hours, or VFD operating hours.
(v) The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD fault log.
The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system demand and energy consumption over time,
The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface capabilities, This shall include:
(i) Comparators for comparing VFD analog valves to programmed trigger valves
(ii) Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra
(iii) Delay Timers
(iv) A 20-step programmable structure
Page 54 of 103

(5)
(6)
(7)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
(a) The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without a need to install any additional hardware or software in the
VFD:
(i) Johnson Controls Metasys N2
(ii) Modbus RTU
(iii) 3. Siemens FLN P1
(b) Optimal communications shall include:
(i) LonWorks Free Topology (FTP)
(ii) BACnet MS/TP
(c ) VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of personal Computer (PC) to the VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete setup and access of the VFD and Logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting VFD communications to the building management system.
(d) The VFD shall have provisions for an optimal 24V DC back-up power interface to power the VFD’s control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the building automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.
Adjustments
(a) The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in 0.5 kHz increments to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
(b) Four independent setups shall be provided.
(c) Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for total of 16.
(d) Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times. Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the rage from 1 to 3,600 seconds.
(e) Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current from the VFD reaches this valve, any further attempt to increase the current produced by the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD. If desired, it shall be possible to program a timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after a programmable time period.
(f) If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for automatic or a manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit, over temperature, and VFD overload.
(g) The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from0 through 20 or infinitely and the time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
(h) An automatic “start delay” may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time, the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC braking current if desired.
(i) Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided. Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the setup.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Page 55 of 103

(8)
(a) Ambient temperature, conditions, full speed, full load operation:
(i) -10 to 45°C (14 to 113°F) through 125 HP @ 460 and 600 volt, through 60 HP @ 208 volt
(ii) -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F) 150 HP and larger
(b) 0 to 96% relative humidity, non-condensing.
(c) Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.
(d) AC line voltage variation, -10 to + 10% of nominal with full output.
(e) All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom
(f) All VFDs shall be plenum rated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
(9)
(a) To ensure quality, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall drive a motor connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be cycled during the automated test procedure.
(b) All optional features shall ne functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
WARRANTY
(a) The complete VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36/42 months from date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel cost and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized onsite service. The warranty shall be provided by the VFD manufacturer and not a third party. A written warranty statement shall be provided with the submittals.
(xiv) CENTRAL PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM
(1) The central Plant PLC Control System shall monitor and control all mechanical equipment and instrumentation directly involved in the production and distribution of chilled water as specified herein. The control system shall continuously optimize the total energy consumption of the chilled water plant (as measured in total kW consumption) throughout operation using adaptive control. The plant control system shall interface with the facility BAS system via BACnet or other industry accepted protocol.
(2) The control system shall have an integrated Human Interface panel, which provides operator access to system status via graphical representation.
CONTROL LOGIC
Chilled Water System: The control system shall utilize adaptive control algorithms to directly control the following components and operations:
(3) Chiller Sequencing: add/remove chillers from service in such manner to assure that the total kW/ton of the central plant will be minimized. Adaptive algorithms must continuously re-evaluate and dynamically adjust chiller sequencing setpoints based on variations in chiller leaving water temperature setpoint (provide by BAS) and chilled water loop water differential temperature and flow in order to assure optimum energy efficiency.
(a) Chilled water isolation valves: control valve position and opening/closing speed to prevent conditions which cause chiller’s on-board control to shut chiller off due to low flow.
(b) Chiller bypass valve: control valve position and opening/closing speed to maintain sufficient flow in the chiller(s) during low load conditions based on the differential pressure across chiller evaporator barrel. Minimum flow is to be defined by chiller manufacture’s specifications to prevent conditions leading to laminar flow.
Page 56 of 103

5)
(4) Cooling towers: Continuously re-evaluate and dynamically regulate tower fan speed to obtain optimum condenser water and condenser water temperature so as to minimize combined total kW to operate chiller and its associated cooling tower and condenser pumps. Sequence cooling towers via their respective isolation valves to assure adequate flow in accordance with tower manufacture’s specifications
(5) Chilled water and condenser pumps: maintain adequate condenser loop flow per chiller and cooling water tower manufacturers’ specifications.
(6) Chilled water distribution pumps:
(a) Monitor remote differential pressure transmitters in each zone in order to determine the controlling zone to be used for chilled water pump/VFD speed regulation algorithms. Such determination is to be based on differential pressure which has furthest deviation below its setpoint, and must disregard any failed zones.
(b) Regulate speed of chilled water pump/VFDs to maintain differential pressure in the controlling zone within ±.5 feet of the setpoint.
( C) Sequencing chilled water pumps based on total kW input to chilled water pump VFDs so as to minimize pump energy consumption.
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE
(a) FIELD CERTIFICATIN: Once the packaged central Plant is fully assembled and started-up at the project site, the electrical system and mechanical components shall be run-in for a Minimum of 24 hours to demonstrate proper system operation and automatic control system operation. All motor current (A) draws shall be logged to verify proper operation.
Adequate instrumentation shall be provided to provide a reading of system (total consumption) kW, chilled water flows/temperature, and condenser water flows/temperature at design conditions in order to provide verification of manufacturer’s guaranteed system efficiency (i.e. cooling tower fan motors at rated rpm/hp chilled water pumps/motors at rated rpm/hp/flow, condenser water pumps/motors at rated rpm/hp/flow).
All remaining electrical loads listed in the electrical load summary/performance guarantee (plant air conditioning units, electrical equipment, controls, lighting, etc) should be rated at the actual power usage at the design condition. Equipment and instrumentation for system monitoring shall include incoming power meter(s), flow meters (chilled water and condenser water), and entering and leaving chilled water/condenser water temperature sensors. All equipment and instrumentation or system monitoring shall be accurate to within ± 3%.
•
Field certification readings/results shall be documented using the attached Field Certification Summary
Report(s).
(b) FACTORY CONTROLS AND ELECTRICAL TESTING: The packaged central plant manufacturer shall perform a
“point-to point” electrical test on the complete electrical system and shall also test the control system with all sequences and alarms simulated.
(c) CONTROLS RESPONSIBILITY: The Packaged Central Plant, including but not restricted to: chillers, pumps, boilers (as required), and cooling towers. The Packaged Central Plant’s controls must be of a recognized manufacturer with at least 10 years of experience in the control of complete central plants, and be capable of communicating with the facility’s building automation system (BAS) via Ethernet/IP or other industry-acceptable interoperability protocol.
(d) QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRRAM: The packaged Central Plant manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000
Certified and have a quality assurance program in place, with quality assurance manual available for the owner upon request.
(e) HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST: All piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested to ASME B31.1 in the factory before shipping. Vendor must record the pressure test using a pressure data logger and provide data to the owner upon request.
(f) STRUCTURAL (AND SEIMIC) REQUIRMENTS: The base, wall and roof steel framework, sheet metal enclosure, and tower support steel shall be designed to meet or exceed the following minimum requirements.
WIND LOAD PER IBC 2006/ASCE
Exposure Category
Importance Factor
C
I=1.0
Page 57 of 103

6)
Basic Wind Speed V= 130 mph (IBC wind provision are 3-second gust wind-speeds while the USB wind provisions are based on fastest-mile wind speeds-130 mph in IBC is equivalent to 110 in UBC)
Topographic Factor Kzt=1.0
SNOW LOAD PER IBC 2006/ASCE
Basic Ground Snow Load
Exposure Factor
Thermal Factor
Pg=30psf
Ce=1.0
Ct= 1.0
Importance Factor I = 1.0
EARTHQUAKE LOAD PER IBC 2006
Site Class C
Mapped Spectral Response Acceler. At Short periods
Mapped Spectrral Response Acceler. At 1 second Period
Site Coefficient
Ss= 1.5
S1=1.0
Fa-1.0
Site Coefficient
Seismic Use Group/Occupancy Importance Factor
Response Modification factor
Fv-1.5
1.0
R=3.0
(g) WELDING: All pipe and structural steel shall be welded in accordance with the procedures outlined in this specification- no exceptions. At the owner’s request, the manufacturer shall provide certified documentation of both the procedures and the welder’s certification for that procedure.
(h) PAINTING/COATING: All bases, enclosure floors and exteriors are to be factory painted in accordance with this specification (see detailed coating specification below for bases, steel, and piping).
(i) WARRANTY: Seller shall guarantee that the equipment it provides will be free of defects in workmanship and material for a period of 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months from first commercial use, whichever comes first, providing the equipment is properly installed, started, and operated and maintained under normal use in accordance with instructions in the Seller’s Operation and Maintenance manual.
PACKAGED VALIDATION AND SHIPPING a) INSPECTION AND TESTING
(i) Include all test data and reports as required by this section as part of the Operation and Maintenance
Include manual, including:
(1) Packaged Central Plant manufacturer’s Inspection and Test Reports
(2) Piping-Hydrostatic pressure test results.
(3) Structural and seismic calculations per IBC 2006 b) SHIPPING PREPARATION
Page 58 of 103

(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(i) non-insulated piping shall be provided with Ameron PSX700 Siloxane Epoxy coating to provide corrosion protection. Interior of piping shall be flushed with a water-soluble corrosion inhibitor and then drained to prevent freezing.
(ii) All equipment and components shall be identified with equipment number specified or as shown on the shop drawings to assist field assembly and erection. Equipment numbers will be marked by the Buyer on the approved shop drawings. All items shipped shall be accompanied by instructions for storing and protecting in English.
All equipment shall be sealed to prevent entry of water, dirt or other foreign matter. Seals used in nozzles shall not affect threads, weld preparation or flange faces. Open ends of the enclosure/shipping splits should be protected from the weather via shrink-wrapping or polyethylene sheeting. All equipment and components shipped loose or on skids shall be properly packaged to withstand recommended method of shipment without damage. Each package shall be clearly labeled on the outside as to its contents.
Include a complete packing list and bill of material.
Provide consumables required during the insulation for all equipment furnished including, but not limited to, flange bolts, sheet metal screws, coupling gaskets, caulking, etc.
Schedule of Equipment
Chiller Schedule
Tag
CH-1
CH-2
CH-3
CH-4
Chilled Water Pump
Schedule
Tag
CHW-1
CHW-2
CHW-3
Condenser Water Pump
Tag
CW-1
CW-2
CW-3
Cooling Tower
Tag
CT-1
Capacit y
Tons
750
750
750
750
Flow gpm
2600
2600
2600
Flow gpm
2250
2250
2250
Flow gpm
4500
Evaporator
LWT
EWT F F
60
60
45
45
60
60
45
45
Head ft
50
50
50
Head ft
85
85
85
Capacit y
Tons
1,494
HP
38
38
38
HP
80
80
80
HP
50
Page 59 of 103
Condenser
EWT LWT
F F
85
85
95
95
85
85
95
95
Electrical Data
Volts Ph.
480
480
480
3
3
3
Electrical Data
Volts
480
Ph.
3
480
480
EWT
F
95 85
3
3
LWT
F
Volts
480
480
480
480
HZ
60
60
60
HZ
60
60
60
Electrical Data
FLA
551
551
551
551
Ph.
3
3
3
3

CT-2 4500 1,494 50 95 85
Page 60 of 103

Description
1. General
FORM VIII
PRICING EXAMPLE: SPECIALTY REFRIGERATION/Low Temperature Refrigeration
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Self Contained Refrigeration System
2. Warranty
•
Provide one(1) year parts & labor warranty
•
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
3. Product
•
Slide Out Condensing Unit For Ease of Service
•
Gravity Coil Evaporator mounted in top area of case
•
Cold Wall Refrigeration System in lower cavity
•
Large 10” Tempered Fog Resistant Front Glass for maximum product visibility
•
2 slide back doors for product access with “hold open” capability for case loading
•
White Powder Coated Exterior
•
Black Front Bumper
•
R-404a Refrigerant
•
Condensate Evaporator
•
Dual Defrost Heaters For Improved Reliability / Redundency
•
Mirrored Interior End Panels For Improved Merchandise Display
•
Mirrored Interior Top Coil Cover For Improved Merchandising Display
•
Interior Front Product Stops
•
Thermometer
•
Lighted Interior
4. Electrical Requirements – 115/60/1 Phase – 15 Amp
•
Provide Power Cord With NEMA 5-15P plug
5. Optional Accessories Available Include:
•
Superstructure For Cross-Merchandising
•
Caster Kits
•
Locks
•
Stainless Steel Exterior
•
Optional Painted Exteriors
•
Leg Kits
•
Novelty Baskets
•
Product Shelf Kits
6. Overall Dimensions – 48 ½” Long
32 5/8” Deep
38 ¼” High
Page 61 of 103

FORM IX
PRICING EXAPMLE: UNITARY/Rooftop Air Conditioner
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
References
-
ANSI/ARI 210/240 & 360
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
-
ANSI/UL 1995
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provided one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant
-
Provide five(5) year parts only warranty on compressor
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
-
Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
•
Compressors
-
Units shall have direct-drive, hermetic, scroll type compressors with centrifugal type oil pumps.
-
Motor shall be suction gas cooled and shall have voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. Internal overloads shall be provided with the scroll compressors. Units shall have crankcase heaters
•
Evaporator & Condenser
-
Coils shall be internally finned, 3/8” copper tubes mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin.
Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure the pressure integrity.
-
The evaporator coil shall be interlaced configuration.
•
Fans Outdoor & Indoor
-
The outdoor fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through on the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload protection.
-
Indoor fans shall have belt driven, FC, Centrifugal fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Units shall have an adjustable idler-arm assembly for quick adjustment of fan belts and motor belts and motor sheaves. All motors shall be thermally protected. All indoor fan motors meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT).
•
Enclosures
-
Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. All components shall be mounted in a weather resistant steel cabinet with a painted exterior. Service panels shall be mounted in a weather resistant steel cabinet with a painted exterior. Service panels shall have lifting handles and be removed and reinstalled by removing not more than three screws while providing a water and airtight seal.
All exposed vertical panels and top covers in the indoor air section shall be insulated with a fire-resistant, permanent, odorless, glass fiber material. The base of the down flow unit shall be insulated with a foil-faced, closed-cell material.
-
Each unit has a sloped condensate drain pan.
•
Refrigerant Circuit
-
Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers.
•
Controls
-
Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contractor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Unit shall provide an external location for mounting a fused disconnect device. Micro-
Processor controls shall be provided for all 24-volt control functions.
-
A centralized Micro-processor shall provide anti-short cycle timing and time delay between compressors.
-
Each unit shall be factory equipped with phase monitoring protection that protects against phase loss, reversal, and voltage imbalance.
•
Accessories
-
Electric Heaters
Electric heat modules shall be available for installation within basic unit. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements internally wye connected. Staging shall be achieved
Page 62 of 103

through the unitary control processor. Each heater package shall have automatically reset high limit control operating through heating element contractors. All heaters shall be individually fused from the factory, where required, and shall meet all NEC and CEC requirements when properly installed. Power assemblies shall provide single-point connection. Electric heat modules shall be UL listed.
-
Roof Curb-Downflow
The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the downflow unit and provide support and a watertight installation when installed properly. The roof curb design shall allow field-fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be connected directly to the curb, Curb shall be shipped knocked down for field assembly and shall include wood nailed strips.
-
Economizer-Downflow
The assembly includes fully modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, barometric relief, minimum position setting, present linkage, wiring harness with plug, and fixed dry bulb control. Solid-state enthalpy and differential enthalpy control shall be field installed.
-
Zone Sensors
3. Performance
Shall be provided and shall be automatic with system malfunction lights.
Total Capacity…………………..….182.00 MBH
Sensible Capacity…………………128.31 MBH
CFM……………………………………6000 CFM
ESP…………………………………… 0.50 in.
BHP…………………………………….2.54 BHP
Entering DB……………………………..80 F
Entering WB…………………………….67 F
Leaving DB……………………………..62.2 F
Leaving WB…………………………….58.1 F
Total Power……………………………..18.6 Kw
EER……………………………………….9.3 EER
Electric……………………………………36.0 Kw
Electrical……………………………..460/60/3 V
Page 63 of 103

FORM X
PRICING EXAMPLE: UNITARY/Air Cooled Condenser
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
•
General
•
References
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
-
ASTM B 117
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
•
Product
-
Condenser Coils and Fans
-
Condenser coils shall have configurated aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with integral sub-cooler. Coils are burst tested @ 450 psig.
-
Direct drive condenser fan motors have permanently lubricated ball bearings and thermal overload protection.
•
Enclosures
-
Factory-assembled and wired air cooled condensing unit. The unit frame shall be constructed of 14 gauge welded galvanized steel. Panels and access doors are to be 14 or 16 gauge galvanized steel. Unit surface shall be phosphatized and finished with air-dry paint.
-
The unit coils shall be protected with steel louvered panels.
•
Refrigerant Circuits and Controls
-
Units shall be dual circuited, all the necessary controls to run the unit fans shall be provided.
-
The control panel shall contain fan motor contractors, terminal point connection for compressor interlock and
115 volt control power transformer.
-
Units shall ship with factory installed liquid line service valves.
•
Accessories
- Ambient control shall allow operation down to 40 F with cycling of condenser fans.
3. Performance
Total amount of Heat Rejection………888 MBH
Condensing Temperature……………….125 F
Entering Air Temp……………………………..95 F
Electrical………………………………….460/60/3 V
Page 64 of 103

FORM XI
PRICING EXAMPLE: UNITARY/Split Air Conditioner
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
References
-
ANSI/ARI 210/240,340/360 or 365
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
-
ANSI/UL 1995 & 465
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant
-
Provide five(5) year parts only warranty on replacement compressor
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
-
Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
•
Compressors
-
Units shall have a single refrigeration circuit with an integral sub-cooling circuit. A refrigeration filter drier shall be provided as standard. Units shall have both a liquid line and suction gas line service valve with gauge port. The units shall have two scroll compressors manfolded together.
-
Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate voltage.
-
Crankcase heater, discharge line thermostat, internal temperature and current-sensitive motor overloads shall be included. External high and low pressure cutout devices shall be provided.
•
Evaporator
-
Shall be completely factory assembled including the expansion valves and drain pans.
-
The coil shall be dual refrigerant circuited.
-
Evaporator defrost control provided in the indoor blower coil . Operating range shall be between 115 F. and
50 F.
•
Condenser
-
Coils shall be internally finned or smooth bore 3/8” copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fin as standard.
-
Metal grilles with PVC coating for coil protection shall be provided.
•
Outdoor Condenser Fan
-
Direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller fan(s) with aluminum blades and electro-coated steel hubs shall be used in draw-thrigh vertical discharge position. Either permanently lubricated totally enclosed or open construction motors shall be provided and shall have built in current and thermal overload protection.
-
Motor(s) shall have ball or sleeve bearings type.
•
Fans Indoor
-
Shall be double inlet double width, forward curved, centrifugal-type fan(s0 with adjustable belt drive. Thermal overloads protection shall be standard on motor, fan and motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated.
-
All indoor fan motors meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT).
•
Indoor Enclosure
-
Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, and galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphtized and finished with an enamel finish. Casing shall be completely insulated with foil faced, fire-retardant, permanent, ordor less glass fiber material. Coils shall be convertible to either vertical and /or horizontal airflow configuration. Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8’ OD cooper tubing
-
Coils shall be factory pressure and leak tested.
•
Outdoor Enclosure
-
Unit casing shall be constructed of 18-gauge zinc coated heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish.
•
Refrigerant Circuit
-
Units shall have dual refrigeration circuits.
-
Each refrigeration circuit is controlled by a factory-installed thermal expansion valve.
•
Controls
Page 65 of 103

-
Magnetic evaporator fan contractor, low voltage terminal strip check valve(s), and single point power entry shall be included. All necessary controls shall be factory-installed and wired. Evaporator defrost control shall be included.
-
Each Unit Shall is factory equipped with phase monitoring protection that protects against phase loss, reversal, and voltage imbalance.
•
Accessories
-
Electric Heaters
UL and CSA approved electric heat modules shall be available for installation directly on fan discharge.
Electric heaters shall be available with two stage control, single point electric power connection and terminal strip connections. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements integrity wye connected on 480/60/3 phase. Each heater shall have automatic line break high limit controls.
-
IAQ Drain Pan
3. Performance
Evaporator shall have an IAQ double sloped condensate drain pan.
Total Capacity……………………184.40 MBH
Sensible Capacity………………..134.90 MBH
CFM…………………………………6000
ESP…………………………………..0.50 in.
BHP…………………………………...2.22 BHP
Entering DB…………………………….80 F
Entering WB…………………………….67 F
Leaving DB……………………….…60.7 F
Leaving WB………………………….57.6 F
Operating EER………………………11.0
Ambient………………………………95.0 F
Electric………………………………..29.0 Kw
Electrical…………………….….460/60/3 V
Page 66 of 103

Form XII
PRICING EXAPMLE: UNITARY/Vertical Self Contained Air Conditioner
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form1 for this example
Description
1. General
•
References
- ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
- ANSI/UL 1995
•
Warranty @ Startup
-
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant.
-
Provide five (5) year parts only warranty on replacement compressor
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
-
Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
•
Compressors
- Units shall have multiple compressors with independent circuits; Compressors shall be manufactured by the unit manufacturer. Scroll compressor shall be heavy-duty suction cooled type with suction screen, centrifugal oil pump with dirt separator, oil charging valve, and oil sight glass. Protective devices for low pressure, high pressure, and motor temperature shall be provided.
- The compressor shall be mounted on isolators for vibration isolation.
•
Evaporator
- The drain pan shall be positively sloped, fabricated from 304L stainless and
insulated with 3/4 –inch of 1-lb. Density fiberglass.
- The drain pan shall contain a factory piped trap with cleanout.
•
Condenser
- One condenser shall be provided for each compressor. The condenser shall be
shell-and-tube design with removable heads and mechanically cleanable tubes.
Tubes shall be ¾-inch OD and constructed of cupro-nickel (90/10).
- All condenser water piping including, cleanouts shall be factory installed to provide
single connections for water inlet and outlet.
•
Fans Indoor
The supply fan shall be a single forward curved medium pressure fan secured to a solid steel shaft with grease lubricated bearings designed for 200,000 hours. Both fan bearings shall have grease lines extended to a common location. The drive components shall include fixed pitch sheaves and multiple V-belt sized for 130% normal horsepower. The supply fan motor shall have a service factor of 1.15. The supply fan motor shall be premium efficiency open drip proof.
- Supply fan motor shall have a standard T-frame. The entire fan assembly, including drive components, shall be mounted on a common base. The fan base shall be isolated inside the unit. The entire assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
- Provide VFD with bypass, factory mounted, completely wired and tested. A motor overload relay and fuses are to be provided.
•
Enclosures
- The unit framework shall be formed structural steel members of 14-gauge
galvanized steel.
- Exterior panels shall be fabricated from 18-gauge galvanized steel. The fan and compressor sections shall be insulated with ¾-inch of 1.75ib/cu. ft. Density fiberglass insulation.
- The unit shall provide with removable panels to allow service access to compressors, Condensers, fan motor, fan bearings, coils, and valves. Removable panels shall be secured with quick-acting fasteners.
The refrigerant sight glasses shall be accessible during operation. The control panel door shall have liftoff hinges.
- Units shall be provided with a factory installed horizontal discharge plenum that permits multi-directional duct connections. The Plenum is to be insulated with two inches of 1.75ib, Density fiberglass for sound attenuation. Discharge openings will be field cut. A two-inch duct collar shall be provided for field duct connections.
•
Refrigerant Circuit
- Refrigerant circuits shall be independent and completely piped including sight glasses, distributors, thermal expansion valves with adjustable superheat and external equalizer, and high-pressure relief valves with ½-inch flare connection. Unit shall be provided with adequate means of frost control.
- The Circuits shall be factory dehydrated, charged with oil and refrigerant R-407C. Service valves shall
•
Controls be factory installed on each circuit before and after the compressor.
Page 67 of 103

-
Microprocessor controls shall be provided to control all unit functions. The control system shall be suitable to control VAV applications. The controls shall be factory installed and mounted in the main control panel. All factory-installed controls shall be fully commissioned (run tested) at the factory. The unit shall have a panel with 16-key keypad, a two line, 40-character clear language display as standard to provide the operator with full adjustment and display of control data functions.
-
The unit shall be equipped with a complete microprocessor control system. This system shall consist of temperature and pressure sensors, printed circuit boards and a unit mounted panel. Modules shall be individually replaceable for service ease.
-
The microprocessor boards shall be stand-alone DDC controls. The Microprocessors shall be equipped with on-board diagnostics. The modules shall be protected to prevent RFI and voltage transients from affecting the board’s circuits.
-
Provide Supply Air Temperature Control with Variable Frequency Drive factory mounted.
-
Other control components shall include a discharge air microprocessor controller and discharge air sensor.
-
The unit shall have factory mounted non-fused disconnect switch accessible without opening the control panel door.
•
Heating Coil
-
The hot water heating assembly is to include the coil and filter section and shall be factory installed on the unit’s inlet. A three-way modulating valve, actuator, manifold piping, and automatic air vent shall also be factory installed. The coli shall be constructed of 5/8-inch OD copper tubes arranged in a
3. Performance parallel pattern. The copper tubes are to be expanded into aluminum fins positioned continuously across the entire coil width, not exceeding 12 fins per inch. The coil casing shall be 16-gauge steel.
-
Supply and return water header connections shall be female tapered NPT.
Total Capacity…………….913.13 MBH
Sensible Capacity……......722.69 MBH
CFM………………….…… …..29,800
ESP…………………………………..1.5 in.
BHP………………………33.385 BHP
Entering DB……………………….80 F
Entering WB………………………67 F
Leaving DB……………… …..58.20 F
Leaving WB…………………...57.44 F
Operating EER………………….10.7
Condenser:
Ent Temp…………………………..86.0 F
Flow Rate…………………………212.1 GPM
Pressure Drop…………….…….24.14 ft Max
Heating Coil:
Ent Air……………………………….60.0 F
Capacity…………….……………461.91 MBH
Ent Water Temp……………..160.0 F
Fluid Flow Rate………………….29.0 GPM
Electrical…………….……..460/60/3 V
Page 68 of 103

FORM XIII
PRICING EXAMPLE: UNITARY/Packaged Heat Pumps
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ANSI/ARI 210/240, 340/360 or 365
−
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
−
ANSI/UL 1995
•
Warranty & Startup
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant
−
Provide five (5) year parts only warranty on replacement compressor
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
−
Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
•
Compressors
−
Unit shall have direct-drive, hermetic, scroll type compressors with centrifugal type oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate voltage.
Internal overloads shall be provided with the scroll compressors.
−
Crankcase heaters shall be utilized with all scroll compressors.
•
Evaporator and Condenser Coils
−
Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice or thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed as standard.
−
An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers.
•
Fans Outdoor
−
The outdoor fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through in the vertical discharge position.
−
The fan motor(s) shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload protection.
•
Fans Indoor
−
Units shall have belt driven, FC centrifugal fans with adjustable motor sheaves.
−
Units shall have an adjustable idler-arm assembly for quick-adjustment of fan belts and motor sheaves.
−
All motors shall be thermally protected.
•
Enclosures
−
Unit shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117 Cabinet construction shall allow for all maintenance on one side of the unit.
−
Service panels shall have lifting handles and be removed and reinstalled by removing not more than three screws while providing a water and air tight seal.
−
All exposed vertical panels and top covers in the indoor air section shall be insulated with a 1/2 inch, 1-pound density matt-faced, fire-resistant, permanent, odorless, glass fiber material. The base of the downflow unit shall be insulated with 1/2 inch, 1 pound density foil-faced, closed-cell material.
−
The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting.
•
Refrigerant Circuit
−
Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice or thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed as standard.
−
An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers.
•
Controls
−
Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Unit shall provide an external location for mounting a fused disconnect device. Micro-processor controls shall be provided for all 24-volt control functions. A centralized Micro-processor shall provide anti-short cycle timing and time delay between compressors to provide a higher level of machine protection.
−
A time initiated, temperature terminated defrost system shall be provided.
−
Zone sensors provided with the Micro equipped units shall be available in automatic with system malfunction lights.
−
Accessories
−
Electric Heaters
Electric heat modules shall be available for installation within basic unit. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements, wye connected for 480 and 600 volt. Staging shall be
Page 69 of 103

achieved through the unit control processor (UCP). Each heater package shall have automatically reset high limit control operating through heating element contactors. All heaters shall be individually fused from the factory, where required, and shall meet all NEC and CEC requirements when properly installed. Power assemblies shall provide single-point connection. Electric heat modules shall be UL listed.
−
Roof Curb -Downflow
The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the downflow unit and provide support and a watertight installation when installed properly. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Curb shall be shipped knocked down for field assembly and shall include wood nailer strips.
−
Economizer -Downflow
This accessory shall be either field or factory-installed. The assembly includes fully modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, barometric relief, minimum position setting, preset linkage, wiring harness with plug, and fixed dry bulb. The barometric relief damper shall provide a pressure-operated damper that shall be gravity closing and shall prohibit entrance of outside air during the equipment "off" cycle. Solid-state enthalpy and differential enthalpy control shall be field-installed options.
3. Performance
Total Capacity: .......................183.0 MBH
Sensible Capacity: ..................128.0 MBH
CFM: ........................................ 6000
ESP:..........................................0.50 in.
BHP: ...........................................2.5 BHP o
Ambient: .......................................95
Entering DB: ................................80 o
F o
F
Entering WB: ................................67
Leaving DB: .................................62
Leaving WB: ................................58 o
F o
F
F
Operating EER ........................... 9.1
Heating:
Outdoor Air: ................................47
Entering Air: ................................70 o
F o
F
Capacity: ................................162.5 MBH
Aux. Heat: ....................................36 Kw
Electrical: ........................... 460/60/3 V
Page 70 of 103

FORM XIV
PRICING Example: UNITARY/Water Source Heat Pumps
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
References
-
ANSI/UL 1995
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty including refrigerant
-
Provide five (5) year parts only warranty on refrigerant circuit including motor-compressor, expansion device, all heat exchangers in contact with refrigerants, and reversing valve (less solenoid)
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
-
Provide star-up services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
•
Compressors
-
The unit shall include a general efficiency rotary, reciprocating, or scroll compressor. External vibration isolation shall be provided by rubber mounting devices located underneath the mounting base of the compressor. A second isolation of the refrigeration assembly shall be supported under the compressor mounting base.
-
Internal thermal overload protection shall be provided. Protection shall be provided against excessive discharge pressure operation by means of a high-pressure switch. Loss of charge protection shall be provided by a low-pressure switch.
•
Water-to-Refrigerant Heat Exchanger
-
The water-to refrigerant heat exchanger shall be of a high quality coaxial coil for maximum heat transfer.
The cupro-nickel coil shall be deeply fluted to enhance heat transfer and minimize fouling and scaling. The coil shall have a working pressure of 450 psig on both the refrigerant and water sides. The factory shall provide rubber isolation to the heat-exchanging device to enhance sound attenuation.
-
The refrigerant access ports shall be factory supplied on the high and low-pressure sides for easy refrigerant pressure or temperature testing.
•
Air-to-Refrigerant Coil
-
The air-to –refrigerant coil shall contain copper tubes mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins. All coils are to be leak tested. The proof must be performed at 450-psi operating pressure and the leak test at 125-psi operating pressure with helium. The refrigerant coil distributor assembly shall be of orifice style with round copper distributor tubes. Suction headers shall be fabricated from rounded copper pipe.
-
A thermostatic expansion valve shall be factory selected and installed for a wide range of control.
-
The drain pan shall be constructed of non-ferrous material or stainless steel and insulated to prevent sweating. The bottom of the drain pan shall be sloped on two planes, which pitches the condensate to the drain connection.
•
Fans Indoor
-
The fans shall be placed in a draw-through configuration. They shall be constructed of corrosion resistant galvanized material.
-
The motors shall be a multi-speed permanent split capacitor with thermal overload protection. The motor shall contain a quick-disconnect plug and permanently lubricated bearing.
•
Enclosures
-
The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with exposed edges rounded. Service to the refrigerant and controls shall be provided through a single access panel at the front of the unit. Insulation for the internal parts and surfaces exposed to the conditioned air stream shall be made of moisture resistant insulation.
-
The insulation shall be ½-inch thick dual density bonded glass fiber. The exposed side shall be a highdensity erosion proof material suitable for use in airstreams up to 4500 feet per minute (FPM).
-
Insulation shall meet the underwriters’ Laboratories Fire Hazard Classification:
Flame spread =20
Fuel Contributed = 15
Smoke Developed = 0
-
Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fan section shall be provided.
Page 71 of 103

•
Refrigerant Circuit
-
The equipment shall be provided with a thermal expansion valve to allow operation of the unit with entering fluid temperature.
•
Controls
-
The control package shall utilize factory furnished and mounted DDC controls. The control package shall include a 75 VA transformer with circuit breaker. The controller shall provide random start delay, heating/cooling status, occupied/unoccupied mode, fan status and filter maintenance options. Wiring from the factory for condensate overflow shall be available.
-
The factory tested and installed control box shall contain all necessary devices to allow heating and cooling operation of the equipment to occur from a remote wall zone sensor including: o 24 VAC contactor for compressor control o An electrical lockout relay o A high-pressure switch o A low-pressure switch o Factory installed wire harness
•
Accessories
-
Reheat Coil
Dehumidification shall be provided through a hot gas reheat option. The coil shall consist of copper tubes mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins. All coils are to be proof and leak tested. The proof must be performed at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure and the leak test at the maximum operating pressure. In addition, the tubes are to be completely evacuated of air to check for leaks in a vacuum.
-
Water Regulating Valve Assembly ( NO Longer Available with R410A) REMOVE
The water regulating valve assembly shall consist of a direct acting valve and a reverse acting valve. The direct acting valve shall open in response to an increase in discharge pressure during the cooling cycle. The
3. Performance reverse acting valve shall open in response to a decrease in suction pressure during the heating Cycle.
Total Capacity………………….60.80 MBH
Sensible Capacity………….….43.54 MBH
CFM………………………….…..2000
ESP……………………………..0.330 in.
BHP………………………………1.00 BHP
Entering DB………………………..80 F
Entering WB……………………….67 F
Leaving DB……………………60.12 F
Leaving WB…………………….57.34 F
Condenser:
Ent Water Temp………….……...86.0 F
Flow Rate…………………….….15.13 GPM
Pressure Drop………………….14.09 ft Max
FF……………………………..0.00010 hr-sq ft-deg F
Operating EER……………………12.5
COP………………………………..5.06 (Operating)
Heating Output………….…….81.2 MBH
Ent Air………………………….57.0 F
Ent water Temp………………..68.0 F
Electrical…………………460/60/3 V
Filter………………………………..2 Pleated
Page 72 of 103

FORM XV
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR HANDLING/Central Station Air Handlers
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ANSI/ARI 410/430 and 260
−
NFPA 90A
−
ANSI/AFBMA 9
−
ANSI/UL 508C
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
•
Enclosure
−
The unit shall be constructed as a complete frame with removable panels. Removal of side panels shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.
−
The entire air handler cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Casing finished to meet ASTMB 117 250-hour saltspray test. Unit shall be double wall constructed in all sections.
−
Exterior wall shall be minimum 18 gauge-galvanized steel. Interior wall shall be minimum 22 gauge solid galvanized steel.
−
All portions of the interior of the unit exposed to the airstream shall be covered with steel to allow cleaning and prevent fiberglass erosion into the airstream. Foil facing on insulation shall not be acceptable as a substitute for double wall construction.
−
Insulate all sections of air handling unit (walls, roof and floor) with 2" thick 1-1/2 lb matt-faced fiberglass between two sheets of solid galvanized steel. All exterior wall panels shall be made of galvanized steel. Closed-cell foam gasketing shall be provided where modules join to prevent air leakage.
−
Modules shall be factory insulated. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.
−
All coil modules shall be provided with an insulated, double-wall stainless steel drain pan. The drain pan shall be sloped in two planes to eliminate stagnant water conditions and to promote positive drainage.
−
Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall, solid, galvanized-steel interior panel and a solid, galvanized-steel exterior panel. Gasketing shall be provided around the full perimeter of the doors to prevent air leakage. Surface-mounted handles shall be provided to allow quick access to the interior of the module. Access doors shall be hinged and removable for quick, easy access.
−
An external support kit constructed of galvanized steel shall be provided on the base of the unit.
•
Fan and Motor
3 The fan type shall be provided as required for stable operation and optimum energy efficiency.
4 The fan shaft shall not exceed 75 percent of its first critical speed at any cataloged speed. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the fan shaft to prevent slipping. The fan shafts shall be solid. The fan module shall be provided with an access door on the drive side of the fan. The fan shall be a double-width, double-inlet, multiblade-type, forward-curved (FC) fan. The fan shall be equipped with self-aligning, antifriction bearings with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours.
−
The fan and motor assembly shall be internally isolated from the unit casing with 2-inch deflection spring isolators, individually calibrated for corner load weights, furnished and installed by the unit manufacturer.
−
The drives shall be selected at a minimum 1.5 service factor.
−
The motor shall be integrally mounted to an isolated fan assembly furnished by the unit manufacturer. The motor shall be mounted inside the unit casing on an adjustable base to permit adjustment of drive-belt tension. The motor shall be a high efficiency, T-frame, squirrel cage type.
−
The motor shall be open and drip-proof.
−
For any bearing requiring relubrication, the grease line shall be extended to the fan-support bracket on the drive side.
•
Coils
−
The coil module shall be provided complete with coil and coil holding frame. If two or more cooling coils are stacked in the unit, an intermediate drain pan shall be installed between each coil to drain condensate to the main drain pan without passing condensate through the air stream of the lower coil.
−
The coils shall be installed such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings.
−
The coils shall have aluminum fins and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belted, and firmly bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coil casing shall be galvanized. The coils shall be proof-tested to 300 psig and leak tested under water to 200 psig.
−
Headers are to be constructed of round copper pipe.
•
Filters
Page 73 of 103

−
Filter sections shall have filter racks, at least one access door for filter removal, and filter block-off’s. The modules shall be supplied with 2-inch non-woven fabric, treated with adhesive and continuously laminated to a supported steel-wire grid.
−
Filters shall be capable of operating up to 625-fpm face velocity without loss of filter efficiency and holding capacity.
•
Starter-Disconnect
−
An IEC starter-disconnect combination shall be provided for each fan motor. Starter-disconnect shall be properly sized, mounted, wired to the motor in conduit, and commissioned by the air handler manufacturer. IEC starter-disconnects shall include a circuit breaker.
−
The starters shall include a control transformer with fusing and secondary grounding, Hand-Off-Auto switch, two normally open auxiliary contacts, overload heaters, and manual reset overloads.
−
Starters-disconnects shall have full metal enclosures with welded seams. Enclosures must have a durable painted finish. The door shall be removable for ease of wiring and service.
−
Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1
3: Performance
CFM: ..................................... 10,000
TSP: ..........................................2.29 in.
BHP: .........................................6.81 BHP
HP .............................................7.50
Cooling Coil:
Total Capacity: ........................380.0 MBH
Sensible Capacity: ..................275.0 MBH o
Entering DB: ................................80
Entering WB: ................................67 o
F o
F
Leaving DB: ..............................55.0
Leaving WB: .............................55.4 o
F
F
Max WPD: .................................15.0 ft
Ent. water Temp: ......................45.0 o
F
GPM: ........................................ 77.5
Max FV: ..................................485.0 FPM
Heating Coil:
Ent Air: ......................................45.0
Lvg. Air: .................................... 78.0
Ent. water Temp: ....................160.0 o
F o
F o
F
GPM.......................................... 36.0
Max WPD ....................................5.0 ft.
Filter Type ..................................Flat
Electrical ............................ 460/60/3 V
Page 74 of 103

FORM XVI
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR HANDLING/Make-up Air Handlers
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
•
General
•
References
-
ASTM B 117
-
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1
-
AMCA 204-96
-
ANSI/UL 1995
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provide one(1) year parts & labor warranty
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
•
Product
•
Casing
-
Casing shall be die-formed, 18=gauge galvanized steel and finished in air-dry enamel.
-
Service and access panels shall be provided through easily removable side access panels with captive fasteners.
-
Fan sections and supply plenums shall be insulated with fire resistant, odorless, matte-faced one-inch glass fiber material.
-
Outside air hoods shall ship with a wire mesh inlet screen
•
Heat Exchanger
-
Standard heat exchanger construction shall consist of 20-gauge aluminized steel tubes and 18-gauge aluminized steel headers.
-
Standard drip pan construction shall be corrosion resistant aluminized steel.
•
Venting System
-
Natural vent units shall be provided with a vent cap designed for gravity venting.
-
Outside air for combustion shall enter at the base of the vent cap through a protective grille, and products of combustion shall discharge through the upper section of the flue vent cap.
•
Burners
-
Burners shall be die-formed, corrosion resistant aluminized steel, with stamped porting and stainless steel port protectors.
-
Provide port protectors prevent foreign matter from obstructing the burner ports.
-
Burners shall be individually removable for ease of inspection and servicing.
-
The entire burner assembly shall be easily removed with its slide-out drawer design.
-
The pilot shall be accessible through an access plate without removing the burner drawer assembly.
•
Flue Collector
-
Standard flue collector construction shall be corrosion resistant aluminized steel.
•
Fans
-
Centrifugal fan shall be belt driven, forward curved with double inlet, statically and dynamically balanced.
-
The blower wheel shall be fixed on a keyed shaft, supported with rubber grommet on bearing only, and ball bearing secured.
-
An access interlock switch shall be installed in the blower compartment and will disengage the blower upon removing the service panel.
-
An override shall be incorporated into the interlock switch for serviceability.
•
Controls
-
Standard units shall be provided with 24-volt combination single-stage automatic gas valves, including main operating valve and pilot safety shutoff, pressure regulator, manual main and pilot shutoff valve, and adjustable pilot valve.
-
Gas valves shall be suitable for NEC Class 2 use for a maximum inlet gas pressure of 0.5psig on natural gas.
-
Unit shall be provided with a low voltage circuit breaker rated for 150 percent of the unit’s normal 24-volt operating load.
Page 75 of 103

-
Furnace shall be provided with a 24-volt high temperature limit switch, a (redundant) combination gas valve and a fan time delay relay. The fan time delay relay minimizes cold blasts of air on start-up. It also allows the fan to operate after burner shutdown, removing residual heat from the heat exchanger.
-
Rooftop unit shall contain a reverse airflow interlock switch. The normally closed switch, when activated, shall cause gas valves to close and continue blower operation.
-
All units shall be provided with a solid-state ignition control system which ignites the intermittent pilot by spark during each cycle of operation. When pilot flame is proven, main burner valve opens to allow gas flow to the burner. Pilot and burners are extinguished during the off cycle.
•
Discharge Air control with outside Air Reset
-
Unit shall be provided with factory-mounted discharge air controller, discharge air sensor, outdoor air reset, summer/winter thermostat and velocity pressure switch. The outdoor air reset range is from 10°F to 60 °F.
Full reset shall occur at 10 F outside air temperature.
-
The amount of reset shall be adjustable from 20 F to 50 F.
-
Provide a discharge air controller to provide two minute delay between successive on and off stages.
-
Provide a summer\winter thermostat to lock out heating when outside air temperature is above 55 F. The velocity pressure switch shall be provided for protection against high temperatures at low airflows.
•
Heat Exchanger
-
Type 409 Stainless steel heat exchanger tubes and headers shall be 20-gauge type 409 stainless steel.
-
Burners and flue collector shall be 409 stainless steel.
•
Motors-general
-
All motors shall be ball bearing type with resilient base mount. Windings are Class “B”, 1800 rpm with service factors of 1.15.
-
Modulating motor with interlocked outside and return air dampers shall be provided. The motor shall position the outside and return air dampers in response to a manually set potentiometer.
3. Performance
Total Capacity Input……………………….700 MBH
Total Capacity Output……………………..560 MBH
CFM………………………………….……6000 CFM
ESP……………………………….……….1.50 in
BHP…………………………………..……3.65 BHP
Electrical………………………………460/60/3 V
.
Page 76 of 103

FORM XVII
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR HANDLING/Coils
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ARI 410
•
Warranty & Startup
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
•
Tubes
−
Round seamless 5/8-inch OD copper (red brass-optional) tubes expanded into full fin collars for permanent fintube bond and expanded into copper headers.
•
Fins
−
Configurated, plate-type aluminum or copper fins with full fin collars for maximum fin-tube contact and accurate spacing, mechanically bonded to tubes for permanent fin-tube bond .
•
Casings
−
Galvanized steel, 16-gauge channels with 14-gauge center and end supports.
•
Tests
−
Coils are proof tested at 300 psig and leak tested at 200 psig air pressure under water The coils are suitable for working pressures and temperatures up to 200 psig and 220 F as standard.
3. Performance
CFM: ........................................6000
Total Capacity: ........................229.0 MBH
Sensible Capacity: ..................165.0 MBH o
Entering DB .................................80
Entering WB: ................................67 o
F o
F
Leaving DB: ..............................55.0
Leaving WB ..............................54.7 o
F
F
Max WPD ..................................10.0 ft
Ent. water Temp: ......................45.0 o
F
GPM:......................................... 46.0
Max FV: ..................................500.0 FPM
Height: ......................................36.0 in.
Max APD ...................................0.75 in
Page 77 of 103

FORM XVIII
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR TERMINAL DEVICES & HEATING PRODUCTS/Variable Air Volume Units
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ARI 880
−
UL 181
−
NFPA 90A
−
ASTM C 665
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
1. Casing
−
22-gauge galvanized steel. Hanger brackets, side access, and filter which shall be on the plenum inlet shall be provided. The interior surface of the unit casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1-inch, 2.0 lb/ft3 density glass fiber with foil facing. There shall be no exposed edges of insulation (complete metal encapsulation).
−
Provide a rectangular opening on the unit discharge to accept a 90° flanged ductwork connection.
−
A 1" filter shall be provided on the plenum inlet and shall attach to the unit with a filter frame.
•
Internal access to unit shall be achieved through plenum inlet.
−
Primary Air & Fan
−
Air Valve Round - The primary air inlet connection shall be an 18-gauge galvanized steel cylinder sized to fit standard round duct. A multiple point, averaging flow sensing ring shall be provided with balancing taps for measuring airflow. An airflow versus pressure differential calibration chart shall be provided. The damper blade shall be constructed of a closed-cell foam seal that shall be mechanically locked between two 22-gauge galvanized steel disks. The damper blade assembly shall be connected to a cast zinc shaft supported by selflubricating bearings.
−
The valve assembly includes a mechanical stop to prevent over stroking. The maximum leak rate shall be 1% at
4 in. wg. inlet static pressure.
−
Fan shall be single speed, direct drive, permanent split capacitor type. Thermal overload protection provided.
Motors shall be designed specifically for use with an open SCR. Motors will accommodate anti-backward rotation at start up. Motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from terminal unit.
2. Controls
−
A SCR speed control device shall be provided as standard and allows the operator infinite fan speed adjustment so the fan output may be modified to achieve exact CFM requirements.
−
A 50 VA transformer shall be factory mounted in the fan control box to provide 24 VAC for controls.
−
A power disconnect shall be provided and allows the operator to turn the unit on or off by toggling to the appropriate setting.
−
A unit controller shall continuously monitor the zone temperature against its setpoint and vary the primary airflow as required to meet zone setpoints. Airflow shall be limited by minimum and maximum position set points.
−
Controls shall have 3 wire, 24 VAC floating-point control actuator with linkage release button.
−
Torque shall be 35 in-lb minimum and will be non-spring return with a 90-second drive time. Travel shall be terminated by end stops at fully opened and closed positions.
−
Microprocessor based terminal unit controller shall provide for accurate, pressure independent control through the use of a proportional integral control algorithm and direct digital control technology. The controller shall monitor zone temperature setpoints, zone temperature and its rate of change, and valve airflow using a differential pressure signal from the pressure transducer.
−
Zone Sensor
The controller shall sense zone temperature through a sensing element located in the zone sensor.
−
The valve shall be a field adaptable 2-way configuration and ships with a cap over the bottom port. The valve shall be designed with an equal percentage plug. The actuator shall be a synchronous motor drive. The actuator shall be rated for plenum applications under UL 94-5V and UL 873 standards.
3. Hot water coil & Valve
−
The coil shall be 1-row. Full fin collars shall be provided for accurate fin spacing and maximum fin-tube contact.
7/8" OD seamless copper tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fin collars. Coils shall be proof tested at
450 psig and leak tested at 300-psig-air pressure under water. Coil connections shall be brazed.
3. Performance
CFM(Cooling: ........................... 2400
Page 78 of 103

Inlet SP: ....................................0.15 in
CFM: (Heating): ....................... 1750
Heating:
Entering DB: ................................70
Leaving DB: .................................95 o
F o
F
Capacity: ......................................42 MBH
GPM:...........................................3.0
Entering Water: ..........................180 o
F
Water Pressure Drop: .................3.0 ft.
Page 79 of 103

FORM XIX
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR TERMINAL DEVICES & HEATING PRODUCTS/Fan Coil Air Conditioners
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ARI 440
−
UL 181
−
NFPA 90A
−
ASTM B117
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
4. Casing
−
The unit shall include a chassis, coil(s), fan wheel(s), fan casing(s), fan board and motor(s). Units also shall include a noncorrosive, ABS main drain pan, positively sloped in every plane and insulated with closed-cell insulation. Steel parts exposed to moisture shall be galvanized. The fan board assembly and both drain pans shall be easily removable.
−
The fan board assembly includes a quick disconnect motor plug. The chassis be construction shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel, and continuous throughout the unit. The unit shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with closed-cell insulation.
−
Front panel fabrication shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel. All other panels shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel.
All panels shall be made rigid by channel forming. The discharge grille shall be recessed to resist condensate formation. Hinged access door shall be provided.
−
All cabinet parts and exposed recessed panels shall be cleaned, bonderized, phosphatized, and painted with a baked powder finish.
−
Filters are to be concealed from sight and easily removable. Filters shall be 1 " throwaway.
5. Fan & Motors
−
Aluminum fan wheels shall be centrifugal forward-curved and double-width. Fan wheels and housings shall be corrosion resistant. Fan housing construction shall be formed sheet metal.
−
Permanent split capacitor motors shall be run tested in assembled units. All motors have integral thermal overload protection with a maximum ambient operating temperature of 104 F and shall be permanently lubricated.
6. Coils
−
Water coils shall be burst tested at 450 psig (air) and leak tested at 100 psig (air under water).
−
Maximum main coil working pressure will be 300 psig. Maximum entering water temperature shall be 200 F
Tubes and U-bends will be 3/8" OD copper. Fins shall be aluminum and shall be mechanically bonded to the copper tubes. Coil stubouts shall have 5/8" OD copper tubing.
3. Performance
Total Capacity: ..........................45.0 MBH
Sensible Capacity: ....................30.0 MBH
CFM: ........................................ 1200
ESP:..........................................0.20 in.
Entering DB: ................................80
Entering WB: ................................67
Leaving DB: ..............................55.0 o o
F o
F o
F
Leaving WB: .............................53.7
Ent. Water Temp: ......................45.0 o
F
F
GPM:...........................................9.4
Water Press. Drop: .................. 25.0 ft.
Heating:
Entering Air: ..............................60.0
Leaving Air: ...............................80.0
Ent. Water Temp: ....................180.0 o
F o
F o
F
Total Capacity: ..........................24.9 MBH
GPM............................................ 2.5
Water Press. Drop: .....................2.6 ft.
Page 80 of 103

FORM XX
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR TERMINAL DEVICES & HEATING PRODUCTS/Unit Ventilators
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
ARI 210 & 440
−
UL 181
−
NFPA 90A
−
ASTM C 665
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
7. Cabinet
 Horizontal cabinet shall be 16-gauge furniture quality steel, with exposed edges rounded.
 Provide 16 gauge removable front panels with quick-acting, key operated camlocks. Provide steel bar discharge grilles welded in place as an integral part of unit structure. Insulate internal parts and surfaces exposed to conditioned air stream with moisture resistant insulation.
−
Cabinet insulation shall be 1/2inch thick dual density bonded glass fiber. The exposed side shall be a high density erosion proof material suitable for use in airstreams up to 4500 feet per minute (FPM).
−
Cabinet accessories shall include a matching steel construction, reinforced for use with unit ventilators.
−
Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fan section shall be provided.
−
The unit shall be installed for proper access.
8. Fan
−
The unit ventilator fan board assembly shall be a single, rigid assembly and includes the fans, fan housings, bearings, fan shaft and motor. The fan motor shall be mounted on the fan board.
−
The motors shall be a single speed permanent split capacitor with thermal overload protection.
−
A multiple tap autotransformer is wired to the motor to provide different rpm settings and to ensure rated capacity with all coil combinations. The motor shall also be provided with a quick-disconnect plug and permanently lubricated bearing.
−
Fans shall be centrifugal forward curved double width, double-inlet corrosion resistant galvanized wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven. Fans shall be in the blow-through configuration.
•
Coils
−
All hydronic coils shall be plate fin type and manufactured by the unit ventilator manufacturer.
−
All coils are to be proof and leak tested. The proof test must be performed at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure and the leak test at the maximum operating pressure. Standard four pipe heating coil is in the preheat location.
−
A drain pan shall be provided under the cooling coil, with drain connection. Drain pan shall be easily removable for cleaning. The drain pan shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material, and insulated to prevent sweating. The bottom of the drain pan shall be sloped in two planes which pitches the condensate to the drain connection.
9. Dampers & Filters
−
Unit shall be equipped with a single 1-inch thick, throwaway filter.
−
Unit shall use dual blade damper with a compressible seal, capable of varying proportion of mixed air from 100 percent room air to 100 percent outside air.
−
Damper shall contain a continuous divider placed between the damper blades to separate the fresh air and return air compartments to prevent blow-through.
10. Controls
−
System shall utilize factory furnished and mounted DDC controls for operation of the classroom air conditioning units. The unit shall be UL listed and shall include the following with DDC control:
−
Valve control
−
Face and bypass control
−
Economizer
−
Night setback
−
Morning warm-up
−
Low limit thermostat
−
Mixed air and discharge sensing
−
Fan, filter status switch.
3. Performance
Page 81 of 103

Total Capacity: ..........................49.0 MBH
Sensible Capacity: ....................37.5 MBH
CFM: ........................................ 1970
ESP:..........................................0.00 in. o
Entering DB: ................................80
Entering WB: ................................67 o
F o
F
Leaving DB: ..............................62.1
Leaving WB: .............................58.6
Ent. Water Temp: ......................45.0 o
F o
F
F
GPM:.........................................10.0
Water Press. Drop: ...................14.0 ft.
Heating:
Entering Air: ..............................60.0
Leaving Air: ................................133
Ent. Water Temp: ......................80.0 o
F o
F o
F
Total Capacity: ...........................148 MBH
GPM:......................................... 14.8
Water Press. Drop: ...................20.0 ft.
Electrical: ........................... 115/60/1
Page 82 of 103

FORM XXI
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR TERMINAL DEVICES & HEATING PRODUCTS/
Cabinet Unit Heaters
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
UL 181
−
NFPA 90A
−
ASTM B117
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
11. Cabinet
−
The unit shall include a chassis, coil, fan wheel(s), fan casing(s), fan board and motor(s). The fan board assembly shall be easily removable. The fan board assembly shall include a quick-disconnect motor plug. The chassis construction shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel, and continuous throughout the unit. The unit is acoustically and thermally insulated with closed cell insulation. All panels shall be made rigid by channel forming.
−
Unit shall be vertical wall hung type.
−
Front panel fabrication is 16-gauge galvanized steel. All other panels shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel. Side panels shall be removable for piping access.
−
All cabinet parts and exposed recessed panels shall be cleaned, bonderized, phosphatized, and painted with a baked powder finish.
−
Filters shall be concealed from sight and easily removable. Filters 1 " throwaway.
12. Fan & Motors
−
The aluminum fan wheels shall be centrifugal forward-curved and double-width. Fan wheels and housings shall be corrosion resistant. Fan housing construction shall be formed sheet metal.
−
All permanent split capacitor motors shall be run tested in assembled units. All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection with a maximum ambient operating temperature of 104 F and shall be permanently lubricated.
13. Coils
−
Hot water coils shall be burst tested at 450 psig (air) and leak tested at 100 psig (air under water). Maximum main coil working pressure shall be 300 psig. Maximum entering water temperature shall be 200 F. Tubes and
U-bends are to be 3/8" OD copper. Fins are to be aluminum and are to be mechanically bonded to the copper tubes. Coil stubouts are to be 5/8" OD copper tubing.
3. Performance
CFM: .......................................... 970
ESP:..........................................0.01 in. o
Entering Air: ..............................60.0
Leaving Air: ................................131
Ent. Water Temp: ....................180.0 o
F o
F
F
Total Capacity: ..........................76.0 MBH
GPM:........................................... 7.6
Water Press. Drop: ...................22.0 ft.
Electrical: ........................... 115/60/1
Page 83 of 103

FORM XXII
PRICING EXAMPLE: AIR TERMINAL DEVICES & HEATING PRODUCTS/
Unit Heaters
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
UL 181
−
NFPA 90A
−
ASTM B117
•
Warranty
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
14. Casing
−
Casing shall be two-piece with "picture frame" front formed into wraparound sides, top and bottom.
−
Adjustable horizontal louvers shall be provided. Provide 18-gauge back panel with deep draw fan orifice for extreme rigidity. Steel supply and return pipe tap connectors shall be bolted to back. Casings shall be phosphatized to prevent corrosion and painted.
15. Fan & Motors
−
High efficiency fan with aluminum blades shall be quiet, factory balanced.
−
Provide a totally enclosed, 115/60/1 Class "B" insulated shaded pole and PSC motors. All single phase motors shall have built in overload protection. Sleeve bearing motors shall be oiled. Ball bearing motors shall be permanently lubricated.
16. Coils
5 Hot water headerless coils shall be single tube, single serpentine. Fins are to be aluminum, mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Coils shall be one-row deep. Coils tested shall be at 400 psi air under water. Coils shall have .031 copper tubing.
3. Performance
CFM: .......................................... 815
Entering Air: ..............................60.0
Leaving Air: ...............................87.0
Ent. Water Temp: ....................180.0 o
F o
F o
F
Total Capacity: ..........................32.0 MBH
GPM:........................................... 2.8
Water Press. Drop: .....................1.0 ft.
HP: ............................................. 1 /8
Electrical: ........................... 115/60/1
Page 84 of 103

FORM XXIII
PRICING EXAMPLE: BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
Price the product based on the following description. Use form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
References
UL-916-PAZX-FCC Part 15, Class A
•
Warranty & Start-Up
-
Provide one (1) year Parts and Labor warranty
-
FOB job-site
2. Product
•
Controller
The building controller shall include an operator display allowing the user to perform basic daily operations task on the building automation system. At a minimum this operator display shall:
-
Be installed on the building controller and require no additional power source.
-
Consist of one-quarter VGA touch screen with 320 ×240 pixel resolution. The brightness and contrast of the backlit touch screen shall be adjustable to allow for easy reading of information on the screen.
-
Be capable of having unique user identification and passwords that can be programmed to limit access to the system and operator functions.
-
Display the current state of an input/output point and equipment controller connected to the system.
-
Give the operator the ability to override the current state of an output point or HVAC equipment controller connected to the building controller.
-
Allow the operator to modify any equipment setpoint within the system.
-
Allow the operator to modify the start and stop times of any time-of –day schedule within the system.
-
Provide a visual indication that a system alarm exists and allow for an optional audible alarm annunciation.
-
Provide the ability to view and acknowledge alarms that are annunciated at that building controller.
-
As a minimum, store the latest 100 alarms and diagnostics for viewing by the operator.
-
Allow the operator to view custom graphical displays with dynamic status information.
-
Automatically update displayed system information every 10 seconds.
3. Performance:
-
Memory-16mb Flash
-
EEPROM-512 KB
-
SRAM- 1MB
-
SDRAM-8MB
-
Enclosure-NEMA 1
Page 85 of 103

FORM XXIV
PRICING EXAMPLE: COOLING TOWERS
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1. General
•
References
−
CTI-Standard 201
•
Warranty & Startup
−
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
−
Provide five (5) year parts only warranty on motor and drive
−
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
−
Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
−
Motor
−
Provide totally enclosed fan motors positioned for external access
•
Inverter duty
•
Drive System with standard heavy-duty pillow block bearings with a minimum L-10 life of 75,000 hours.
•
Extended lube lines.
•
External motor/belt adjustment.
•
Aluminum Alloy Sheaves, and Solid-Back Multi-Groove Power-Band Belts
•
Basic Design
•
Sloped basin that completely drains the cold water basin, and helps prevent buildup of sediment and biological film and eliminates standing water after drain down.
•
Counter flow design
•
Motor shall be out side the air stream
•
Low sound fans
−
Corrosion Protection System
•
Provide G-235 Galvanized Steel Construction and Stainless Steel Strainers with 2.35 oz. Of zinc per sq foot of surface area.
•
Stainless steel suction strainer shall eliminate excessive wear and corrosion.
•
Provide non-corrosive PVC Water Distribution System, Drift Eliminator and Inlet Louvers.
•
When stainless steel is specified, 316 ss shall be provided.
−
Water Distribution System
•
Provide large orifice nozzles to prevent clogging. They shall be threaded for easy removal.
•
Provide “Anti-Sludge” ring, to prevent sediment from clogging the diffuser opening.
•
System branches shall have threaded end caps to assist with debris removal.
−
Accessories
−
Sloped Aluminum Ladder
3. Performance
Capacity (Tons): ................... 365.00
Flow (GPM): .......................... 1050.0
Entering Fluid Temp: ................96.0
Leaving Fluid Temp ................86.0 o
F o
F o
F Wet Bulb: ..................................80.0
# Fans: ........................ 2 @ 7.5 HP
Air Flow: ............................... 90,550 CFM
Inlet Pressure Drop: ....................1.0 PSI
Evaporative Water Rate: ...........8.4 GPM
Page 86 of 103

FORM XXV
PRICING EXAMPLE: PUMPS
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
1.General
References
•
NSF-50 & 61 Certified
Warranty
•
Provide one (1) year part & labor warranty
•
Provide F.O.B.jobsite
2. Product
•
Supply Split Coupled Type Vertical In-Line Centrifugal pumping unit.
•
The pumps shall be radially split, single stage centrifugal type with BF casing with equal size suction and discharge flanges and having separate tapped flush line and pressure gauge connections.
•
Bronze (B584-844) dynamically balanced impeller, stainless steel shaft, lower carbon throttle bushing, Outside
Balanced type mechanical seal with carbon rotating face, Tungsten Carbide stationary seat and Viton secondary seal.
•
The pump is to be fitted with a factory installed flush line. Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal, a 50 micron cartridge filter (alternatively, a cyclone separator when pump differential pressure exceeds 30 psig) and floating ball type sight flow indicator suitable for the working pressure encountered.
•
Provide a squirrel cage induction type motor, with ODP enclosure and shall be connected to the pump through a high tensile aluminum, split type spacer coupling to permit servicing of the mechanical seal without disrupting pump, motor or electrical wiring.
•
Coupling shall be protected by a guard.
Performance
GPM……………………………..500
Ft.of TDH…………….……….….80
H.P……………………..….………20
Pump Efficiency……………….82.3%
Motor EFF. (min)………………82.9%
Enclosure……………..………..ODP
Electrical………..….….……460/60/3
Rotative Speed…………..1750 RPM (Nominal)
Page 87 of 103

FORM XXVI
PRICING EXAMPLE: INVERTORS/Variable Frequency Drives
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
•
General
•
References
−
UL508,94
−
CSA 22.2.14
−
NEMA ICS 3,ICS 4
−
IEEE 444 (ANSI-C343)
−
IEEE 519
−
IEC. 146A
•
Warranty & Start-up
•
Provide one (1) year Parts and Labor Warranty
•
FOB job-site
•
Provide factory authorized start-up technician
•
2. Product
−
RPM Ratings
−
ASD must operate, without fault or failure, when voltage varies plus or minus 10 percent from rating, and frequency varies plus or minus 5 percent from rating.
−
ASD shall be 480 volts, 60 Hz.
−
Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 over entire range of operating speed and load.
−
Operating Ambient Temperature: 14 degrees F. to 104 degrees F.
−
Humidity: non-condensing to 90%.
−
Minimum Efficiency: 96% at half speed; 98% at full speed.
−
Starting Torque: 100% starting torque shall be available from 0.5 Hz. to 60 Hz.
−
Overload capability: 120% of rated F.L.A. (full load amps) for 60 seconds; 180% of rated F.L.A., instantaneously.
−
The ASD must meet the requirements for Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) above 7 MHz as specified by FCC regulations, part 15, subpart J, Class A devices.
−
In compliance with IEEE 519, the Total Harmonic Distortion for the ASD shall be no greater than 5%. When the THD is above 5% the supplier of the ASD shall provide a dc bus choke or line reactors to ensure compliance.
1) Design
−
ASD shall employ microprocessor based inverter logic, isolated from all power circuits.
−
ASD shall include surface mount technology, with conformal coating.
1) ASD shall employ a PWM (pulse width modulated) inverter system, consisting of:
 Input Section:
1) ASD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier, with MOV (metal oxide varistor) protection.

Intermediate Section:
−
DC bus as a supply to the ASD Output Section shall maintain a fixed voltage with filtering and short circuit protection.
−
DC Bus shall be interfaced with the ASD diagnostic logic circuit, for continuous monitoring and protection of the power components.
−
Above 30hp the DC bus section shall include a DC bus reactor to minimize reflected harmonics. If DC bus reactor is not included an input line reactor must be included and enclosed in the ASD enclosure.
 Output Section
•
Insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT's) shall convert DC bus voltage to variable frequency and voltage.
•
PWM sine coded output to the motor.
−
The ASD must be selected for operation at carrier frequencies at or above 8 kHz without derating to satisfy the conditions for current, voltage, and horsepower as indicated on the equipment schedule.
−
ASD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency: The carrier frequency shall have a minimum of five settings to allow adjustment in the field.
−
ASD shall include two independent remote reference inputs. One shall be 0-10 VDC. The other shall be programmable for either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. Either input shall respond to a programmable bias and gain.
−
ASD shall include a minimum of five multi-function input terminals, capable of being programmed to determine their function when their state is changed. These terminals shall provide up to 20 functions, including, but not limited to:

Remote/Local operation selection.
 Detection of external overheat condition.

Remote Reset
 Multi-step speed commands
Page 88 of 103

−
ASD shall include a 0-10V DC analog output, proportional to output frequency, output current or output power, for either monitoring, or "speed tracking" the ASD.
−
ASD shall provide terminals for remote contacts, to allow starting in the automatic mode.
−
ASD shall include at least one external fault input, which shall be programmable, for either a normally open, or a normally closed contact, for connection to firestats, freezestats, etc.
−
ASD shall include one fully rated form-"A" contact and one fully rated form "C" contact, capable of being programmed to determine what conditions must be met in order for them to change their state. These contacts shall be rated for at least
1A at 250 VAC. These terminals shall provide up to 15 functions, including, but not limited to:

Zero speed detection
 Low and high frequency detection.

Missing frequency reference detection.
 Overtorque detection

Drive Running
 Drive Faulted
−
ASD shall include a power loss ride thru of 2 seconds.
−
ASD shall include a front mounted, sealed keypad operator, with a digital display, to provide complete programming, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. Keys provided shall include commands for RUN, STOP, and RESET.
Operating mode (auto or manual) and speed setting functions shall also be provided.
−
ASD display shall provide readouts of; output frequency in hertz, output voltage in volts, output current in amps, output power in kilowatts, D.C. bus voltage in volts, interface terminal status, and fault codes. All displays shall be labeled in easy-to-read English LED readouts.
−
ASD unit shall include the following meters to estimate use of energy:

Elapsed Time Meter
 Kilowatt Meter
−
ASD shall be capable of PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) logic, to provide closed-loop setpoint control capability, from a remote reference.
−
ASD shall include loss of input signal protection, with a speed default to 80 % of the most recent speed.
−
ASD shall include electronic thermal overload protection for both the drive and motor, profitable for variable or constant torque. The electronic thermal motor overload shall be approved by UL. If the electronic thermal motor overload is not approved by UL a separate UL approved thermal overload relay shall be provided in the ASD enclosure.
−
ASD shall include the following programming functions:
−
Critical frequency rejection capability: 2 selectable, adjustable bands.
−
Auto restart capability: 0 to 10 attempts.
−
Stall prevention capability.
−
"S" curve soft start capability.
−
"Speed search" capability, in order to start a rotating load.
−
Fifteen preset volts per hertz patterns.
−
One adjustable volts per hertz pattern.
−
Current limit adjustment capability, from 30 % to 200 % of rated full load current of the ASD.
−
Anti "wind milling" function capability.
−
ASD shall include factory settings for all parameters, and the capability to be reset back to those settings.
−
ASD shall include the capability to adjust the following functions, while the ASD is running:
1.0 Acceleration adjustment from 0 to 3600 seconds.
2.0 Deceleration adjustment from 0 to 3600 seconds.
3.0 A minimum of five different preset speeds.
4.0 Analog output gain, to calibrate the signal for the application used.
−
Manual Bypass shall be provided when indicated by the schedule. ASD and bypass components shall be mounted inside a common NEMA 1 enclosure, fully pre-wired, and ready for installation as a single UL listed device. Bypass shall include the following:
−
Input, output, and bypass contactors, to disconnect power to the ASD, when the motor is running in the bypass mode.
•
115 V.A.C. control transformer, with fused primary.
•
Thermal overload relay, to protect the motor while operating in the bypass mode.
•
Circuit breaker/disconnect switch, with a "through-the-door" handle mechanism.
•
Control and safety circuit terminal strip.
•
"Drive-Off-Bypass" selector switch.
•
Pilot lights for "Power On" and "Fault".
•
"Normal/Test" selector switch, to allow testing and adjustment of the ASD, while the motor is running in the bypass mode.
•
"Auto/Manual" selector switch, to provide convenient switching between "manual" and "auto" modes.
•
"Auto Transfer to Bypass Upon Drive Fault," to automatically transfer power across the line, and continue motor operation, in the event of an ASD failure.
−
Fabrication
•
Enclosure: NEMA Type 1.
Page 89 of 103

3. Performance
15 HP 480/60/3
Page 90 of 103

FORM XXVII
PRICING EXAMPLE: BOILERS
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description
1. Genereral
-
References o AGA/CGA Design Certified & Listed o ASME Code
-
Warranty and start-up o Provide five (5) year limited heat exchanger warranty o Provide one(1) parts & labor warranty o Provide F.O.B. jobsite o Provide startup services of a factory trained service technician
2. Product
-
Combustion Chamber: o ( Non-Condensing ): The combustion chamber shall be fully enclosed by a stainless-steel chamber inside of which is assembled a cylindrical copper coil Heat Exchanger having a maximum allowable working pressure of 160 psig. An access door shall be provided for ease of service and inspection of the heat
Exchanger. o ( Condensing) :The combustion chamber shall be an integral part of the heat exchanger which shall be an all welded cylindrical Stainless Steel counter-flow design consisting of an upper burner section for primary heat transfer and a lower section for extracting latent heat from flue gases. An access wrap shall be provided for ease of service and inspection of the Heat Exchanger.
-
Burner: o ( Non-Condensing & Condensing) : The burner shall be constructed of stainless steel. The burner shall provide equal distribution of heat through the entire heat exchanger. A window view port shall be provided for visual inspection of the boiler during firing.
-
Heat Exchanger: o ( Non-Condensing ): The heat exchanger shall be inspected and tested to A.S.M.E. Section IV requirements. The heat exchanger shall be a four-pass heat exchanger with maximum working pressure of 160 psig. The heat exchanger shall be of cylindrical design, with integral copper finned tube
7/8” I.D., 0.064” minimum wall thickness, 7 fins per inch, with nominal fin height of 3/8”. Each end of the tubes shall be expanded by mechanical rolling process into the headers. The heat exchanger shall be gasket-less. All header castings shall be bronze. A pressure relief of valve shall be furnished with the heater. o ( Condensing) : The heat exchanger shall be inspected and tested to A.S.M.E. Section IV requirements.
The heat exchanger shall be twelve pass heat exchanger with maximum working pressure of 160 psig.
The heat exchanger is of cylindrical counter-flow watertube design, with integral Stainless Steel finned tubes. Each end of the tubes shall be welded into the headers. The heat exchanger shall be welded design. A pressure relief of valve shall be furnished with the heater.
-
Controls: o ( Non-Condensing ): Standard controls include an electronic proportional integrated combination limit/operator control accurate to 1°F having a 4-20 mA output signal suitable for control of a variable frequency motor drive. The control shall also provide readouts of the boiler target, differential and inlet/outlet temperatures as well as accumulated run time. On/off switch and full diagnostic light package shall be provided. The complete control package shall be mounted on the front panel with hinged door for easy access to all control modules. A flow switch shall be provided loose. o ( Condensing) : Standard controls include an electronic proportional integrated combination limit/operator control accurate to 1°F having a 4-20 mA output signal suitable for control of a variable frequency motor drive. The touch screen display shall also be provide readouts of the boiler target, differential and inlet/outlet temperatures as well as accumulated run time and full diagnostics including real time data
Page 91 of 103

logging and an on/off switch shall be provided. The complete control package shall be mounted on the front panel with a hinged door for easy access to all control modules. . A flow switch shall be provided loose.
-
Firing Mode: o ( Non-Condensing & Condensing) : The burner shall operate as fully modulating down to 20% for condensing and 35% for non-condensing application. Light off shall be at no more than 50% input to assure rumble free soft start.
-
Venting Options: o ( Non-Condensing & Condensing) : The following venting options shall be utilized: 1 Standard Venting. 2.
Horizontal & Vertical Outside air Venting. 3. Through-Wall Venting. 4. Outdoor Venting. 5. Direct
Venting
-
Gas Train: o ( Non-Condensing & Condensing) : The gas train shall consist of a gas valve with a pressure regulating electro-hydraulic actuator to provide slow opening, fast closing, safety shutoff and air/gas ratio control.
A factory pre-set combination metering valve and orifice shall be provided for setting combustion parameters.
-
Ignition Module: o ( Non-Condensing & Condensing) : The ignition module shall employ a provided igniter with 3 tries for ignition followed by lockout. Trail for ignition shall be 10 seconds with 15 seconds between retrials.
-
External Jacket and fasteners: o ( Non-Condensing ): The external jacket shall be stainless steel mirror finish panels assembled utilizing interference fit locks and minimal non-strip self tap screws. o ( Condensing) : Circulating pump to be pulled by boiler fans
.Performance ( Price two boilers)
Capacity input……….2,000,000 Mbh (on both)
Capacity Output…….1,740,000 Mbh ( Non-condensing)
Capacity Output…….1,896,000 Mbh ( Condensing)
Efficiency…………………..94.8% (Condensing)
Efficiency…………………....87% ( Non-condensing)
Nox PPM……………………8.0
Vent Diameter
Standard…………………….10 in.
Thru-Wall…………………….10 in.
Air intake Diameter…………..8 in.
Page 92 of 103

FORM XXVIII
PRICING EXAMPLE: 100% OUTSIDE AIR UNIT
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example.
Description:
General
The units shall be down flow airflow. The operating range shall be between 112°F and 0°F in cooling as standard from the factory for units with microprocessor controls. Cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-410A , and 100 percent run tested to check cooling operation, fan and blower rotation, and control sequence before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be ETL listed and labeled, classified in accordance to UL 1112/CAN/CSA No. 236-M10 for Central Cooling Air Conditioners. Canadian units shall be CSA
Certified.
References:







UL1112
CSA 236-M10
ARI 84-1991, 1060
EPACT 1992
AMCA 211, 311
ASHRAE 52-76
ASTM B117
Warranty & Start-up:



Provide one (1) year Parts and Labor Warranty
FOB job-site
Provide start-up by factory authorized technician
Product:
•
Casing
Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 672 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B12. Unit shall have 2” of Antimicrobial Double Wall Insulation. Cabinet construction shall allow for all maintenance on one side of the unit. All exposed vertical panels and top covers in the indoor air section shall be insulated with a cleanable foil-faced, fire-retardant permanent, odorless glass fiber material. All insulation edges shall be either captured or sealed. The unit's base pan shall have no penetrations within the perimeter of the curb other than the raised 1 1/12" high downflow supply/return openings to provide an added water integrity precaution, if the condensate drain backs up.
•
Filters
Two inch aluminum mesh filters shall be standard on the Outside Air Intake of the unit.
•
Controls for Dual Compressor Unit
Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure lugs for power wiring. Units will be provided with an external location for mounting fused disconnect device. Micro-processor controls are to be provided for all 24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor temperature and humidity. The control algorithm shall maintain accurate temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized micro-processor (OACM) shall provide anti-short cycle timing for a higher level of machine protection.
•
Compressors
All units shall have direct-drive, hermetic, Digital scroll type compressors with centrifugal type oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage.
Internal overloads shall be provided with the scroll compressors. Crankcase heaters shall be included.
•
Refrigerant Circuits
Service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers shall be factory-installed as standard. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers.
Page 93 of 103

•
Evaporator and Condenser Coils
Internally finned, 5/16" copper tubes mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure the pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be leak tested to 120 psig and pressure tested to 450 psig. A removable Stainless Steel sloped condensate drain pan shall be provided with condensate drain.
•
100% Outdoor Air Hood with Damper and Filters
Shall be factory installed and integrated 100% outdoor air hood with damper controlled a by direct coupled actuator and 2" permanent and washable aluminum mesh filter accessibly through a hinged access panel. The unit shall be factory equipped with a return air damper that is electrically interlocked with the outdoor air damper to allow 100% return air recirculation in the Unoccupied cooling mode.
•
Modulating Indirect Gas-Fired Burner
The unit shall have fully modulating, high turndown, indirect gas-fired heat. The heating section shall include a high turndown power burner and a stainless steel heat exchanger. The power burner shall have a modulating range from 25 MBH low fire to full firing rate. The heat exchanger shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel and be a drum and tube design capable of draining internal condensate to an external s/s flue and drain tube assembly. Units shall be suitable for use with natural gas.
•
Outdoor Fans
The outdoor fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through in the vertical discharge position.
The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload protection.
•
Indoor Fan
Supply Fan motor shall be direct drive type with Variable Frequency Drive. All motors shall be thermally protected. All indoor fan motors must meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1112 (EPACT).
•
Outdoor Air Temperature and Relative Humidity Sensor
A factory installed combination outdoor air sensor shall sense both outdoor air temperature and relative humidity for use by a microprocessor controller to make required ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and heating decisions.
•
Supply Air Sensing Tube
A factory installed sensing tube shall sense the supply air temperature downstream of the indoor fan section.
•
Control Input (Occupied / Unoccupied)
Terminals are to be provided for a field installed dry contact or switch closure to put the unit in the Occupied or
Unoccupied modes.
•
Through the Base Electrical with Disconnect Switch
A 3-pole, molded case, disconnect switch with provisions for through the base electrical connections shall be available.
The disconnect switch shalll be installed in the unit in a water tight enclosure with access through a swinging door. Wiring shall be provided from the switch to the unit high voltage terminal block. The switch shall be UL/CSA agency recognized.
•
Supply and/or Return Air Smoke Detector
A factory installed smoke detector shall be provided so that all unit operation will be shut down. Reset shall be manual at the unit. Return Air Smoke Detectors shall require minimum allowable airflow when used with certain models.
•
Roof Curb
The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the unit's downflow supply and return and discharge down. The roof curb design shall allow field fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be connected directly to the curb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements.
Performance
Tags
RTU – 1 Design Airflow (cfm)
Design ESP (in H2O)
Fan HP
Cooling Entering Dry Bulb (F)
Cooling Entering Wet Bulb (F)
RTU – 1 Gross Total Capacity (MBh)
Gross Sensible Capacity (MBh)
Evap Coil Leav Air Temp (DB) (F)
Evap Coil Leav Air Temp (WB) (F)
Cooling Leaving Unit DB (F)
2,250
1.0
3
95
78
210
195
49.5
48.4
54
Page 94 of 103

Cooling Leaving Unit WB (F)
Heating Entering Dry Bulb (F)
Heating Leaving Unit DB (F)
Heating Leaving Unit WB
Heating Total Capacity (MBh)
Refrigerant
EER @ ARI
Voltage
50.75
10
75
60
200
R410A
15
460/3/60
Page 95 of 103

FORM XXIX
PRICING EXAMPLE: DUST COLLECTORS
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example
Description:
−
General
−
Warranty
•
Provide one (1) year Parts and Labor Warranty
•
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
−
Product
−
Construction
•
The filter section shall constrain a single, multi-envelope filter with spring steel wire inserts.
•
Dust collector shall be supplied with flush fitting full width panels to access fan and filter chambers. Panels to be supplied with half-turn release latches.
•
Dust collector housing and supports shall be constructed of a minimum of 16-gauge carbon steel.
•
Interior and exterior of unit to be coated with high solid rust inhibitive primer and finish-coated with high solid enamel (2.0 mil.dry film thickness).
−
Configuration
•
Unit shall have a tool-less slide out filter assembly design, which is supported on two runners and retained by four captive wing nuts.
•
The unit shall be supplied with an integral fan directly coupled to a TEFC motor mounted in a compartment above the filter assembly on the CLEAN AIR SIDE of the media. Provide Spark Resistant fan construction to meet AMCA “C”.
•
A NEMA-12 Indoor (field-mounted remotely and wired) controller shall be furnished, consisting of start/clean push buttons, timer and motor starters. The controller shall automatically shake filter media thoroughly each time fan is shut off.
•
The dust collector shall be furnished with two hoppers directly coupled to two dust containers.
•
Dust container shall be 4 cubic foot holding capacity, complete with a quick release sealer mechanism, which is operated by hand lever (no fasteners or clamps). The hopper shall have
•
Inlet Transitions and a deflector plate at the dirty air inlet to direct large particles directly into dust collector. The pyramid hopper shall be furnished with knock out plates so air inlet may be placed at either side or in the rear. Provide Secondary
Filter inside dust collector as Safety Filter. Clean air shall be exhausted through the top of the fan chamber. Air shall be returned to the space through an acoustically lined, return air duct (by Installing Contractor).
•
Provide Explosion Vent(s) on rear of dust collector to provide explosion pressure relief in the event of an explosion inside the dust collector.
•
Provide Magnehelic Filter Gauge to indicate filter pressure drop.
−
Controller
•
The controller shall be a dual direct-on-line starter and consist of two contactors for control of the fan and cleaner motors.
The contactors shall be electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation. A thermal overload relay with singlephase protection shall be provided for the fan motor and shaker motor. A pre-set electronic timer module shall be provided for control, of the “fan coast down time” and “clearing time”.
•
The electrical equipment shall be housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure with all push buttons rated NEMA 12. Conduit entries shall be provided in the top and the bottom of the enclosure.
•
A control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fusing shall be provided with Dust Collector. The control circuit shall be 115-volt circuit.
•
Internal fuses shall be provided for protection of the shaker motor circuit only. Fan motor circuit protection shall be by
Installing Contractor's fused disconnect.
•
Timer ambient temperature range shall be 25 degrees F to 140 degrees F.
−
Ductwork
−
Provide duct, fittings, elbows, etc.. Duct shall have smooth interior walls with no interior protrusions such as screws, nails, etc. Duct shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Duct shall be min. 24 gauge for sizes 4”-6”, min. 22 gauge for sizes 7”-
12” and min. 20 gauge for sizes 14” and larger. Provide gasketed clamps at all duct connections. Provide blast gates at all drops. Provide 100 ft of duct to provide 4 to 8 pickup drops.
−
Performance
Sq Ft Filter Media: ..................... 450
CFM: ....................................... 3,000
HP: ............................................... 10
TENV Shaker Motor: ............... ¼ HP
Page 96 of 103

FORM XXX
PRICING EXAMPLE: INDOOR QULALITY FILTRATION SYSTEM
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form I for this pricing example.
Description:
1.1 General: The particulate filtration system shall be comprised of a bank of non-ionizing, active-field, polarized media Air
Cleaners.
1.2 Non-ionizing, polarized media electronic Air Cleaners:
1.2.1 Certifications: The Air Cleaner shall have been tested and meet UL Standard 867 and CSA Standard C22.2 No.
187-M19986 for electrostatic Air Cleaners.
1.2.2
Operation: The Air Cleaner shall have an active electrostatic field that polarizes a dielectric media. It shall not ionize airborne particles or produce ozone.
1.2.3 Laboratory Testing Performance: Using the ASHRAE 52.2 protocol with carbon black in the test dust, the Air
Cleaner shall at MERV 13. Using the ASHRAE 52.2-NC protocol (with no carbon in the loading dust), the Air
Cleaner shall test at MERV 15. As installed, it shall have a clean static pressure drop of less than .29” w.g. at 500 feet per minute and shall increase in resistance no more than .25” w.g. with a dust loading of 2,855 grams. It shall hold a total of 4,582 grams of dust at its final resistance of 1.4” w.g. per 24x24 module. Any substitute Air Cleaner must meet these MERV ratings, static pressures and loading characteristics. The Air Cleaner manufacturer must provide testing from an approved ASHRAE test lab to verify MERV rating, operational and loading performance.
1.2.4 Field Performance: The Air Cleaner manufacturer shall produce at least two documented installation references, including client contact information with the following criteria:
1.2.4.1 Air Cleaners shall have operated continuously for a minimum of 2.5 years with no pre-filtration and without media change and achieved an increase of less than .2 inches of static pressure at a face velocity of ~500fpm, in an urban environment. Air cleaner installations must be greater than 10,000 cfm and serving office and/or hospital space.
1.2.4.2 In an urban environment, Air Cleaners must have demonstrated the ability to achieve indoor ultra-fine particle and black carbon levels that are up to 94% lower than the concentrations in the air outside the building.
Outdoor air levels brought into in the building must be based on the ASHRAE Standard 62 Ventilation Rate
Procedure.
1.2.4.3 Air Cleaners shall have demonstrated in at least three similar installations the ability to reduce outdoor air levels using the ASHRAE Standard 62 IAQ Procedure. Air quality test reports must be submitted and show that the indoor air quality is acceptable and at least as good as would be expected using the Ventilation Rate
Procedure.
1.2.5 Construction: The Air Cleaner modules shall consist of two individual Air Cleaners. Each module shall be 6” high and 29.5” deep and the width shall be 26, 30, 34, 39, 40, or 48”. The number or modules and width shall be such that the face velocity thru the filter bank shall be no more than 550 fpm.
The construction of the Air Cleaner frame shall be aluminum, and the screens and side panels shall be galvanized steel. The Air Cleaner modules and each component thereof must have a positive seal where necessary to prevent bypass of air.
1.2.6 Electronics: The high voltage Powerheads shall require 24 volts AC input and have a 9.5kV DC output. The
Powerheads must be fully potted and connected in parallel.
1.2.7 Power Supply: The 24VAC power supply must be a UL or CSA certified transformer, class “2” type, which shall permit one side of the secondary output (24V) to be attached to electrical ground.
1.2.8 Filter Media: Each Air Cleaner shall have a disposable and recyclable media pad with a minimum of a class “2” fire rating. It shall have a positive seal in the overall filter assembly.
1.2.9 Configuration: The Air Cleaners shall be arranged in a pre-fabricated module assembly comprised of eight separate Air Cleaners and galvanized metal sides and attachment flanges. Each “V” Bank module shall be nominally 12 or 18 in overall height, 26, 30, 34, 39, 43, or 48” in overall width, and 29.5” in depth.
1.3 Performance
Page 97 of 103

Airflow Rate (CFM)
Nominal Face Velocity (fpm)
Initial Resistance (in WG)
Final Resistance (in WG)
E1 (%) Composite Minimum Avg. Efficiency 0.30 – 1.0 um
E2 (%) Composite Minimum Avg. Efficiency 1.0 – 3.0 um
E3 (%) Composite Minimum Avg. Efficiency 3.0 – 10.0 um
Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) MERV 15 @ 1968 CFM
94
99
100
0.32
1.40
1968
492
Avg. Arrestance = 99.9%
Dust Holding Capacity = 2777.1 gms at (Recommended change out S.P. = +.2 over clean S.P.)
Page 98 of 103

FORM XXXI
PRICING EXAMPLE: EVAPORATIVE PROCESS COOLING
Price the product based on the following description. Use Form 1 for this pricing example
Description
1. General
•
Warranty & Startup
-
Provide one (1) year parts & labor warranty
-
Provide F.O.B. jobsite
2. Product
•
Frames
-
Provide a frame system for protecting the air cooled chiller coils and create a cool, moist micro-environment in which air temperature is lowered as it enters the air conditioning unit.
-
Frames shall be constructed of lightweight, high-strength industrial-grade plastic with the ability to deter microbial growth
-
Frame system shall attach to the chiller noninvasively
-
Provide a mounting hardware system for the frames does not violate the integrity of the air cooled chiller.
-
Configure the incoming moisture source to reduce water temperature by 20 degrees
•
Provide a control panel using environmental data to dictate when and how long, the frame will spray the refrigerated water onto a filter mesh.
3. Performance
Chiller use……………………….500 Tons
Max Water Usage………………5.5 gal/hr
Entering DB…………………..95 F
Entering WB………………….80 F
Leaving DB…………….….…75 F
Leaving WB………………… 72 F
Max WPD…………………..0.05 ft.
Page 99 of 103

FORM XXXII
LABOR WAGE CLASSIFICATION
Worker Classification Definition Sheet
Architect
Asbestos Worker
Boilermaker
Carpenter
Carpet Layer/Floor Installer
Concrete Finisher
Data Comm/Telecom Installer
Delivery Personnel
Drafting
Drywall/Ceiling Installer
Electrician
Elevator Mechanic
Engineering Design
Fire Proofing Installer
Geothermal Well Field Labor
Glazier
Professional Licensed designer providing Architectural drawings
Worker who removes & disposes of asbestos materials.
Worker who Assembles boilers, tanks, vats and pressure vessels.
The duties of the boilermaker include welding, acetylene burning, riveting, caulking, rigging, fitting up, grounding, reaming and impact machine operating.
Worker who builds wood structures or structures of any material which has replaced wood. Includes rough & finish carpentry, hardware and trim.
Worker who installs carpet and/or floor coverings-vinyl tile.
Worker who floats, trowels and finishes concrete.
Worker who installs data/telephone & television cable & associated equipment and accessories
Worker who can deliver materials to other HVAC personnel as well as work as a second man on jobs if necessary.
Worker who provides detail engineering drawings utilizing CADD type documents
Worker who installs metal framed walls & ceilings, drywall coverings, ceiling grids and ceilings
Skilled craftsman who installs or repairs electrical wiring & devices.
Includes fire alarm systems and HVAC electrical controls.
Craftsman skilled in the installation & maintenance of elevators.
Professional Licensed Engineer who layouts HVAC, Plumbing,
Electrical, Structural or Civil systems
Worker who sprays or applies fire proofing materials.
Worker who lays coiled pipe and tests and connects to HVAC equipment in earthen trench
Worker who installs glass, glazing and glass framing.
Heavy Equipment Operator
HVAC Building Automation technician
HVAC Commercial A/C technician
HVAC Light Commercial
HVAC Duct installer
HVAC Field Supervisor
Includes, but not limited to, all Cat tractors, all derrick-powered, all power operated cranes, back-hoe, back filler, power operated shovel, winch truck, all trenching machines
Worker who is capable of working on low temperature refrigeration equipment as well as small commercial equipment under 60 tons
Worker who is capable of working on large commercial up to 3000 tons
Worker who is capable of working on small commercial up to 25 tons
Worker who installs ductwork. Assists with some equipment installation.
Worker who monitors quality as well as provide technical support to all other HVAC technician skill levels
Page 100 of 103

HVAC Filter technician
HVAC Helper
HVAC Refrigeration technician
Insulator
Iron Worker
Laborer/Helper
Lather/Plasterer
Light Equipment Operator
Mason; Bricklayer
Metal Building Assembler
Millwright
Painter/Wall Covering Inst.
Pipefitter
Plumber
Project Engineering
Project Manager
Project Administrator
Roofer
Sheet Metal Worker
Sprinkler Fitter
Terrazzo Worker
Worker who changes filters in all types of HVAC equipment as well as minor maintenance on light commercial equipment such as changing worn belts.
Worker who can assist a commercial or refrigeration technician as well as perform minor analysis and repairs on equipment under 30 tons
Worker who is capable of working on low temperature refrigeration equipment as well as small commercial equipment under 60 tons
Worker who applies, sprays or installs insulation.
Skilled craftsman who erects structural steel framing & installs structural concrete rebar.
Worker qualified for only unskilled or semi-skilled work. Lifting, carrying materials and tools, hauling, digging, clean-up.
Worker who installs metal framing & lath. Worker who applies plaster to lathing & installs associated accessories
Includes, but not limited to, air compressors, truck crane driver, flex plane, building elevator, form grader, concrete mixer (less than 14cf), conveyer.
Craftsman who works with masonry products, stone, brick, block or any material substituting for those materials and accessories.
Worker who assembles pre-made metal buildings.
Mechanic specializing in the installation of heavy machinery, conveyance, wrenches, dock levelers, hydraulic lifts & align pumps.
Worker who prepares wall surfaces & applies paint and/or wall covering, tape & bedding.
Trained worker who installs piping systems, chilled water piping & hot water (boiler) piping, pneumatic tubing controls, chillers, boilers & associated mechanical equipment.
Skilled craftsman who installs domestic hot & cold water piping, waste piping, storm system piping, water closets, sinks, urinals, and related work.
Worker who monitors the engineering documents as well as provide technical support regarding the engineering plans and specifications as desgined by the Professional Engineer. Worker is responsible for maintaining project status and reports.
Worker who monitors quality as well as provide technical support to all other HVAC technician skill levels and is responsible for maintaining project status and reports.
Worker who provides administrative support to all technician skill levels and is responsible for all administrative functions of the project such as billings, contracts, work orders, legal requirements, purchase orders, sales tax certificates as well as proper record keeping.
Worker who installs roofing materials, Bitumen (asphalt & coal tar) felts, flashings, all types roofing membranes & associated products.
Worker who installs sheet metal products. Roof metal, flashings & curbs, ductwork, mechanical equipment and associated metals.
Worker who installs fire sprinkler systems & fire protection equipment.
Craftsman who places & finishes Terrazzo.
Page 101 of 103

Tile Setter
Waterproofer/Caulker
Test & Balance Technician
Infared Technician
Water Treatment Technician
CLASSIFICATION
Asbestos Worker
Boilermaker
Bricklayers; Masons
Carpenter /Case worker
Carpet Layers/Floor Installers
Concrete Finishers
Data Comm/Telecom Installer
Delivery personnel
Drywall Installers; Ceiling Installers
Electricians
Elevator Mechanics
Glaziers
Heavy Equipment Operators
HVAC Commercial A/C technician
HVAC Light Commercial
HVAC Helper
HVAC Field Supervisor
HVAC Refrigeration technician
HVAC Duct installer
HVAC Filter technician
HVAC Building Automation technician
Insulators
Ironworkers
Laborers
Lathers
Light Equipment Operators
Metal Building Assembler
Millwrights
Operating Engineer
Painters/Wall Covering Installers
Worker who prepares wall and/or floor surfaces & applies ceramic tiles to these surfaces
Worker who applies water proofing material to buildings. Products include sealant, caulk, sheet membrane, liquid membranes, sprayed, rolled or brushed.
Certified technician per AABC or NEBB standards trained to perform water and air balance. Also provides sound and vibration testing and preparing of certified reports
Worker who utilizes infared photography to determine location of thermal heat losses.
Certified technician who is trained to evaluate analytical test results on boiler system water, condenser water, and chill water samples and to make appropriate recommendations regarding residual levels, cycles,
and feed rates.
Hourly Rate
Page 102 of 103

Pipefitters
Plasterers
Plumbers
Project Manager
Project Administrator
Roofers
Sheet Metal Workers
Sprinkler Fitters
Terrazzo Workers
Tile Setters
Waterproofers/Caulkers
Geothermal Well Field Labor
Engineering Design
Project Engineering
Drafting
Architectural
Test & Balance Technician
Infarad Technician
Water Treatment Technician
Miscellaneous Material Margin
NOTES: Please provide your Hourly Rate for each category
•
Include standard hourly rates and describe your standard hours.
•
Include overtime rates & describe your standard hours
•
Provide any per Diem rate.
•
Rates quoted shall be fully burden rates and will include all miscellaneous cost such as truck and tool charges, additional travel cost such as gasoline charges and other carrying costs.
•
Rates will be adjusted annually at renewal date based on the Producers Price Index for Industry SIC for each region, or provide any other similar Benchmark. These will be considered maximum increases allowed under this contract. Prices will be adjusted solely at the discretion of TCPN contract manager.
•
Provide a Benchmark for determining Labor Hours by classification and what adjustments are to be used to differentiate local Labor.
Page 103 of 103